Asme B5.57-2012 (2022)

ASME B5.
57-2012
[Revision of ASME B5.57-1998 (R2006)]
R EAF FI RMED 2 02 2
Methods for
Performance
Evaluation of
Computer Numerically
Controlled Lathes and
Turning Centers
A N A M E R I C A N N AT I O N A L STA N DA R D
ASME B5.57-2012
[Revision of ASME B5.57-1998 (R2006)]
Methods for
Performance
Evaluation of
Computer Numerically
Controlled Lathes and
Turning Centers
AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD
Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA

Date of Issuance: May 3, 2013
This Standard will be revised when the Society approves the issuance of a new edition. There will be no written inter-
pretations of the requirements of this Standard issued to this editon.
Periodically, certain actions of the ASME B5 Committee may be published as Cases. Cases are published on the ASME
Web site under the Committee Pages at http://cstools.asme.org/ as they are issued.
Errata to codes and standards may be posted on the ASME Web site under the Committee Pages to provide correc-
tions to incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors in codes and standards. Such
errata shall be used on the date posted.
The Committee Pages can be found at http://cstools.asme.org/. There is an option available to automatically receive
an e-mail notification when errata are posted to a particular code or standard. This option can be found on the appro-
priate Committee Page after selecting “Errata” in the “Publication Information” section.
ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
This code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American National Standards. The
Standards Committee that approved the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests
have had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides
an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any items mentioned in this
document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for infringement of any applicable letters patent,
nor assumes any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights,
and the risk of infringement of such rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as government or industry
endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established ASME procedures
and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990
Copyright © 2013 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
Foreword .............................................................................................................................................................................. vi
Committee Roster ................................................................................................................................................................ vii
Correspondence With the B5 Committee ........................................................................................................................ viii
1 Scope.................................................................................................................................................................. 1
2 References ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
3 Nomenclature .................................................................................................................................................... 17
4 Definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 20
5 Environmental Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 33
6 Environmental Tests ......................................................................................................................................... 35
7 Machine Performance ....................................................................................................................................... 43
8 Machine Performance (Additional) ................................................................................................................. 88
9 Test Equipment and Instrumentation ............................................................................................................. 102
Figures
4-1 The Six Basic Error Motions of an Axis of Rotation.................................................................................... 21
4-2 Error Motion Polar Plot Showing a Polar Chart Center, a Least-Squares-Circle Center,
and Error Motion Values About These Centers ...................................................................................... 24
4-3 An Example of a Structural Loop Showing a Workpiece, Spindle, Machine Bed, and Tool ................ 31
6.2.1.4-1 Setup Showing Two Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental
Temperature Variation Error (ETVE) Between a Nominal Tool Location and a Work Spindle ....... 36
6.2.1.4-2 Setup Showing Three Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental
Temperature Variation Error (ETVE) Between a Nominal Tool Location and a Work Spindle ....... 38
6.2.1.4-3 Graph of Environmental Temperature Variation Error (ETVE) Data ...................................................... 39
6.2.1.6-1 Setup Showing Five Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental
Temperature Variation Error (ETVE) ........................................................................................................ 39
7.2.3-1 Typical Setup for a Laser Interferometer ...................................................................................................... 45
7.2.7-1 The Full Data Set for the Positioning Deviations of an Axis ..................................................................... 48
7.2.7-2 Positioning Deviations of an Axis, Forward Direction Only .................................................................... 49
7.2.8-1 Periodic Error of a Linear Axis (Unidirectional) ......................................................................................... 50
7.3.1.1-1 Setup for Measuring Straightness Using an Electronic Indicator and a
Mechanical Straightedge ............................................................................................................................ 51
7.3.1.2-1 Test Setup for Measuring Straightness Using a Taut Wire ........................................................................ 52
7.3.1.3-1 Test Setup for Measuring Straightness Using an Alignment Laser .......................................................... 53
7.3.1.4-1 Typical Straightness Interferometer .............................................................................................................. 53
7.3.2-1 Typical Plot Showing Straightness Data With the Straightness for a Particular
Axis Clearly Labeled ................................................................................................................................... 54
7.4.1-1 Typical Setup for Measuring the Angular Error Motion (Yaw) of the Cross-Slide on a
Group 1 Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 55
7.5.2-1 Schematic for the Measurement of Angular Positioning Using an Indexing Table
and a Laser Interferometer ......................................................................................................................... 56
7.5.2-2 Setup for Adjusting the Alignment of an Indexing Table and a Laser Angle Interferometer .............. 56
7.5.4-1 A Polygon Mounted to a Spindle Axis ......................................................................................................... 58
7.5.5-1 Typical Setup for Measuring the Angular Positioning Accuracy of a Rotary Axis
Using an Angular Encoder ......................................................................................................................... 59
iii
7.5.8.2-1 Typical Setup for Periodic Angular Error Measurement Using Mechanical Means.............................. 60
7.6.3-1 Test Setups for Measuring Spindle Error Motions in the Case of Fixed
Sensitive Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 62
7.6.4-1 Test Setup for Measuring Spindle Error Motions in the Case of Rotating
Sensitive Direction ....................................................................................................................................... 64
7.6.4-2 Spindle Test Setup With an Eccentric Ball .................................................................................................... 65
7.7.2.1-1 Sensor Data From a Typical Spindle Thermal Warm-Up Test................................................................... 67
7.7.2.1-2 Tilts of the Axis Average Line, Spindle Warm-Up Test .............................................................................. 68
7.7.3.1-1 Path for Measuring Thermal Distortion Caused by Moving Linear Axes .............................................. 69
7.7.3.2-1 Position Error Versus Time for a Typical Test for Thermal Distortion Caused by a
Moving Linear Axis ..................................................................................................................................... 70
7.7.4.1-1 Typical Results From a Composite Thermal Error Test ............................................................................. 72
7.8.2.1-1 Setup for Measuring Squareness of the Cross-Slide to the Work Spindle Using a
Mechanical Straightedge ............................................................................................................................ 74
7.8.2.1-2 Schematic Showing the Angles Involved When Measuring Cross-Slide Squareness to
the Spindle Axis ........................................................................................................................................... 74
7.8.2.1-3 Typical Data From a Cross-Slide Out-of-Squareness Measurement ........................................................ 75
7.8.2.2-1 Two Views of the Cylinder Used for Measuring Machine Out-of-Squareness
and Parallelism............................................................................................................................................. 76
7.8.2.2-2 Part-Trace Test Past Centers to Determine Cross-Slide Squareness With the Spindle Axis ................. 77
7.8.2.2-3 Typical Data From a Cross-Slide Out-of-Squareness Measurement by
Part Tracing Past Center ............................................................................................................................. 77
7.8.2.3-1 Cylinder Reversal for Cross-Slide Squareness ............................................................................................ 78
7.8.3.1-1 Setup for Straightedge Rotation on a Vertical Spindle Lathe for Measuring Z-Axis
Parallelism to the C-Axis ............................................................................................................................ 78
7.8.3.1-2 Setup for Straightedge Rotation on a Horizontal Spindle Lathe for Measuring Z-Axis
Parallelism to the C-Axis ............................................................................................................................ 79
7.8.3.2-1 Z-Slide Parallelism Schematic Showing the Test Cylinder ........................................................................ 79
7.8.3.2-2 Typical Data From a Parallelism Measurement Using the Turned Cylinder Method ........................... 80
7.8.4-1 Dual Straightness Measurement for Parallelism......................................................................................... 81
7.8.4-2 Graphing of Both Straightness Measurements for Twice the Angle of Parallelism ............................... 81
7.8.4-3 Setup for Measuring Long-Range Parallelism of the Z-Axis in the Case of a
Vertically Traversing Axis........................................................................................................................... 82
7.9.2-1 Typical Setup for a 360-deg Ball Bar Test ..................................................................................................... 84
7.9.2-2 Typical Results From a 360-deg Ball Bar Test .............................................................................................. 84
7.9.3-1 The Ball Bar Setup for the 190-deg Test on a Lathe .................................................................................... 85
7.9.3-2 Typical Results From a 190-deg Ball Bar Test on a Lathe ........................................................................... 85
7.9.4-1 Typical Ball Bar Setup for a 100-deg Test ..................................................................................................... 86
7.9.4-2 Typical Results of a 100-deg Ball Bar Test .................................................................................................... 87
7.10.2-1 A Typical Plot of the Power Loss in the Spindle Idle Run Loss Test ........................................................ 88
8.2-1 Illustration of Angularity and Offset Between Two Axes of Rotation ..................................................... 89
8.2.1-1 Typical Setup for the Rim-and-Face Test ...................................................................................................... 90
8.2.1-2 Setup for Measuring the Sag of a Pair of Indicators ................................................................................... 90
8.2.2-1 Typical Setup for the Reverse Indicator Method ........................................................................................ 91
8.2.3-1 Rotation Axes Alignment Using an Optical Alignment Laser .................................................................. 92
8.2.4-1 Two-Sphere Setup for the Alignment of Two Rotation Axes .................................................................... 93
8.2.5-1 Schematic of the Measurement of Parallelism of the Z-Axis to the Axis of a
Movable Tail Stock....................................................................................................................................... 93
8.2.5.1-1 Setup for Measuring Tail Stock Alignment Using the In-Feed (Z) Axis .................................................. 94
8.3.1-1 Tool Holders Used for Tool-Change Repeatability ..................................................................................... 95
8.3.2-1 Example Tool Holders to Be Used for Turret Repeatability ...................................................................... 96
8.4.2-1 Test Part for Determining the Location of a Tool-Setting System and
Tool-Setting-System Drift ........................................................................................................................... 98
8.6.2-1 Approximate Location of Probed Points, Depending on Probe Configuration,
When Measuring a Machined Test Part ................................................................................................... 100
8.6.3-1 Approximate Location of Probed Points, Depending on Probe Configuration,
When Measuring a Test Sphere ................................................................................................................. 101
iv
Forms
1 Machine Description ....................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Environmental Specifications Guidelines .................................................................................................... 4
3 Environmental Tests (Section 6) .................................................................................................................... 6
4 Machine Performance (Section 7) .................................................................................................................. 7
5 Coaxiality of Axes of Rotation (Para. 8.2) .................................................................................................... 14
6 Subsystems Repeatability (Para. 8.3) ............................................................................................................ 15
7 CNC Performance Tests (Para. 8.5) ............................................................................................................... 16
8 Machine Performance as a Measuring Tool (Para. 8.6) .............................................................................. 16
Tables
6.2.2.1-1 Specification Zones Derated Due to an Excessive Expanded Thermal Uncertainty ............................. 40
6.3.1-1 Performance Parameters Derated Due to Excessive Environmental Vibration ..................................... 42
7.2.7-1 Typical Test Results (Test for Linear Axis up to 2 m) ................................................................................. 47
7.2.7.9-1 Conversion Factors for Graphically Estimating Standard Uncertainty................................................... 50
7.7.4.3-1 Typical Presentation of Results From Composite Thermal Error Tests ................................................... 72
7.9.5-1 Typical Results of a Ball Bar Test ................................................................................................................... 87
Nonmandatory Appendices
A Guide for Using the Draft Turning Center Standard ................................................................................. 105
B 1-Day Test for Machine Performance ........................................................................................................... 106
C Thermal Environment Verification Tests ...................................................................................................... 107
D Seismic Vibration Verification Tests .............................................................................................................. 109
E Electrical Power Verification Tests ................................................................................................................ 113
F Machine Functional Tests ............................................................................................................................... 114
G Machine Leveling and Alignment ................................................................................................................. 116
H Compliance and Hysteresis Checks .............................................................................................................. 117
I Laser and Scale Corrections ........................................................................................................................... 120
J Drift Checks for Sensors, Including Lasers .................................................................................................. 121
K The Part-Trace Test .......................................................................................................................................... 124
L Discussion of the UNDE and Thermal Uncertainty .................................................................................... 125
M Calculation of Uncertainties........................................................................................................................... 130
N Sign Conventions for Error Values................................................................................................................ 134
v
FOREWORD
The primary purpose of this Standard is to provide procedures for the performance evaluation of computer
numerically controlled (CNC) lathes and turning centers. These procedures are used to evaluate conformance to
specifications, to compare machines, to periodically reverify the suitability of production machines, and to reverify
performance of machines after repair or modification. Definitions, environmental requirements, and test methods
are specified. This Standard defines the test methods capable of yielding adequate results for most turning centers
but is not intended to supplement more complete tests that may be required for particular special applications. This
Standard does not address issues of machine safety.
Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. They should be sent to The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; Attn: Secretary, B5 Standards Committee; Two Park Avenue; New York, NY 10016-5990.
This revision was approved as an American National Standard on November 30, 2012.
vi
ASME B5 COMMITTEE
Machine Tools — Components, Elements,
Performance, and Equipment
(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Standard.)
STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

S. G. Wallace, Chair
C. J. Gomez, Secretary
STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

J. A. Babinsky, Contributing Member, Danaher Motion C. J. Gomez, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
A. M. Bratkovich, Consultant D. Mancini, Edmunds Gages
J. B. Bryan, Honorary Member, Consultant J. A. Soons, National Institute of Standards and Technology
H. M. Byrnes, The Babcock & Wilcox Co. R. C. Spooner, Powerhold, Inc.
H. Cooper, Honorary Member, Consultant D. Springhorn, Diebold Goldring Tooling, USA
J. D. Drescher, UTC — Pratt & Whitney S. G. Wallace, The Boeing Co.
D. A. Felinski, B11 Standards, LLC
TECHNICAL COMMITTEE 52 — MACHINE TOOL PERFORMANCE

J. D. Drescher, Chair, UTC — Pratt & Whitney J. A. Soons, Alternate, National Institute of Standards and Technology
P. L. Freeman, Vice Chair, The Boeing Co. R. J. Hocken, Contributing Member, University of North Carolina, Charlotte
D. Ajao, General Motors Technical Center L. Koch, Bourn & Koch, Inc.
A. M. Bailey, Renishaw, Inc. G. Lawson, Hardinge, Inc.
C. Warren, Alternate, Renishaw, Inc. E. Kushnir, Alternate, Hardinge, Inc.
A. M. Bratkovich, Consultant C. D. Lovett, Consultant
J. B. Bryan, Consultant D. L. Martin, Contributing Member, Lion Precision
R. P. Callaghan, Jr., Independent Quality Labs, Inc. J. Nilsson, Precision Measuring Corp.
M. A. Cummings, Techsolve M. Omari, Consultant
M. Dassanayake, Sankyo Seisakusho Co. M. R. Stallings, Northrop Grumman Corp.
T. Davis, Contributing Member, United Launch Alliance C. P. Wang, Optodyne, Inc.
C. W. Dickson, Consol Metrology Service, Inc. L. Yang, Electroimpact, Inc.
A. Donmez, National Institute of Standards and Technology
vii
CORRESPONDENCE WITH THE B5 COMMITTEE
General. ASME Standards are developed and maintained with the intent to represent the consensus of concerned
interests. As such, users of this Standard may interact with the Committee by proposing revisions and attending
Committee meetings. Correspondence should be addressed to:
Secretary, B5 Standards Committee
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990
http://go.asme.org/Inquiry
Proposing Revisions. Revisions are made periodically to the Standard to incorporate changes that appear necessary
or desirable, as demonstrated by the experience gained from the application of the Standard. Approved revisions will
be published periodically. The Committee welcomes proposals for revisions to this Standard. Such proposals should
be as specific as possible, citing the paragraph number(s), the proposed wording, and a detailed description of the
reasons for the proposal, including any pertinent documentation.
Proposing a Case. Cases may be issued for the purpose of providing alternative rules when justified, to permit
early implementation of an approved revision when the need is urgent, or to provide rules not covered by existing
provisions. Cases are effective immediately upon ASME approval and shall be posted on the ASME Committee Web
page.
Requests for Cases shall provide a Statement of Need and Background Information. The request should identify
the standard, the paragraph, figure or table number(s), and be written as a Question and Reply in the same format
as existing Cases. Requests for Cases should also indicate the applicable edition(s) of the standard to which the pro-
posed Case applies.
Attending Committee Meetings. The B5 Standards Committee regularly holds meetings, which are open to the pub-
lic. Persons wishing to attend any meeting should contact the Secretary of the B5 Standards Committee.
viii
ASME B5.57-2012
METHODS FOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

OF COMPUTER NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED
LATHES AND TURNING CENTERS
1 SCOPE maximum metal-removal capability. Additionally, the

machine is run for approximately 24 h to determine
This Standard establishes requirements and meth- short-term reliability.
ods for specifying and testing the performance of CNC (e) Additional Machine Performance. Additional per-
lathes and turning centers. In addition to clarifying the formance sections are provided for axis of rotation
performance evaluation of lathes and turning centers, alignment, tail stock alignment, subsystems repeatabil-
this Standard seeks to facilitate performance compari- ity, tool-setting performance, CNC performance, and
sons between machines by unifying terminology, general machine performance as a measuring tool.
machine classification, and the treatment of environ- (f) Machining Test Parts. This Standard provides for
mental effects. The Standard defines testing methods the machining of test parts for a particular manufactur-
capable of yielding adequate performance results for ing application. These test parts shall be fully specified
the majority of turning centers and is not intended to as part of the original purchasing agreement between
replace more complete tests. It is not the intent of this the User and the Supplier. Such specification shall
Standard to place limits on, or to enforce 100%-testing include, but not be limited to, material, tooling, machin-
of, any individual machine tool in accordance with this ing sequence, and inspection procedure.
Standard. This shall be the subject of contractual agree- This Standard is rather comprehensive, and for
ment between the Supplier and the User. smaller, less-expensive machines, a shorter series
The actual specification for turning centers is divided of tests for conformance to specification is given in
into the following six logical areas: Nonmandatory Appendix B.
(a) General Definitions. Definitions provided in this Stan
dard are generally consistent with the usage in other refer-
enced documents related to machine tools and metrology, 1.1 Performance Forms (Sample)
although some are specific to their use in this Standard. A schematic of the machine with axis directions
(b) Machine Environmental Specifications and Responses. should be provided along with Forms 1 through 8.
Environmental specifications and responses include
thermal, electrical, and vibration specifications and
tests, as well as requirements on utility air and other
1.2 Alternatives
externally supplied services. Where specifications use definitions and procedures
(c) Machine Accuracy Performance as a Machine Tool. different than those in this Standard, the alternative
Machine accuracy performance as a machine tool items shall be identified and made part of the machine
includes positioning accuracy and repeatability for lin- specification. Such procedures should follow the philos-
ear and rotary axes, angular error motion of linear axes, ophy outlined in the previous paragraphs and be speci-
spindle axis of rotation analysis, machine thermal tests, fied in equivalent detail.
critical alignments, and contouring performance using This Standard allows parts of the environmental test sec-
circular tests. tion to be deferred or bypassed, and only the performance
(d) Machine Cutting Performance and Short-Term test to be carried out. This alternative is allowable only if
Reliability. Machine cutting performance and short-term it is acceptable to both the User and the Supplier and if
reliability includes tests of spindle idle run losses and deferred according to the procedures outlined in para. 6.1.
1
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION
Linear Axes
Full Travel Control Resolution Minimum Programming Increment
Axis Name mm in. mm in. mm in.
X
Y
Z
Maximum Programmable
Feed Rate Rapid Traverse Speed Acceleration/Deceleration
2
Axis Name mm/min in./min mm/min in./min mm/s 2 in./sec
X
Y
Z
Rotary Machining Axes

Minimum Maximum Rapid
Full Control Programming Programmable Traverse Acceleration/
Axis Travel, Resolution, Increment, Feed Rate, Speed, Deceleration, Time to Rotate, s
Name deg deg deg deg/min deg/min deg/s2 90o 180o
A
B
C
Rotary Positioning Axes

Time to Index, s
o o
Axis Name Full Travel, deg Minimum Index Increment, deg 90 180
A
B
C
Principal Spindle Parameters (for Each Spindle)
Rotation Speed, rpm Spindle Power Continuous Duty

Spindle Range Min. Max. kW hp
1
2
2
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)
Workpiece or tool spindle: headstock tool

Minimum programmable speed: ____________ rpm
Supplier shall furnish torque/power curves for each spindle range. Intermittent duty
cycle details for each spindle range shall be supplied if applicable.
Tool holder type: __________________

Other
Tool-indexing time — all turrets
Tool change time (where applicable): _____ s
Pocket-to-pocket: _____ s
Longest time: _____ s
Tool-setting system measurement time (where applicable): ______ s
Pallet change time (where applicable): ______ s
Axis indexing time (where applicable): ______ s
Machine Tool Probes (for Each Probe)

Probe type
Part probe Tool-setting probe
Contact Noncontact
Switching Proportional Nulling
1D 2D 3D
Operating parameters
Probe approach rate: ______ mm/s (______ in./sec)
Probe approach distance: ______ mm (______ in.)
Settling time (proportional probes only): ______s
Software
Allows only 1D measurements
Allows only 2D measurements
Allows 3D measurements
List of Compensation Tables in the Controller

Supplier shall provide a technical description of the machine compensation system
(where applicable), as well as a statement describing User access to compensation
system parameters.
Accessible by User, Information Attached,

Compensation Description Yes/No Yes/No
3
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS GUIDELINES
Thermal Information (para. 5.2)

°C °F
Mean ambient temperature
Minimum safe operating temperature
Maximum safe operating temperature
Daily (24-h) temperature cycling amplitude, �
Superimposed cycle(s)
Amplitude: � _______ °C (� ________ °F)
Frequency: _______ cycles/h
Maximum temperature gradients

Vertical: ________ °C/m (_________ °F/ft)
Horizontal: ________ °C/m (_________ °F/ft)
Maximum mean air speed surrounding the machine: ________ m/s (_______ ft/sec)
Additional guidelines on machine component placement and special flow parameters,

such as mean flow rate, shall be specified if appropriate.
Nominal Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Linear Machine Feedback Device

Nominal Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
Axis 10–6 per °C 10–6 per °F
X
Y
Z
Seismic Vibration Allowances (para. 5.3)
Option 1 Response function data

(Detailed permissible vector vibration spectra shall be attached as a part of this specification.)
Option 2 Broadband data [time history (para. D-3.2.2)]

Frequency Range, Hz Peak-to-Peak Amplitude
Min. Max. mm in.
4
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS GUIDELINES (CONT’D)
Electrical (para. 5.4)

(Equivalent specification is required for each electrical supply.)
Steady-state requirements
Nominal RMS voltage: _______ V Frequency:______ Hz Amperage: _____ A
______ Single-phase _____ Three-phase ______ Delta _____Wye
Allowable short-duration RMS voltage variations (instantaneous)
Voltage sag (8.3 ms to 500 ms): _________ % of nominal
Voltage swell (8.3 ms to 500 ms):_________ % of nominal
Allowable long-duration RMS variations
Overvoltages (> 1 min): % of nominal
Undervoltages (> 1 min): % of nominal
Allowable transient voltage (0.5 �s to 800 �s): % of nominal
Utility Air, If Applicable (para. 5.5)

Pressure: ________ MPa (_________ psi)
Flow rate: ________ dm3/s (_________ SCFM)
Dew point: _______ °C (_________ °F)
Particulate removal requirements

Maximum particulate size: ______ �m (______ �in.), % removal
Other Services, If Applicable (para. 5.6)

Foundation/installation specifications (must be included by Supplier)
Construction drawings: □ Yes □ No
Supplier shall provide a technical description of the coolant system.
Coolant through spindle: □ Yes □ No
GENERAL NOTE: The parameters listed here are based on assumptions regarding
normal air-conditioned rooms. Another set, if provided as part of the machine specification
and agreed on between the Supplier and the User, shall be acceptable for the purposes of
this Standard. In some cases, other fluids (rather than air) are used to provide thermal
stability. In those cases, separate guidelines should also be provided.
5
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 3 ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS (SECTION 6)
Environmental Temperature Variation Error (para. 6.2)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Location for ETVE Test

(Machine Coordinates)
Axis mm or deg in. or deg
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
Reported Range Drift

Result mm or arcsec in. or arcsec
ETVE x
ETVE y
ETVE z
ETVE xx
ETVE yy
Relative Vibration Test (para. 6.3)

If the nominal location for this test is different from that of the environmental
temperature variation test, the nominal location shall be recorded in this sheet.
Date: _________
Time: _________
Operator:
Relative Vibration
Direction mm in.
X
Y
Z
6
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 4 MACHINE PERFORMANCE (SECTION 7)
Machine Compliance and Hysteresis (Nonmandatory Appendix H)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Location for Tests (Machine Coordinates)

Location of Test (Machine Coordinates)
X Y Z
Compliance mm in. mm in. mm in. A, deg B, deg C, deg
X
Y
Z
A
B
C
Machine Compliance and Hysteresis Measured Between Machine Spindle and Workpiece
Axis That
Direction of Generates the
Measured Radius Offset Clamped or Force Compliance Hysteresis
Compliance Rotary Axis (Rotary Axis) Servo Held [Note (1)] mm/N in./lb mm in.
X N/A N/A N/A
Y N/A N/A N/A
Z N/A N/A N/A
X or Y A
X or Z B
Y or Z C
NOTE:
(1) Enter "N/A" if the force is applied using an external actuator such as a turnbuckle
or hydraulic jack.
7
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 4 MACHINE PERFORMANCE (SECTION 7) (CONT’D)
Positioning Accuracy and Repeatability (para. 7.2)

Linear Axes
Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Maximum Unidirectional Bidirectional Systematic Bidirectional

Systematic Deviation of Deviation of Accuracy of Periodic Error,
Positioning, E or E Positioning, E Positioning, A P
Axis mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.
X
Y
Z
Maximum Unidirectional
Repeatability, Bidirectional
R or R Repeatability, R Reversal Deviation, B
Axis mm in. mm in. mm in.
X
Y
Z
Minimum ambient temperature: °C ( °F)

Maximum ambient temperature: °C ( °F)
Ambient air pressure: mm Hg ( in. Hg)
Relative humidity: %
Machine temperature: °C ( °F)
Feed rate of testing: mm/min ( in./min)
Positioning Accuracy and Repeatability of Rotary Axes (para. 7.5)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Maximum Unidirectional Bidirectional Systematic Bidirectional

Systematic Deviation of Deviation of Accuracy of Periodic Error,
Positioning, E or E , Positioning, E, Positioning, A, P,
Axis arcsec arcsec arcsec arcsec
A
B
C
Turret axis
8
ASME B5.57-2012
Maximum Unidirectional
Repeatability, Bidirectional
R or R , Repeatability, R, Reversal Deviation, B,
Axis arcsec arcsec arcsec
A
B
C
Turret axis
Minimum ambient temperature: °C ( °F)

Maximum ambient temperature: °C ( °F)
Rotary feed rate: deg/min
Angular Errors (Usually Yaw) of Linear Axes (para. 7.4)
Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Maximum Unidirectional Maximum

Systematic Deviation of Bidirectional Systematic Unidirectional Bidirectional
Angular Angular Error, Deviation of Angular Repeatability, Repeatability,
Error Eae or Eae , Error, Eae , Rae or Rae , Rae,
Designation arcsec arcsec arcsec arcsec
Yaw of X
Spindle Axis of Rotation (for Each Spindle, para. 7.6)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Spindle:
Structural Motion, Spindle Off (para 7.6.2)

Machine Drives Off Machine Drives On
mm in. mm in.
Along X or Y direction
Along Z direction
9
ASME B5.57-2012
Work Spindle, Fixed Sensitive Direction

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Spindle:
Percent of Maximum Speed

10% 50% 100%
Spindle speed rpm
Average radial error motion mm
in.
Asynchronous radial error motion mm
in.
Total axial error motion mm
in.
Average tilt error motion arcsec
Asynchronous tilt error motion arcsec
Tool Spindle, Rotating Sensitive Direction

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Spindle:
Percent of Maximum Speed

10% 50% 100%
Spindle speed rpm
Average radial error motion mm
in.
Asynchronous radial error motion mm
in.
Total axial error motion mm
in.
Average tilt error motion �rad
Asynchronous tilt error motion �rad
10
ASME B5.57-2012
Machine Thermal Tests (para. 7.7)

Spindle Warm-Up and Transient Shutoff Test (for Each Spindle)
Date: Duration of test:
Time: Spindle speed:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Coolant: on off
Spindle:
Displacement and Tilt of the Axis of Rotation

Drift During Warm-Up Drift During Transient Shutoff
Error Motion mm or �rad in. or �rad mm or �rad in. or �rad
Displacement in X, Dx
Displacement in Y, Dy
Displacement in Z, Dz
Tilt around X, Dy,z
Tilt around Y, Dy,z
Thermal Distortion Caused by Moving Linear Axes (for Each Axis, para. 7.7.3)
Date: Duration of test:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Range of Drift at Position 1 in Axis Direction Range of the Drift at Position 2 in Axis Direction
Forward Direction Reverse Direction Forward Direction Reverse Direction
Axis mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in.
X
Y
Z
Composite Thermal Error (para. 7.7.4)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Duration of test:
Distance between indicator 1 and indicator 2: mm ( in.)
Drift After 30 Min Drift After Min

Error Motion
Displacement in X, in.
Displacement in Y, in.
Displacement in Z, in.
Tilt around X, �rad
Tilt around Y, �rad
11
ASME B5.57-2012
Critical Alignments (para. 7.8)

Squareness errors between cross-slide (X-axis) and the work spindle axis (often a C-axis)
Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Measurement method (select one)

Mechanical straightedge
Test part
Soak-out time: min
Machining time: min
Warm-up cycle must be specified.
Squareness Error Error Magnitude, arcsec

XC squareness
Parallelism of the longitudinal slide (Z-axis) with the work spindle (often a C-axis)
and other linear axes
Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
Measurement method (select one)

Mechanical straightedge
Test part
Soak-out time: min
Machining time: min
Warm-up cycle must be specified.
Laser for long-travel axes
Mechanical straightedge (para. 7.8.3.1)
Parallelism Error Error Magnitude, arcsec

Z–C parallelism in X–Z plane
Z–C parallelism in Y–Z plane
Z–W parallelism in X–Z plane
Z–W parallelism in Y–Z plane
12
ASME B5.57-2012
Contouring Performance Tests (para. 7.9)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Compensated: yes no
A 360-deg test should be used where possible; otherwise, a 190-deg test should be used.
If neither of those tests is possible, then a 100-deg test shall be allowed.
Plane: X–Z 360 deg 190 deg 100 deg

Nominal radius mm
in.
% max 10% 80% 10% 80% 10% 80%
Feed rate mm/min
in. /min
Circular deviation, G mm
clockwise in.
Circular deviation, G mm
counterclockwise in.
Radial deviation, Fmin mm
clockwise in.
Radial deviation, Fmin mm
Radial deviation, Fmax mm
clockwise in.
Radial deviation, Fmax mm
Cutting Performance Tests (para. 7.10)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Spindle Idle Run Losses (para. 7.10.2)

Report for each work and tool spindle.
Maximum spindle speed: rpm
% of Max. Speed Lost Power, kW

20
40
60
80
100
13
ASME B5.57-2012
Chatter Susceptibility and Maximum Torque Test (para. 7.10.3)

Detailed specifications and procedures shall be agreed upon between the User and the
Supplier and made part of the machine specification.
Multifunction Cycle Test (para. 7.11)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Duration of the test: min

Number of failures:
Maximum time required for correction: min
FORM 5 COAXIALITY OF AXES OF ROTATION (PARA. 8.2)
For each of the tests below, the User may specify the specification zones with machine
compensation on or off, or both.
Select one:
Rim-and-face method (para. 8.2.1)
Reverse indicator method (para. 8.2.2)
Optical rotary axis alignment (para. 8.2.3)
Two-sphere axis alignment (para. 8.2.4)
Mechanical rotary axis alignment (para. 8.2.5.1)
Offset in the vertical direction, VO: mm ( in.)

Offset in the horizontal direction, HO: mm ( in.)
Parallelism, angularity in the vertical direction, VA: arcsec
Parallelism, angularity in the horizontal direction, HA: arcsec
14
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 6 SUBSYSTEMS REPEATABILITY (PARA. 8.3)
Tool-Change Repeatability (para. 8.3.1)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Length from gage line for short tool: ______mm (______ in. )
Length from gage line for long tool: ______mm (______ in. ) (100 mm is recommended.)
Tool-Change Repeatability
Error Short Tool Long Tool

Direction mm in. mm in.
X
Z
Turret Repeatability (para. 8.3.2)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Length from gage line for short tool: ______mm (______ in. )
Length from gage line for long tool: ______mm (______ in. ) (100 mm is recommended.)
Tool-Change Repeatability
Error Short Tool Long Tool

Direction mm in. mm in.
X
Z
Tool-Setting System Location and Repeatability (para. 8.4)

Date:
Time:
Operator:
Tool-setting X repeatability: mm ( in.)

Tool-setting Z repeatability: mm ( in.)
Tool-setting X location: mm ( in.)
Tool-setting Z location: mm ( in.)
15
ASME B5.57-2012
FORM 7 CNC PERFORMANCE TESTS (PARA. 8.5)
Date:
Time:
Operator:
Maximum steady feed rate, Vmax: mm/min ( in./min)

Minimum block execution time, MBET: s
FORM 8 MACHINE PERFORMANCE AS A MEASURING TOOL (PARA. 8.6)
Feature Location Repeatability

1D 2D 3D
Axis mm in. mm in. mm in.
X
Y
Z
2D-feature measurement accuracy: mm ( in.)

3D-feature measurement accuracy: mm ( in.)
2D-probe lobing range: mm ( in.)

3D-probe lobing range: mm ( in.)
Linear measurement accuracy in X: mm ( in.)

Linear measurement accuracy in Y: mm ( in.)
Linear measurement accuracy in Z: mm ( in.)
Volumetric measuring performance: mm ( in.)

Circular profile measurement accuracy: mm ( in.)
Workpiece Location
Workpiece Location Working Tolerance

Axis mm in.
X
Y
Z
16
ASME B5.57-2012
2 REFERENCES ISO 13041-3:2009, Test Conditions for Numerically

Controlled Turning Machines and Turning Centres —
The following is a list of publications referenced in Part 3: Geometric Tests for Machines With Inverted
this Standard. Vertical Workholding Spindle
ANSI B5.54-2005, Methods for the Performance ISO DIS 230-1:2009, Test Code for Machine Tools — Part
Evaluation of Computer Numerically Controlled 1: Geometric Accuracy of Machine Tools Operating
Machining Centers Under No-Load or Quasi-Static Conditions
ANSI B89.3.4M-2010, Axes of Rotation ISO/IEC Guide 98-3:2008, Uncertainty of Measurement
ANSI B89.6.2-1973, Temperature and Humidity Environ — Part 3: Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in
ment for Dimensional Measurement Measurement [GUM:1995(E)]
ANSI/EIA-267-C-1990, Axis and Motion Nomenclature ISO/IEC Guide 99:2007, International Vocabulary
for Numerically Controlled Machines of Metrology — Basic and General Concepts and
Publisher: American National Standards Institute Associated Terms (VIM)
(ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036 Publisher: International Organization for Standar
(www.ansi.org) dization (ISO) Central Secretariat, 1, ch. de la
ASME B89.4.1.10360.2-2008, Acceptance Test and Reve Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Genève 20,
rification Test for Coordinate Measuring Machines Switzerland/Suisse (www.iso.org)
(CMMs), Part 2: CMMs Used for Measuring Linear
Dimensions (Technical Report) 3 NOMENCLATURE
Publisher: The American Society of Mechanical 1D 5 one-dimensional
Engineers, Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016- 2D 5 two-dimensional
5990; Order Department: 22 Law Drive, P.O. Box 2900, 3D 5 three-dimensional
Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900 (www.asme.org) A 5 a computer-controlled rotary axis, other
ISO 1:2002, Geometrical Product Specifications (GPS) than a spindle axis1
— Standard Reference Temperature for Geometrical A 5 bidirectional accuracy of positioning of an
Product Specification and Verification axis
ISO 230-2:2006, Test Code for Machine Tools — Part 2: A↑ 5 unidirectional accuracy of positioning of an
Determination of Accuracy and Repeatability of axis, forward direction
Positioning Numerically Controlled Axes A↓ 5 unidirectional accuracy of positioning of an
ISO 230-3:2007, Test Code for Machine Tools — Part 3: axis, reverse direction
Evaluation of Thermal Effects Aae 5 bidirectional total angular error
ISO 230-4:2005, Test Code for Machine Tools — Part 4: Aae ↑ 5 unidirectional total angular error, forward
Circular Tests for Numerically Controlled Machine Tools direction
ISO 554:1976, Standard Atmospheres for Conditioning Aae↓ 5 unidirectional total angular error, reverse
and/or Testing — Specifications direction
ISO 841:2001, Industrial Automation Systems and ANGF 5 angle measured in the forward direction,
Integration —- Numerical Control of Machines — straightedge reversal
Coordinate System and Motion Nomenclature ANGR 5 angle measured in the reverse direction,
ISO 1940-1: 2003, Mechanical Vibration-Balance Quality straightedge reversal
Requirements for Rotors in a Constant (Rigid) State a1 5 upper limit of a uniform distribution
— Part 1: Specification and Verification of Balance a2 5 lower limit of a uniform distribution
Tolerances B 5 maximum of the absolute reversal values at
ISO 3205:1976, Preferred Test Temperatures all target positions along an axis
ISO 10360-2:2001, Geometrical Product Specifications B 5 mean reversal value of an axis
(GPS) — Acceptance and Reverification Tests for Bae 5 reversal deviation of angular error
Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM) — Part 2: Bi 5 reversal value at target position, i, along or
CMMs Used for Measuring Size around an axis
ISO 13041-1:2004, Test Conditions for Numerically C 5 a programmable spindle axis
Controlled Turning Machines and Turning Centres — Cn 5 a programmable spindle axis on a machine
Part 1: Geometric Tests for Machines With Horizontal with more than one spindle axis (n51, 2,...)
Workholding Spindle CPMA 5 circular profile measurement accuracy
ISO 13041-2:2008, Test Conditions for Numerically
1 In this Standard, “A” is used to symbolize two different quantities. This
Controlled Turning Machines and Turning Centres
is done to conform with existing ISO and ANSI standards. The accuracy
— Part 2: Geometric Tests for Machines With Vertical variable, A, is italicized. The axis designation, A, is not italicized. The
Workholding Spindle usage is so different it is expected that no confusion will arise.
17
ASME B5.57-2012
CXn 5 mean X circle center at position n = 1, 2, Fmax↓ 5 radial deviation, maximum, counterclock-
two-sphere axis alignment wise direction, circular test
CYn 5 mean Y circle center at position n = 1, 2, Fmin↑ 5 radial deviation, minimum, clockwise
two-sphere axis alignment direction, circular test
c(Xn,30) 5 X displacement at position n (n 5 1, 2,...) Fmin↓ 5 radial deviation, minimum, counterclock-
after 30 min, composite thermal error test wise direction, circular test
c(Xn,t) 5 X displacement at position n (n 5 1, 2,...) FM(X) 5 feature measurement accuracy, X direction
after t min, composite thermal error test FM(Z) 5 feature measurement accuracy, Z direction
c(Yn,30) 5 Y displacement at position n (n 5 1, 2,...) FRs 5 mean sag of face indicator, rim-and-face test
after 30 min, composite thermal error test FRN 5 mean face reading at N, N 5 0, 3, 6, 9, rim-
c(Yn,t) 5 Y displacement at position n (n 5 1, 2,...) and-face test
after t min, composite thermal error test G↑ 5 circular deviation, clockwise, circular test
c(Z,30) 5 Z displacement after 30 min, composite G↓ 5 circular deviation, counterclockwise, circu-
thermal error test lar test
c(Z,t) 5 Z displacement after t min, composite ther- H 5 circular hysteresis, circular test
mal error test HA 5 horizontal angle between two axes of rota-
Dc 5 diameter of a test cylinder tion, coaxiality of axes of rotation
Dg 5 distance between two gages HO 5 horizontal offset between two axes of rota-
Di 5 gage reading during spindle warm-up test tion, coaxiality of axes of rotation
(i 5 1 to 5) HOn 5 horizontal offset at position n, n 5 1, 2, two-
Dx 5 spindle thermal drift, X direction sphere axis alignment
Dx,z 5 spindle angular thermal drift of axis aver- INCR 5 increment length used to test block execu-
age line, X–Z plane tion time
Dy 5 spindle thermal drift, Y direction i 5 index of target position
Dy,z 5 spindle angular thermal drift of axis aver- j 5 index for number of measurements
age line, Y–Z plane k 5 coverage factor
Dz 5 spindle thermal drift, Z direction L 5 dimension of workpiece at 20°C (68°F)
DIA 5 diameter of a circle or part L1,2 5 distance between indicators 1 and 2 and
E 5 bidirectional systematic deviation of posi- spindle face, spindle thermal stability test
tioning of an axis Lc 5 length of a test cylinder
E↑ 5 unidirectional systematic deviation of posi- Lcte 5 distance between the displacement indica-
tion of an axis, forward direction tors in the composite thermal error test
E↓ 5 unidirectional systematic deviation of posi- Ld 5 dimension between two gages used to cal-
tion of an axis, reverse direction culate angle
E(X) 5 bidirectional systematic deviation of posi- Ls 5 dimension of the reference and/or working
tioning, X-axis standard at 20°C (68°F)
E(Z) 5 bidirectional systematic deviation of posi- LT 5 dimension of an object at temperature T≠
tioning, Z-axis 20°C (68°F)
Eae 5 bidirectional systematic angular error LX 5 traverse length of the X-axis
Eae↑ 5 unidirectional systematic angular error, for- LZ 5 traverse length of the Z-axis
ward direction LMA(X) 5 linear measurement accuracy, X direction
Eae↓ 5 unidirectional systematic angular error, MA(Z) 5 linear measurement accuracy, Z direction
reverse direction LSC 5 least-squares circle center of a polar profile
ETVE 5 environmental temperature variation error LUTM 5 length uncertainty due to temperature
e(xn↑) 5 range of thermal drift, target position n, X measurement
direction, forward, thermal distortion test M 5 range of the mean bidirectional positional
e(xn↓) 5 range of thermal drift, target position n, X deviations of an axis
direction, reverse, thermal distortion test Max[q] 5 maximum value of a quantity, q
e(zn↑) 5 range of thermal drift, target position n, Z MBET 5 minimum block execution time
direction, forward, thermal distortion test MIC 5 minimum inscribed circle center of a polar
e(zn↓) 5 range of thermal drift, target position n, Z profile
direction, reverse, thermal distortion test Min[q] 5 minimum value of a quantity, q
F 5 out-of-squareness angle between a straight- MR(R) 5 measurement repeatability of a radius
edge and a spindle axis MR(X) 5 measurement repeatability, X direction
Fmax↑ 5 radial deviation, maximum, clockwise MR(Z) 5 measurement repeatability, Z direction
direction, circular test MRs 5 mean sag of the M gage, reverse indicator test
18
ASME B5.57-2012
MRN 5 mean M gage reading at N 5 0, 3, 6, 9, SMTC 5 significant mean temperature change

reverse indicator test SOTR 5 safe operating temperature range
MRS 5 minimum radial separation center of a polar SRs 5 mean sag of the S gage, reverse indicator test
profile SRN 5 mean S gage reading at N 5 0, 3, 6, 9, reverse
m 5 total number of measurements of a speci- indicator test
fied quantity SZ 5 specification zone for a quantity specified
N 5 Newton, unit of force in this Standard
NDE 5 nominal differential expansion si 5 estimator of the standard uncertainty of a
NE 5 nominal thermal expansion of the object to quantity measured at the ith position
be measured or calibrated si↑ 5 estimator of the standard uncertainty in the
NEs 5 nominal thermal expansion of the standard forward direction at position i
n 5 number of measurements of the same si↓ 5 estimator of the standard uncertainty in the
quantity reverse direction at position i
P 5 periodic error of a linear or rotary axis T 5 temperature of the workpiece
Pi 5 target position in the positioning tests, ith Ts 5 temperature of the reference and/or work-
position ing standard
Pij 5 measured position at the jth approach to the TEI 5 thermal error index
target position, Pi t 5 time
q 5 a quantity to be measured, i.e., a measurand
UT(L) 5 expanded thermal uncertainty
q 5 mean of a set of measurements of a quantity, q
UNDE 5 uncertainty of nominal differential expansion
qj 5 the jth measurement of a quantity, q
UNE 5 uncertainty of nominal thermal expansion
R 5 bidirectional repeatability of a measurement
UNEs 5 uncertainty of nominal thermal expansion
R↑ 5 unidirectional repeatability for an axis, for-
of a standard
ward direction (maximum value)
u(T) 5 uncertainty of temperature of the object
R↓ 5 unidirectional repeatability for an axis,
being measured or calibrated
reverse direction (maximum value)
RA 5 radius of an artifact u(Ts) 5 uncertainty of temperature of the reference
Rae 5 bidirectional repeatability of angular error and/or working standard
Rae↑ 5 unidirectional repeatability of angular error, u(a) 5 uncertainty of the coefficient of thermal
forward direction expansion of the object being measured or
Rae↓ 5 unidirectional repeatability of angular error, calibrated
reverse direction u(as) 5 uncertainty of the coefficient of thermal
Ri 5 bidirectional repeatability of positioning at expansion of reference standard and/or
position i working standard
Ri↑ 5 unidirectional repeatability of positioning ucT(L) 5 combined standard thermal uncertainty
in the forward direction at position i uETVE 5 standard uncertainty due to the environ-
Ri↓ 5 unidirectional repeatability of positioning mental temperature variation
in the reverse direction at position i uq 5 standard uncertainty of a quantity, q
RMi 5 measured radius of a part, i5 1, 2, machine usub 5 standard uncertainty of a measurement,
performance as a measuring tool denoted by the subscript sub
Rpi 5 radius of a part, i 5 0, 1, 2, 180, machine per- ux 5 estimate of the standard uncertainty, X
formance as a measuring tool direction, tool change repeatability
Rpi 5 average measured radius of a part, i 5 0, 1, 2, Vmax 5 maximum feed rate observed, minimum
180, machine performance as a measuring tool block execution time test
Rsphere 5 radius of a sphere VA 5 vertical angle between two axes of rotation,
Rxts 5 tool change repeatability, X direction coaxiality of axes of rotation
RRs 5 mean sag of rim indicator, rim-and-face test VMA 5 volumetric measurement accuracy
RRN 5 mean rim reading at position N, N 5 0, 3, 6, VO 5 vertical offset between two axes of rotation,
9, rim-and-face test coaxiality of axes of rotation
r() 5 radial error motion of a spindle VOn 5 vertical offset at position n 5 1, 2, two-
r0 5 radius of the eccentricity in rotating- sphere axis alignment
sensitive-direction spindle testing W 5 out-of-squareness angle
rn() 5 radial motion of a spindle measured by X 5 a linear axis direction, usually the cross-slide
gage n (n 5 1, 2, ...) Xn 5 a linear machine axis on a machine with
rpm 5 revolutions per minute more than one X-axis (n 5 1, 2,...)
19
ASME B5.57-2012
xi 5 bidirectional deviation of axis positioning measured and the line where the displacement is to be
at position i determined.
xi↑ 5 mean deviation of an axis positioning in the Abbe principle: the displacement-measuring system
forward direction at the ith position should be in line with the functional point whose dis-
xi↓ 5 mean deviation of an axis positioning in the placement is to be measured. If this is not possible,
reverse direction at the ith position either the slideways that transfer the displacement must
xij 5 positional deviation for the jth measurement be free of angular motion, or angular-motion data must
at the ith position be used to calculate the consequences of the offset.
xij ↑ 5 jth positional deviation at the ith position
accessory spindle: a spindle, other than the main spindle,
along an axis, forward direction
that was supplied with a machine but not manufac-
xij ↓ 5 jth positional deviation at the ith position
tured by the Supplier of the base machine and is, by the
along an axis, reverse direction
machine Supplier, considered an add-on.
xt 5 average X reading, tool-change repeatability
xti 5 ith X reading, tool-change repeatability accuracy: quantitative measure of the degree of conform-
Y 5 a linear direction on a lathe, usually the ance to recognize national or international physical
nonsensitive direction standards and methods of measurement.2
Y() 5 tilt degree of freedom for a rotary axis in the accuracy (of measurement): closeness of the agreement
nonsensitive direction between the result of a measurement and a true value
Z 5 a linear axis direction, usually the in-feed of the measurand.
ZM0 5 measured step height, machine perform- NOTES:
ance as a measuring tool (1) Accuracy is a qualitative concept.
Zn 5 a linear machine axis on a machine with (2) The term precision should not be used for accuracy.
more than one Z-axis (n 5 1, 2, ...)
Zp0 5 average measured step height, machine actual path: the path produced by the machine tool when
performance as a measuring tool programmed to move along a nominal path.
a 5 coefficient of thermal expansion of the actual position, Pij, (i 5 1 to m; j 5 1 to n): the measured
object being measured or calibrated position reached by the moving component on the jth
as 5 coefficient of thermal expansion of the ref- approach to the ith target position.
erence and/or working standard ambient temperature: the temperature of the ambient air
a() 5 axis of rotation angular error motion about (or other working fluid, such as oil on an oil-showered
the X direction as a function of the rotation machine) surrounding a machine. (See also mean ambient
angle temperature.)
b() 5 axis of rotation angular error motion about
the Y direction as a function of the rotation angular drift of axis average line: the change in angle of a
angle spindle’s axis average line caused by thermal effects due
DX() 5 axis of rotation translational error in the X to spindle rotation.
direction as a function of the rotation angle artifact: a generic term used to describe a stable, physical
DY() 5 axis of rotation translational error in the Y object, used as a master in machine testing. Particularly
direction as a function of the rotation angle used to describe a ball, a set of balls, or a mandrel in
Dz() 5 axis of rotation translational error in the Z many tests in this Standard.
direction as a function of the rotation angle aspect ratio: for a turning center, the ratio of the travel of
 () 5 axis of rotation angular error motion about the longest linear axis to the shortest linear axis. A large
the Z direction as a function of the rotation aspect ratio machine is defined as having an aspect ratio
angle greater than 3.
 5 angular position of a rotary axis (spindle axes autocollimator: an optical instrument that allows meas-
included) or the angle between two lines urement of the angle between its optical axis and a mir-
k 5 thermal conductivity of a material ror, whose calibration is independent of the distance
mm 5 micrometer, unit of length between the instrument and the mirror.
t 5 time constant of a physical quantity
auxiliary spindle: see accessory spindle.
4 DEFINITIONS
2 ISO defines accuracy (of measurement) as the closeness of the agree-
Abbe error: the measurement error resulting from angu-
ment between the result of a measurement and the true value of the
lar motion of a movable component and an Abbe offset.
measurand, with the conditions that accuracy is a qualitative concept
Abbe offset: the instantaneous value of the perpendicu- and the term precision should not be used for accuracy. This ASME
lar distance between the line where the displacement is Committee does not concur that accuracy is a qualitative concept.
20
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 4-1 The Six Basic Error Motions of an Axis of Rotation
�z (�)
�y (�)
Y
�x (�)
X (b) (c) (d)
(a)
�(�)
�(�)
�(�)
(e) (f) (g)
average: the average value of a series of measurements. uncertainty of bidirectional positioning obtained using
See also mean. a coverage factor of 2.
axial error motion: the error motion collinear with the Z A = max . ( xi↑ 1 2si↑ ; xi↓ 1 2si↓)
reference axis of an axis of rotation [see Fig. 4-1, illustra- 2 min . ( xi↑ 2 2si↑ ; xi↓ 2 2si↓)
tion (d)].
bidirectional repeatability for an axis, R: the maximum
axis acceleration/deceleration: the rate at which the machine value of the bidirectional repeatability positioning for
drive systems control the transition between different an axis; that is, R 5 max.(Ri).
programmed axis feed rates.
bidirectional repeatability of angular error, Rae: the maxi-
axis average line: the average axis of rotation for a rotat- mum value of the bidirectional repeatability of angular
ing spindle. The axis average line is obtained by least- error for an axis.
squares fitting a line through the centers of several
bidirectional repeatability of positioning at a position, Ri: the
average error motion polar plots at different distances
maximum range representing the expanded uncertainty
from the spindle face.
of bidirectional positional deviations, including the
axis of rotation: a line about which rotation occurs. reversal deviation obtained using a coverage factor of 2,
axis travel: the maximum travel, linear or rotary, over or 4 times the standard uncertainty in either direction at
which the movable component of a machine can move the position, whichever is larger; that is
under numerical control. Ri 5 max. (2si↑ 1 2si↓ 1 |Bi|; Ri↑; Ri↓)
backlash: a relative movement between interacting where
mechanical parts, resulting from looseness. Bi 5 the reversal deviation at position i
ball bar (magnetic, telescoping): a gage with two high-pre- Ri↑ 5 4si↑
cision ball-and-magnetic-socket pairs held at the end of Ri↓ 5 4si↓
a telescoping rod, with an integral displacement sensor si↑, si↓ 5 the estimators of the standard uncertainty
to measure the change of distance between the balls/ at that position
sockets.
bidirectional systematic angular error, Eae: the difference
bearing error motion: the error motion of a rotary axis due between the algebraic maximum and minimum of the
to imperfect bearings. mean unidirectional angular motions for both directions
bidirectional: refers to a parameter derived from a series of of approach at any position along a linear axis being
measurements in which the approach to a target position measured. Computed in the same manner as the bidirec-
is made in either direction along or around the axis. tional systematic deviation of positioning of an axis, E.
bidirectional accuracy of positioning of an axis, A: the range bidirectional systematic deviation of positioning of an axis, E:
derived from the combination of the bidirectional sys- the difference between the maximum and minimum of
tematic deviations and the estimator of the standard the mean unidirectional positional deviations for both
21
ASME B5.57-2012
approach directions (i.e., E↑ and E↓) at any position circle. It is equivalent to the total error motion value (see
along or around the axis. error motion value). Values are denoted G↑ for clockwise
rotations and G↓ for counterclockwise rotations.
E = max . ( x ↑, x ↓) 2 min . ( x ↑, x ↓) coefficient of thermal expansion: the true coefficient of
bidirectional total angular error, Aae: the range derived from expansion, a, at a temperature, T, of a body is the rate
the combination of the bidirectional systematic angular of change of the length of the body, L, with respect to
error and the estimator of the standard uncertainty of temperature at the given temperature divided by the
bidirectional angular error, obtained using a coverage measured length at the given temperature, LT.
factor of 2. Computed in the same manner as the bidi- 1  dL 
rectional accuracy of positioning of an axis, A. a5
LT  dT  T
block look-ahead limit: the number of part program blocks
ahead of the block being executed that a CNC controller cold machine: a machine at a stable operating tempera-
uses to plan motion. ture where during the last 2-h period
(a) the hydraulic systems and servos have been on
broadband vibration amplitude: the amplitude (size) of (b) the spindle has not been rotated above 10% of the
vibration allowed over a specified frequency band, usu- maximum revolutions per minute
ally specified as the maximum vibration from a low- (c) the axes motions have been restricted to only
frequency, say 1 Hz, to an upper frequency of several those necessary to set up measurement equipment
thousand hertz. A secondary definition is that the machine has been
Bryan principle: the straightness-measuring system allowed to thermally stabilize for a Supplier- or User-
should be in line with the functional point whose specified soak-out time.
straightness is to be measured. If this is not possible, combined angular standard thermal uncertainty: for the pur-
either the slideways that transfer the straightness must poses of this Standard, the combined angular standard
be free of angular motion, or angular-motion data must thermal uncertainty for the angle measurement is given by
be used to calculate the consequences of the offset.
canned cycle: see fixed cycle. ucT ( A) � ETVEA2 /12
cap test: a check for electrical noise and drift of a trans- combined standard thermal uncertainty: for the purposes of
ducer, most commonly applied to displacement trans- this Standard, the combined standard thermal uncertainty
ducers, sensors, or indicators (see Nonmandatory for a length measurement made at a temperature other
Appendix I). In this Standard, the check is normally than 20°C (68°F) in a changing environment is given by
performed by placing a stable “cap” on a displacement
indicator and monitoring its output over time. (See also 2
uETVE 1 L2s (Ts 2 20)2 u 2 (a s ) 1 L2 (T 2 20)2 u 2 (a )
transducer drift check.) ucT (L) 5 2 2 2
1 Ls a s u (Ts ) 1 L2 a 2 u2 (T )
capacitance (cap) gage: a displacement measuring device
of relatively short range and high resolution that func- command: an operative order to initiate a movement or
tions by measuring the electrical capacitance between a function.
the probe tip and the surface being displaced. command mode: a mode of operation of the command or
catenary: the curve formed by a flexible string, wire, data-entry device and display device in which entries
band, or cable suspended between two spatially sepa- are interpreted as functions to be executed.
rated points of equal height in a gravitational field. The comparator: any device used to perform the compari-
form of the curve is determined primarily by the tension son of the part and the master. For the purposes of this
in the suspended element and its mass per unit length. Standard, the comparator can be a simple short-range
In the context of this Standard, a catenary correction indicating device, such as a gage block comparator, or
refers to the difference between this curve and a straight a complex comparator, such as a coordinate measuring
line between the two suspension points, measured in a machine.
vertical direction.
compensation: the practice of using prerecorded error
chatter: self-excited relative vibrations between the tool tables and in-process sensing of variables such as tem-
and the workpiece during the cutting process that may perature for correcting the position of a CNC machine
damage the cutting tool, the machine, or the part in using the CNC controller.
roughing cuts and degrade the surface finish in finish-
compliance: the displacement per unit static force between
ing cuts.
two objects, specified with respect to the structural loop,
circular deviation: the minimum radial separation of two the location and direction of the applied forces, and the
concentric circles enveloping the actual path (minimum location and direction of the displacement of interest.
zone circles) in the circular test and that may be evaluated The following terms can be applied when the structural
as the maximum radial range around the least-squares loop contains an axis of rotation or a linear axis:
22
ASME B5.57-2012
angular compliance: applicable when a pure moment cycle time: the period of time from starting one machine
is applied to a rotary axis in the direction of the designed operation to starting another (in a pattern of continuous
angular displacement. repetition).
axial compliance: applicable when the force and the deviation: in general, the difference between an actual
displacement are collinear with the Z reference axis. value and the desired value, or commanded value, of
face compliance: applicable when the force and dis- a quantity. In this Standard, this word is used synony-
placement are parallel to the Z reference axis and at a mously with error and refers to the average difference
specified radial location. between an actual value and the desired value, unless
otherwise specified. (See also error.)
linear compliance: applicable when the force and dis-
placement are applied to a machine axis designed for deviation of position, xij: the actual position reached by the
linear motion. Linear compliance can be in the direction moving component minus the target position.
of the slide axis or perpendicular to that direction. xij 5 Pij 2 Pi
radial compliance: applicable when the force and dis- diagonal displacement: the displacement of the “tool” of
placement directions are at 90 deg to the reference axis. a machine tool along a diagonal in its work zone. The
tilt compliance: applicable for a pure moment and a tilt diagonal may be either a face diagonal, that is, in a plane
displacement in a plane containing the Z reference axis. defined by two machine axes, or, in the general case,
along a body diagonal defined by the displacement of
computer numerical control (CNC): a numerical control
three machine axes.
system in which the data-handling sequence, the con-
trol functions, and the response to data input are deter- differential expansion: the difference between the expan-
mined primarily by a control program executed by a sion of the part and the expansion of the master from
computer. 20°C (68°F) to their time‑mean temperatures at the time
of the measurement.
constant surface speed: in a turning application, the con-
dition achieved by varying the speed of rotation of the displacement indicator: see displacement transducer.
workpiece relative to the tool inversely proportional to displacement transducer: any one of a family of devices
the distance of the tool from the center of rotation. that measures displacement between a datum and a
contouring control system: a system of control in which moving element. Such instruments could be, for exam-
two or more controlled motions move in relation to ple, capacitance gages, linear variable differential trans-
each other so that the desired angular path or contour formers (LVDTs), dial gages, laser interferometers, or
is generated. eddy current probes. (See also indicator and transducer.)
contouring mode: a mode of operation of a CNC system drift test: an experiment conducted to determine the
that operates in one of the defined modes of interpola- actual drift inherent in a measurement system under
tion, e.g., linear, circular, or parabolic. normal operating conditions. This test usually consists of
simultaneous recordings of drift and environmental tem-
control program: an order set of instruction in a compu-
peratures. The recommended procedure for the conduct
ter language and a format that provide a computer base
of a drift test is given in para. 6.2 for the measurement of
control system with the capability of properly execut-
environmental temperature variation error (ETVE).
ing system functions and commands of the machine
program. drifts of axis average line: positional drifts of a spindle’s
axis average line caused by spindle thermal effects. For
cosine error: the measurement error in the motion direc-
the purposes of this Standard, these drifts are defined as
tion caused by angular misalignment between a linear
close to the chuck, part-holding device, or tool-holding
displacement measuring system and the gage or dis-
device as is practical (see para. 7.1.3).
placement being measured.
environmental temperature variation error (ETVE): an estimate
coverage factor: a numerical factor used as a multiplier of
of the maximum possible measurement uncertainty induced
the standard uncertainty to obtain an expanded uncer-
solely by deviation of the environment from average condi-
tainty, normally denoted k.
tions. For the purposes of this Standard, it is assumed that
cutter diameter (radius) compensation: a displacement the errors due to temperature variation are uniformly dis-
normal to the cutter path to adjust for the difference tributed with a total range equal to the measured ETVE.
between the actual and the programmed cutter radius Since the ETVE is a total range, it must be converted to a
or diameter. standard uncertainty, as is discussed in para. 6.2.1.
cutter diameter (radius) offset: a displacement normal to error: the difference between the actual response of a machine
the cutter path that is along a machine axis, to adjust for to a command issued according to the accepted protocol of
the difference between the actual and the programmed that machine’s operation and the response to that command
cutter radius or diameter. anticipated by that protocol. (See also deviation.)
23
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 4-2 Error Motion Polar Plot Showing a Polar Chart Center, a Least-Squares-Circle Center, and Error Motion
Values About These Centers
Asynchronous
error motion value
PC
LSC
Average error
motion plot
Average error
motion value
GENERAL NOTE: LSC 5 least-squares circle; PC 5 polar chart
error motion (of spindle): the change in position relative to following terms apply to the error motion polar plot and
the reference coordinate axes, of the surface of a perfect its components (see Fig. 4-2):
workpiece with its centerline coincident with the axis of
asynchronous error motion polar plot: the deviation of
rotation. Error motions are specified as to location and
the total error motion polar plot from the average error
direction as shown in Fig. 4-1, illustration (a), and do not
motion polar plot.
include motions due to thermal drift.
error motion measurements: a measurement record of error average (synchronous) error motion polar plot: the mean
motion that should include all pertinent information reg contour of the total error motion polar plot averaged
arding the machine, instrumentation, and test conditions. over a number of revolutions that can be divided into.
error motion polar plot: a polar plot error motion made fundamental error motion polar plot: the best-fit refer-
in synchronization with the rotation of the spindle. The ence circle fitted to the average error motion polar plot.
24
ASME B5.57-2012
inner error motion polar plot: the contour of the inner feed function: a command defining a feed rate.
boundary of the total error motion polar plot. feed hold: the action of the controller to temporarily sus-
outer error motion polar plot: the contour of the outer pend all axis motion and machine program execution, in
boundary of the total error motion polar plot. response to some condition or command that is not part
residual error motion polar plot: deviation of the aver- of the machine program.
age error motion polar plot from the fundamental error feed rate: the rate of motion of the feed axis of the tool rela-
motion polar plot. tive to the workpiece, measured in millimeters per minute
total error motion polar plot: the complete error motion (mm/min) or millimeters per revolution (mm/rev).
polar plot as recorded. fixed cycle: a preset series of operation that directs the
error motion value: a magnitude assessment of error machine axis movement and/or causes the spindle oper-
motion. ation to perform a complex function (e.g., boring, drilling,
tapping, probing, facing, or a combination thereof).
asynchronous error motion value: the maximum value
of 4 times the standard uncertainty obtained during a fixed zero: a reference position of the origin of the coordi-
spindle error motion measurement, after the average nate system not readily movable.
error motion has been subtracted from the error motion NOTE: This is typically a characteristic of a machine having abso-
polar plot. lute feedback elements.
average error motion: the average (mean) error motion floating zero: a characteristic of a numerical control sys-
in the spindle performance test. At least 20 revolutions tem permitting the zero point on an axis to be established
are required by this Standard. readily at any point; the control retains no information
average error motion value: the scale difference in radii on the location of any previously established zeroes.
of two concentric circles from a least-squares motion functional point: the point on the machine tool where a
center just sufficient to contain the average error motion cutting tool would contact a part for the purposes of
polar plot. material removal.
estimator of the unidirectional standard uncertainty of posi- fundamental error motion: in spindle testing, an error
tioning at a position, si↑ or si↓: estimator of the standard motion that is at the spindle rotation frequency.
uncertainty of the positional deviations obtained by a
gage: a mechanical artifact, often of high precision, used
series of n unidirectional approaches at a position Pi.
either for checking a part or for checking the accuracy
of a machine, or a measuring device with a proportional
1
∑ (x )
n
2
si↑ 5 ij 2 xi↑ range and some form of displacement indicator. When
n21 j51 referring to a measuring device, the term gage is syn-
onymous with displacement indicator or sensor, as used
1
∑ (x )
n
2
si↓ 5 2 xi↓ in this Standard.
ij
n21 j51
grid encoder: a type of two-axis positioning readout sen-
expanded thermal uncertainty: in the case where the effec- sor that, through the use of a two-dimensional grid or
tive number of the degrees of freedom for each of the grating and an electronic read head, allows the position
uncertainties in the combined standard thermal uncer- of the read head with respect to the grid to be accurately
tainties is known, the expanded uncertainty should be measured in two dimensions.
computed following the example given in the latest high-speed spindle: for the purposes of this Standard,
version of ISO Guidelines. In the absence of such infor- any spindle that can operate at continuous duty at over
mation, a coverage factor of k 5 2 should be used to 10,000 rpm.
yield an expanded uncertainty of length measurement hysteresis: a component of bidirectional repeatability
at approximately the 95% confidence level, due to tem- caused by mechanisms such as drive train clearance,
perature, UT(L), given by guide way clearance, mechanical deformations, friction,
UT(L) 5 kucT(L) 5 2ucT(L) and loose joints. For the purposes of this Standard, two
expanded uncertainty: a quantity defining an interval about types of hysteresis are defined.
the result of a measurement that may be expected to machine hysteresis: the hysteresis of the machine
encompass a large fraction of the distribution of values. structure when subjected to specific loads.
face error motion: error motion parallel to the Z reference setup hysteresis: the hysteresis of the various ele-
axis at a specified radial location. ments in a test setup, normally due to loose mechanical
face runout: the runout of the face plate of a lathe as connections.
measured with an indicator in the tool position at some identification of axes: the identity of an axis moved to pro-
X distance off the axis of rotation. duce an actual path during machine testing.
25
ASME B5.57-2012
incremental dimension: a dimension expressed with load cell: a transducer that is used to measure force.
respect to the preceding point in a sequence of points. Normally a load cell has the capability to convert a force
incremental feed: a manual or automatic input of preset into a proportional electrical signal.
motion command for a machine axis. machine coordinate system: the coordinate system that
indicator: a device used to measure displacements between corresponds to the axes of the machine on which a part
a surface and a reference point. For the purposes of this is to be manufactured. The coordinate system usually
Standard, an indicator could be a dial gage, an LVDT, or includes one or more linear axes designated X, Y, or Z
a capacitance gage. (see ANSI/EIA-267-C). (The machine may also include
rotary axes usually designated A, B, and C.)
initial position: a fixed point along an axis referenced
with respect to a machine datum. machine datum: the built-in zero position of the machine
elements used to establish the origin of the machine
NOTE: This is typically used for start-up.
coordinate system.
initialization: a sequence of operations establishing the machine home: a condition in a machine coordinate sys-
starting point of a machine. tem where all machine elements are at home position
intermittent duty: with respect to motors, a measure of (i.e., at the machine datum).
the time that the motor is operated as a fraction of 100% machine program: an ordered set of instructions in auto-
operation, continuous duty. matic control language and format sufficiently complete
laser interferometer: a fringe counting interferometer for dis- to affect the direct operation of an automatic control
placement measurement that uses a laser as a light source. system.
laser scales: machine scales that are based on laser inter- machine tool duty rating (MTDR): the power level that a
ferometric principles. machine tool’s spindle motor can operate above its con-
tinuous power rating for a short period of time (inter-
lathe: any one of a class of machine tools where the part
mittent duty). This rating is supplied by the machine
to be machined is rotated in a spindle to provide the sur-
tool Supplier.
face speed necessary for material cutting.
machine zero: the origin of the coordinates in the machine
length uncertainty due to temperature measurement: the use
system.
of this Standard requires that the measured length of a
body be corrected to 20°C (68°F). This requires a mea main spindle: on a turning machine, the largest spindle
surement of the temperature of the body and an estimate equipped for the fixturing of parts with the purpose of
of its thermal expansion coefficient. The uncertainty that turning such parts to provide surface speed for metal
the temperature measurement induces in the calculated removal. In the case where there are two spindles capa-
length is called the length uncertainty due to tempera- ble of fixturing the same size of part, the main spindle
ture measurement (LUTM). In the case where there is a shall be that spindle that is used more often or that is
mechanical part and a mechanical master, it is given by closest to the operator’s left hand when the operator
faces the machine.
LUTM 5 a 2 L2u(T )2 1 a 2s L2su(T s )2 master: the standard against which the desired dimen-
where u(T) and u(Ts) are the standard uncertainties in sion of the part is compared. The standard may be in
temperature measurement of the part and the standard. the form of the wavelength of light, the length of a gage
In the case where the standard is a laser interferometer, block, line standard, lead screw, etc.
s should be taken as 0.93 3 1026 / °C. mean: in this Standard, the average value of a physical
level: the condition of perpendicularity between a sur- quantity, denoted with a bar over the symbol for that
face and the force of gravity, or an instrument used to quantity.
measure such perpendicularity. mean ambient temperature: the mean temperature of the ambi-
linear variable differential transformer (LVDT): an electro- ent environment surrounding a machine as computed from
magnetic device used for displacement measurement. at least two readings taken at the center of the machine’s
Normally an LVDT has the capability to convert a dis- work zone during the interval required for the test.
placement into a proportional electrical signal. mean bidirectional positional deviation at a position, xi: arith-
live tooling: a generic term used to refer to tooling on a metic mean of the mean unidirectional positional devia-
turning center where the tool is rotated around a sections, xi↑ and xi↓, obtained from the two directions of
ondary axis of rotation for the purposes of milling, drill- approach at a position, Pi.
ing, etc. Depending upon the machine, the spindle that
holds the live tooling may be considered to be a main xi ↑ 1 xi ↓
xi 5
spindle or an accessory spindle. 2
26
ASME B5.57-2012
mean gage temperature: the mean temperature of a gage value of quantity and its actual value. Therefore, the
used for machine testing as computed from at least two nominal coefficient of expansion, in this Standard, will
readings taken on the gage during the interval required be denoted .
for a test. nominal differential expansion (NDE):3 the difference bet
mean reversal value of an axis, B: the arithmetic mean of ween the nominal expansion of the object to be cali-
the reversal values, Bi, at all target positions along or brated and the standard.
around the axis. NDE 5 NE 2 (NE)s
1 m
B5
m i51
∑B i
When measuring at temperatures other than 20°C (68°F),
corrections for the NDE must always be made. The NDE
is a systematic error and cannot be considered to be an
mean scale temperature: the mean temperature of a uncertainty.
machine scale as computed from at least two tempera-
nominal expansion (NE): an estimate of the expansion of
ture readings taken on that scale during the interval
an object from 20°C (68°F) to its time‑mean temperature.
spanning the time required for a test.
It shall be determined from the following relationship:
mean temperature: the average temperature computed
from a stated number of temperature measurements at NE 5 L(T 2 20)
equally spaced time intervals at a specified location. nominal path: a numerically controlled and programmed
mean unidirectional positional deviation at a position, path defined by the machine’s appropriate program-
xi↑ or xi↓: the arithmetic mean of the positional devia- ming protocol. For the purposes of the circular tests,
tions obtained by a series of n unidirectional approaches this path would be defined by its diameter or radius,
to a position, Pi. the position of its center, and its orientation of the work
zone of the machine. Nominal paths for the circular tests
1 may either be full circles or partial arcs.
∑
n
xi↑ 5 xij↑
n j51
nonsensitive direction: any direction perpendicular to any
and sensitive direction. (See also sensitive direction.)
1 numerical control system: a special-purpose computer that
∑
n
xi↓ 5 xij↓
n j51
processes primarily numeric data to control the movements
and functions of a machine to which it is connected.
measurement line: a line in the work zone of a machine
along which measurements are taken. optical polygon: an optical element composed of a number of
plane surface mirrors arranged to form a regular polygon.
measurement point: a point in the work zone of a machine
at which measurements are taken. outlier: a measured value that is greater than 12 times
the repeatability or less than 22 times the repeatability
measurement travel: part of the axis travel that is used for
from the average of all data values for the same quantity
data capture. It is selected so that the first and last target
in the sample, where the repeatability of the machine is
positions may be approached bidirectionally (see sec-
as defined in para. 7.2.7.
tion 7).
parametric: for the purposes of this Standard, refers to
minimum block execution time (MBET): the minimum time
the measurement of any of the geometrical errors of a
required by a CNC controller to execute one program
machine. These include, for example, angular errors,
block.
straightness errors, spindle errors, and alignment errors
movable component: a major structural component such as parallelism and squareness.
that is movable relative to the machine base during
part: in a dimensional or geometric measurement pro
measurement.
cess, the physical object for which a dimension is to be
nominal coefficient of thermal expansion: an estimate of the determined. (See also workpiece.)
coefficient of thermal expansion of a body. For the pur-
part coordinate: the Cartesian (X, Y, Z) coordinate system
poses of this Standard and in reference to the nominal
in which the part is defined and in which the tool coor-
coefficient of expansion of machine scales, it shall mean
dinates are specified.
the effective coefficient of the scale and its mounting to
the machine as measured in line with the scale for typical part programming, computer-aided: the preparation of a
machines of the given design. Since the true coefficient part program to obtain a machine program using a com-
for a given machine is not known, an uncertainty must puter and appropriate processor and post-processor.
be applied when making nominal differential expansion
corrections (see para. 7.2.4). Following ISO practice, this 3It is a requirement of this Standard that nominal differential
Standard does not differentiate between the expected expansion corrections always be made. See para. 7.2.4 for details.
27
ASME B5.57-2012
part-trace test: a test that consists of cutting a part and probe lobing: a systematic error in the measuring accuracy
then replacing the cutting tool with a displacement indi- of probing systems such that a measured value depends
cator (usually an LVDT) and repeating the original tool on the displacement direction of the probe tip.
path indicating against the part with the spindle off. pure radial motion: the concept of radial motion in the
performance test: any of a number of test procedures that absence of tilt motion.
are used to measure machine performance. quadrant photodiode: a photodetector, used for measur-
periodic error: an error in the linear or angular positioning displacements in two dimensions, composed of four
ing of a machine that is periodic over an interval which separate photodetectors arranged in a form that resem-
normally coincides with the natural periodicity of the bles the quadrants of a circle.
machine scales. For example, in a lead-screw-driven radial deviation: the deviation in radial direction between
machine with rotary encoders, the periodicity is usually the actual path and the nominal circular path, where the
synchronous with the pitch of the lead or ball screw. center of the nominal path is obtained from either one of
pitch: the angular motion of a carriage, designed for lin- the following:
ear motion, about an axis perpendicular to the motion (a) the centering of the measuring instruments on the
direction and perpendicular to the yaw axis. machine tool
play: a condition of low or zero stiffness over a limited (b) the least-squares centering analysis for a full circle
range of displacement due to clearance between mem- only
bers of the structural loop. radial error motion: error motion of a rotary axis perpen-
polar chart (PC) center: the center of the polar chart. dicular to the axis average line and at a specified orien-
tation angle (see Fig. 4-1).
polar profile center: a center derived from the polar profile.
In this Standard, the least-squares circle (LSC) center is radial runout: the maximum reading obtained from a
used. displacement sensor when the displacement sensor is
set to read in the radial direction against a part rotated
positional deviation: see deviation of position. in a spindle. Customarily the spindle rotation is at low
positioning control system: a numerical control in which speed.
(a) each numerically controlled motion operates in radian: the natural unit of angle. For small angles, the
accordance with instructions that specify only the next radian is often represented by “rise over run.” Radians
required position can be converted to decimal degrees by multiplying by
(b) the movement in the different axes of motion are 57.29, or to arc seconds by multiplying by 206,265. The
not necessarily coordinated with each other and may be microradian (μrad) is a millionth of a radian.
executed simultaneously or consecutively
(c) velocities are not specified by the input range: the difference between the maximum and mini-
mum values of a set of measurements of nominally the
positioning mode: a mode of operation of an NC or CNC same quantity.
system that performs in accordance with the definition
of a positioning control system. reference coordinate axes: mutually perpendicular X, Y,
and Z axes fixed with respect to an object.
probe: in this Standard, a device that establishes the loca-
tion of the movable components of a machine tool rela- relative vibration: for the purposes of this Standard, the
tive to a measurement point. Three types of probes are nonzero-frequency relative motion between the position
discussed in this Standard. of a nominal tool and a nominal workpiece.
nulling probe: a probe that, in reference to a work- repeatability: for the purposes of this Standard, a measure
piece, gives a signal which causes the machine to be of the ability of a machine to sequentially position a tool
driven to a position that will null the probe reading. with respect to a workpiece under similar conditions.
Repeatability is defined on a per-axis basis (see para.
proportional probe: a probe that gives a signal propor- 7.2.7).
tional to a displacement of the probe from its free position.
resolution: the lowest increment of a measuring device.
switching probe: a probe that gives a binary signal as a On a digital instrument, the least significant bit.
result of contact with or being in proximity to a workpiece.
retroreflector: an optical element with the property that
probe approach distance: the distance of approach to the an input light beam is reflected to return along the same
part at which the machine traverse speed is reduced to angle as it was incident.
the probe approach rate for measurement.
reversal deviation of angular error, Bae: the maximum of the
probe approach rate: the nominal speed of approach of the absolute reversal values at all target positions along a
probe toward the part during the acquisition of data. linear axis when measuring angular error. Computed
probe cycle: a fixed cycle using a probe. similarly to the reversal value of an axis.
28
ASME B5.57-2012
reversal value (error) at a position, Bi: the value of the dif- fixed sensitive direction: the workpiece is rotated by the
ference between the mean unidirectional deviations spindle, and the point of machining or gaging is fixed.
obtained from the two directions of approach. rotating sensitive direction: the workpiece is fixed, and
Bi 5 xi↑ 2 xi↓ the point of machining or gaging rotates with the spindle.
reversal value of an axis, B: the maximum of the abso- NOTE: A lathe has a fixed sensitive direction; a jig borer has a rotat-
ing sensitive direction. With a fixed sensitive direction, the refer-
lute reversal values, |Bi|, at all target positions along or
ence coordinate axis is fixed; with a rotating sensitive direction, the
around the axis.
reference coordinate rotates with the spindle.
B 5 max. (|Bi|)
sensor: a generic term used for an indicator that senses a
roll: the angular motion of a carriage, designed for linear particular physical quantity. In this Standard, the term
motion, about the linear motion axis. sensor is normally used to mean a displacement indica-
rotary axis: any motion axis of a machine whose function tor. (See also displacement indicator.)
is to provide a rotary motion either for the purposes of sensor nest: a group of more than one sensor assembled
positioning or for moving a part or a tool to provide suf- together in a stable fixture to allow measurement in
ficient surface speed for cutting (i.e., a spindle). In this more than one direction.
Standard, three types of rotary axes are defined. sequence number: a number identifying blocks or a group
rotary machining axis: a rotary axis where the axis of blocks in a machine program.
can be used to provide continuous-path contour cutting settling time: the time required between contact of a pro-
in a rotary direction. portional probe with a measurement point and the time
rotary positioning axis: a rotary axis that allows the at which valid data may be taken.
rotation of a part into a new position for the purposes of significant mean temperature change: the change in the
cutting only; that is, this axis is not used to provide con- mean ambient temperature surrounding a machine that,
tinuous, contour cutting, but only to reposition different in the Supplier’s judgment, will cause sufficient degra-
faces of the part for the purpose of metal removal. dation in machine performance such that performance
spindle: a device that provides an axis of rotation for evaluation (section 7) should be repeated.
the purposes of rapidly rotating a part or a tool to pro- soak out: one of the characteristics of an object is that it
vide sufficient surface speed for cutting operations. has a thermal “memory.” When a change in environ-
runout: the total range of displacements measured by an ment is experienced, such as occurs when an object is
instrument sensing against a moving surface or moved transported from one room to another, there will be
with respect to a fixed surface. some period of time before the object completely “for-
safe operating temperature range: the temperature range at gets” about its previous environment and exhibits a
which a machine tool may be expected to operate with- response dependent only on its current environment.
out physical damage to the machine or its support sys- The time elapsed following a change in environment
tems (i.e., computers, controllers, etc.). until the object is influenced only by the new environ-
ment is called the soak-out time. After soak out, the
scale: the part of a transducer system that provides the object is said to be in equilibrium with the new environ-
linear or rotary position of a machine axis. For the pur- ment. In cases where an environment is time variant, the
poses of this Standard, the transducer system could be response of the object is also a variable in time.
a line scale, inductive scale, a shaft encoder, or any type
of linear or rotary positional measuring device. Where socket: a spherical cup that allows the accurate reposi-
temperature is mentioned in this Standard with respect tioning of one end of a telescoping ball bar.
to a scale, it refers to the temperature of the material that specific power or specific force: the power or force required
comprises the portion of the scale that establishes the for the removal of a unit volume of a particular material
unit of length. For example, in a line scale, it refers to per unit time in cutting.
the matrix on which the lines have been deposited; for specification zone (SZ): for the purposes of this Standard,
a lead or ball screw, it refers to the temperature of the the value specified in a machine specification for the
material composing the screw itself. result of a particular test.
sensitive direction: the direction where relative motion spindle: see rotary axis.
between the tool and the workpiece causes one-for-one
form errors to be cut into the workpiece. On lathes the tool spindle: a spindle whose purpose is to rotate a
error motion of the main spindle must be considered to cutting tool to remove material from a workpiece.
be in the fixed sensitive direction. The error motions of work spindle: a spindle whose purpose is to rotate
tool spindles are in the rotating sensitive direction. Two a workpiece to provide sufficient surface speed for the
types of sensitive directions are recognized. purposes of material removal by cutting.
29
ASME B5.57-2012
spindle speed: the rate of rotation of a machine spindle, Standard, stiffness is defined with respect to the struc-
usually expressed in revolutions per minute. tural loop.
spindle speed function: a command defining the spindle straightness error: the deviation from straight-line move-
speed. ment that a displacement indicator positioned perpendic-
squareness: a plane surface is “square” to an axis of rota- ular to a slide direction exhibits when it is either stationary
tion if coincident polar profile centers are obtained for and reading against a perfect straightedge supported on
an axial and face motion polar plot at different radii. the moving slide, or moved by the slide along a perfect
Also, for linear axes, the angular deviation from 90 deg straightedge that is stationary.
measured between the best fit lines drawn through two NOTE: In some documents, the moving indicator against the sta-
sets of straightness data derived from two orthogonal tionary straightedge is called lateral deviation.
axes in a specified work zone.
structural loop: an assembly of mechanical components
staging: the moving of a gage from a first position to that maintain relative position between specified objects.
a second position such that a series of measurements A typical pair of specified objects is the cutting tool and
started in the first position may be continued in the sec- the workpiece; the structural loop would include the
ond position. spindle shaft, the bearings and housing, the slideways
standard uncertainty due to the environmental temperature and frame, possibly the foundation, and the tool and
variation error: the environmental temperature variation work-holding fixtures (see Fig. 4-3).
error (ETVE) is measured as the range of the total drift Supplier: a party who contracts, or indicates readiness to
of the instrument/master/part system as described contract, to supply a machine tool to a User. Also called
in section 6. To convert this to a standard uncertainty a vendor in some ISO documents.
according to ISO Guidelines, it is assumed that this synchronous error motion: another term for average error
environmental error is uniformly distributed within this motion, used in spindle testing.
range for a given measurement. The resulting standard
uncertainty, uETVE, is then given by systematic error: the mean that will result from an infi-
nite number of measurements of the same measurand
carried out under repeatability conditions, minus a true
ETVE2
uETVE 5 value of the measurand.
12
NOTE: Systematic error is equal to error minus random error; like
standard uncertainty (of a quantity, q), uq or u(q): given a set true value, systematic error and its causes cannot be completely
of n measurements of a quantity, q, the standard uncer- known. For a measurement instrument, systematic error is often
tainty in q is given as called bias.
1 n target position, Pi (i 5 1 to m): position to which the mov-

uq 5 u(q) 5
n21
∑ (q j 2 q )2 ing component is programmed to move. The subscript
j51 i identifies the particular position among other selected
target positions along or around the axis.
where
q 5 the mean of the set of measurements temperature at a point: when discussing a body that does
qj 5 the individual measurements not have a single uniform temperature, it is necessary to
This quantity is also sometimes called the estimator refer in some manner to the distribution of temperature
of the standard uncertainty and commonly symbolized throughout the body. Temperature at a point in a body
by sq. is assumed to be the temperature of a very small volume
of the body centered at that point. The material of which
static error motion measurement: a special case of spindle
the body is composed is assumed to form a continuum.
error motion measurement in which the error motion is
sampled with the spindle at rest at a series of discrete temperature of a body: when the differences between the
rotational positions. temperatures at all points in a body are negligible, the
body is said to be at a uniform temperature. This tem-
steering mirror: a mirror used to steer the laser beam
perature is then the temperature of the body.
to the appropriate angle in the diagonal displacement
measurement test. instantaneous average temperature of a body: when the
body is not at a uniform temperature at all points, but it
step gage: a gage comprising a rigid bar with calibrated is desirable to identify the thermal state of the body by a
steps used for determining accuracy of distance mea single temperature, the temperature that represents the
surements in a direction of linear motion. total heat stored in the body may be used. When the body
stiffness: the reciprocal of compliance. Usually defined is homogeneous, this is called the instantaneous average
statically as a ratio of the applied force to the displace- temperature of the body. (This temperature is the average,
ment of a machine element. For the purposes of this over the volume of the body, of all point temperatures.)
30
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 4-3 An Example of a Structural Loop Showing a Workpiece, Spindle, Machine Bed, and Tool
Headstock
Spindle
Workpiece
Turret
Tool
Bed
Structural loop
time‑mean temperature of a body: the average of the volume) at another temperature is called the linear (or
average temperature of a body, over a fixed period of volumetric) thermal expansion of the body.
time. The fixed period is selected as appropriate to the thermally induced drift: drift caused by variations in the ther-
measurement problem. mal environment or internal heat sources of the machine.
thermal error index (TEI): in some cases, particularly in tilt error motion: error motion in the angular direction
factories, dimensional measurements are made at other relative to the reference linear axis [see Fig. 4-1, illustra-
than 20°C (68°F), corrections are not made for the nomi- tions (e) and (f)].
nal differential expansion between standard and part,
tolerance: for the purposes of this Standard, a range on
and the environment is constantly changing. In such a
either side of a desired dimension of a manufactured
case, there is a systematic error that is coupled with the
part or a gage. In some cases, tolerances are expressed as
thermal uncertainty index to give an overall estimate of
plus (1) or minus (–) a single value. That value is called
the error made in manufacturing or measurement. Since
the tolerance.
the nominal differential expansion correction is a sys-
tematic error, it is not subject to statistical analysis. This tool change under program control: the process on a
Standard defines, in this particular case, a thermal error machining center or work center where the cutting tool
index that estimates the maximum possible percent- is exchanged, usually with its tool holder, for another
age error that would be made in these conditions as the tool under control of the part program (i.e., without
sum of the absolute value of the uncorrected differential human intervention).
expansion, NDE, and the expanded thermal uncertainty, tool function: a command identifying a tool.
UT(L), divided by the specification zone, SZ. That is tool (fixture) offset: a relative displacement that is applied to
TEI 5 {[|NDE| 1 UT(L)]/SZ}(100%) an axis of a machine for a specified portion or the whole of
a program and causes a displacement in that axis only in
Here, SZ is the desired specification zone on the the direction determined by the sign of the offset value.
measurement. NOTE: For example, the tool offsets are typically applied in pairs of
thermal expansion: the difference between the length (or independent values for X, Y, and Z for the tool tip location on turning
volume) of a body at one temperature and its length (or machines, and individually or in combination on milling machines.
31
ASME B5.57-2012
tool (length) offset: an incremental displacement in the uncertainty of nominal coefficient of expansion: the uncer-
axial direction of the tool. tainty in the nominal thermal expansion coefficient of a
NOTE: This is typically used on milling and drilling machines. body shall be denoted u() for the object being calibrated
or measured and u(s) for the standard. This value, like
tool-setting system: an instrument supplied with a CNC that of  itself, must be an estimate. (See para. 6.2.2.2 for
lathe or turning center that allows for the measurement further explanation.)
of X or Z tool offsets, or both, as part of a computer-con-
uncertainty of nominal differential expansion (UNDE): the
trolled cycle. Sometimes called a tool-setter, a tool-gage,
square root of the sum of the squares of the uncertain-
or a tool-setting probe(s).
ties of nominal expansion of the object to be calibrated
tow-along carriage: a machine carriage that is positioned or measured and the standard.
with the mechanical assistance of another machine car-
riage, thus the term tow-along. UNDE = (UNE)2 1 (UNE)S2
transducer: any device that converts a measurand of one
physical quantity into another physical parameter. For uncertainty of nominal expansion (UNE): the uncertainty
example, a strain gage that converts strain to an electrical in the value chosen for the nominal expansion. It is
signal would be considered a transducer. For the purposes determined by
of this Standard, most transducers discussed are displace- UNE 5 L(T 2 20)u()
ment transducers.
uncertainty of temperature measurement: the uncertainty
transducer drift check: an experiment conducted to deter- associated with the measurement of the temperature of
mine the drift in a displacement transducer and its asso- a body or the ambient environment. This uncertainty
ciated amplifiers and recorders when it is subjected to comes from the calibration of the thermometer, the ther-
a thermal environment similar to that being evaluated mometer-mounting procedures, and instrumental varia-
by the drift test itself. The transducer drift is the sum of tions. (See para. 6.2.2 for further explanation.)
the “pure” amplifier drift and the effects of the environ- undulations per revolution (UPR): a term commonly used
ment on the transducer, amplifier, etc. The transducer when referring to spindle error testing. It refers to the high-
drift check is performed by blocking the transducer and est order (frequency) sine wave detected in a spindle error
observing the output over a period of time at least as analysis (highest harmonic of the spindle speed). The band-
long as the duration of the drift test to be performed. width of a sensor used for spindle error detection should
Blocking a transducer involves making a transducer be several times higher than the product of the UPR and
effectively indicate on its own frame, base, or cartridge. the revolutions per second of the spindle being tested. (See
In the case of a cartridge-type gage head, this is accom- ANSI B89.3.4M for a more detailed explanation.)
plished by mounting a small cap over the end of the car-
tridge so the plunger registers against the inside of the unidirectional: refers to a series of measurements in
cap. Finger-type gage heads can be blocked with similar which the approach to a target position is always made
devices. Care must be exercised to ensure that the block- in the same direction along or around the axis. The sym-
ing is done in such a manner that the influence of tem- bol ↑ signifies a parameter derived from a measurement
perature on the blocking device is negligible. made after an approach in the positive direction, and ↓
one in the negative direction (e.g., xij↑ or xij↓).
transfer function: for the purposes of this Standard, the
ratio of the relative vibration between tool and work- unidirectional accuracy of positioning of an axis, A↑ or A↓:
piece to the input variable force acting between tool the range derived from the combination of the unidi-
and workpiece as a function of frequency. The transfer rectional systematic deviations and the estimator of the
function has both amplitude and phase (or a real and an standard uncertainty of unidirectional positioning using
imaginary part). a coverage factor of 2.
turning center: a CNC lathe with at least one work- A↑ 5 max. (xi↑ 1 2si↑) 2 min. (xi↑ 2 2si↑)
holding spindle (work spindle). Such a machine shall and
have a means of automatically introducing various A↓ 5 max. (xi 2↓ 1 2si↓) 2 min. (xi↓ 22si↓)
tools to the workpiece by means of either an index- unidirectional repeatabilities of angular error, Rae↑ and Rae↓:
able turret or automatic tool-changer. In the most gen- the maximum value of repeatability of angular error at
eral case, such a turning center may also have “live” any position along a linear axis. Computed similarly to
tooling. unidirectional repeatability of positioning of an axis.
type test: a machine performance test that is likely to unidirectional repeatability of positioning at a position, Ri↑or
yield nearly the same results for all machines of the Ri↓: range derived from the expanded uncertainty of
same model or type, as long as the machine has been unidirectional positional deviations at a position, using
assembled to specification. a coverage factor of 2.
32
ASME B5.57-2012
Ri↑ 5 4si↑ motion direction. In the case of a carriage with hori-

and zontal motion, the specified axis shall be vertical unless
Ri↓ 5 4si↓ explicitly specified. For a carriage that does not have
horizontal motion, the axis shall be explicitly specified.
unidirectional repeatability of positioning of an axis, R↑or R↓:
the maximum value of the unidirectional repeatabilities of
positioning at any position along or around an axis. 5 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
R↑ 5 max. (Ri↑) 5.1 General
and
It shall be the responsibility of the User to provide
R↓ 5 max. (Ri↓)
an acceptable environment for performance testing of
unidirectional systematic angular error, Eae↑ and Eae↓: the dif- the machine tool at the installation site. Environmental
ference between the algebraic maximum and minimum of parameters recommended in this Standard are given in
the mean unidirectional angular errors for both approach Form 2 of section 1. The environment shall be consid-
directions, at any position along a linear axis, determined ered acceptable if the requirements of sections 5 and 6
using the procedures and under the conditions specified are met. The User shall be responsible for conducting all
in this Standard. Computed similarly to unidirectional environmental tests at the installation site. The Supplier
systematic deviation of positioning of an axis. shall have a right to witness all tests. The Supplier
unidirectional systematic deviation of positioning of an axis, shall, on request, supply test equipment as specified in
E↑or E↓: the difference between the algebraic maximum section 9, and support for equipment and tests, at a price
and minimum of the mean unidirectional positional to be negotiated between the Supplier and the User.
deviations for both approach directions (i.e., xi↑ or xi↓),
at any position along or around the axis, determined 5.2 Temperature
using the procedures and under the conditions specified 5.2.1 General. Temperature has a significant influ-
in this Standard. ence on the accuracy of machine tools and measuring
E↑ 5 max. (xi↑) 2 min. (xi↑) instruments, and its effects are often misunderstood.
and The provisions of ANSI B89.6.2 form a part of this
E↓ 5 max. (xi↓) 2 min. (xi↓) Standard, but interpretation is needed for application
to machine tools. ANSI B89.6.2 defines two alternative
unidirectional total(s) angular error, Aae↑ and Aae↓: the range conditions under which a test environment is thermally
derived from the combination of the unidirectional sys- acceptable. The first, that all pertinent components of
tematic angular error and the estimator of the standard the measuring system be at exactly 20°C (68°F), is gener-
uncertainty of unidirectional angular error, using a cov- ally unobtainable. This Standard is primarily concerned
erage factor of 2. Computed similarly to unidirectional with the second: that the expanded thermal uncertainty
accuracy of positioning of an axis. (see para. 6.2) be a reasonable percentage of the specifi-
User: a party who contracts to accept a machine tool cation zone. Acceptability of a thermal environment is
from a Supplier. specified in terms of its effects on the machine.
vibration amplitude: the size (amplitude) of a given fre-
quency component of a vibration spectrum. Common 5.2.2 Thermal Environment Guidelines. The Supplier
practice is to express the vibration amplitude in either shall offer guidelines regarding what thermal environ-
displacement or acceleration units. (See also broadband ment should be acceptable for the machine. Such general
vibration amplitude.) guidelines could contain, for example, a specification
on mean room temperature, maximum amplitude and
volumetric performance: the ability of a machine tool to frequency range of deviations from this mean tempera-
perform the intended multiaxis functions anywhere ture, environmental thermal gradients, air flow rate, and
within the volume defined by the maximum travel of air speed surrounding the machine, as listed in Form 2.
the machine linear axes. The User shall be informed that the conformance to such
wobble plate: a mechanical device that allows the tilting guidelines does not guarantee an acceptable machine
(wobbling) of a test fixture by adjustment screws. thermal environment but does constitute due care on the
workpiece: an object to be turned, machined, or measured. User’s part and thus shifts responsibility for performance
degradation due to environmental sensitivity from the
work zone: the working (machining) volume of a machine User to the Supplier. If the User chooses not to conform to
as specified by the Supplier. More than one work zone the guidelines supplied, the tests of environmental sensi-
may be specified for a given machine, and specification tivity (see section 6) may lead to an increase in the accept-
zones may be specified separately for each work zone. able specification zone for a given performance test. In
yaw: the angular motion of a carriage, designed for lin- this second case, the degradation in performance shall be
ear motion, about a specified axis perpendicular to the solely the responsibility of the User.
33
ASME B5.57-2012
5.2.2.1 Time Variations. Particular attention should provided by the Supplier. Functional tests for measuring
be given to time variations of temperature, although this the relative vibration are described in para. 6.3.
Standard does not offer specific guidelines in this area.
Machine tools are composed of numerous elements, each 5.3.3 Seismic Vibrational Parameters. The Supplier
with different thermal behavior. For example, the ram of shall provide, as part of the machine specification, a
a machine may have a short thermal time constant and statement of the acceptable vibration spectra at the User–
the bed of the machine a very long thermal time constant. Supplier interface. (This interface may vary depending
Therefore, when the machine is in an environment with on details of the contractual arrangement between the
time variations of the temperature, the resulting response Supplier and the User. For example, if the machine is
in terms of spindle motion with respect to the table can supplied with isolators, the interface will be between
be quite complex. Furthermore, when a part is being the foundation and those isolators. However, if the User
machined, there are other time constants due to the part provides an isolation system from another source, the
and the part fixture, which also serve to complicate this interface shall be at the connection between those isola-
problem. Efforts should be made to keep the time vari- tors and the machine. In any event, it is a requirement of
ations of temperature either much faster than the fastest this Standard that the appropriate interface be defined
time constant in the system or to reduce them to accept- as part of the machine specification.) This statement can
able levels. contain a complete description of the allowable vibra-
tion displacement amplitude as a function of frequency
5.2.2.2 Thermal Radiant Energy. The machine for each vector component of the vibration spectrum, or
shall not be exposed to direct sunlight or other power- can be simply a limit on the total vibrational displace-
ful radiant energy sources. Other direct radiant energy ment amplitude over a specified frequency range. In lieu
sources (e.g., fluorescent lighting, radiant heaters, and of vibration displacements, accelerations or velocities
high-intensity lamps) shall be as far from the machine shall also be acceptable. The sample specification form,
as possible, to reduce their effects on the machine’s Form 1, allows for the displacement options. Users
thermal behavior. Where this distance requirement is desiring to specify a machine in terms of accelerations
impractical, indirect lighting designed for diffuse reflec- or velocities shall create forms and test procedures in
tion and increased path length shall be used. Users and equivalent detail. The statement of acceptable vibration
Suppliers should be aware that lights in the machine spectra applies with the machine in place. It is recog-
enclosure supplied by the Supplier may sometimes have nized that in some highly atypical cases it is physically
unwanted thermal influence. possible that the vibration spectrum of the foundation
or floor may be significantly altered by the installation of
5.3 Seismic Vibration the machine, particularly large or very heavy machines.
In such cases, the party (User or Supplier) contracted to
5.3.1 General. The support surface (floor, founda-
supply the vibration isolation system shall be responsi-
tion, isolation pad, etc.) upon which the machine will be
ble for achieving an acceptable vibration environment
mounted can have motion induced as a result of external
for the machine.
forces in the surrounding area (due to other machines,
lift trucks, compressors, etc.). This motion can be contin-
uous vibration, interrupted shock, or both. Such motion,
5.4 Electrical
if transmitted to the machine, has a degrading effect 5.4.1 General. The electrical power supplied to
on the overall accuracy and repeatability of a machine a machine can have an effect on its ability to perform
tool by causing relative motions between the tool and accurate and repeatable machining operations. This is
the workpiece. Improperly installed or designed isola- especially true with today’s modern machines, which
tors can also cause excessive motions. In addition, cer- typically incorporate electronic and electrical compo-
tain excessive motion amplitudes can cause damage to nents that can be sensitive to voltage variations. For this
the machine. Several major American corporations have reason, it is necessary to characterize the machine in the
developed extensive standards for vibration analysis on range of the electrical environment in which it will oper-
machine tools. These standards have been conceived of ate. It is also necessary to know the operating range in
for purposes that are primarily diagnostic. This Standard which the machine was designed to operate.
in no way supersedes these other standards.
5.4.2 Responsibilities. It shall be the responsibility
5.3.2 Responsibilities. The User shall be responsible of the User to provide electrical power meeting typi-
for site selection, environmental shock and vibration anal- cal requirements as specified by current standards. The
ysis, and additional special isolators required to ensure Supplier shall be responsible for providing a specifica-
compliance with the maximum permissible vibration lev- tion for which the equipment will operate properly.
els specified by the Supplier. All questions of compliance
shall be determined at the interface between the support 5.4.3 Electrical Parameters. The Supplier shall pro-
system provided by the User and the machine system vide, as part of the machine specification, a statement
34
ASME B5.57-2012
of the steady state requirements, including voltage(s), foundation specification, which was generated as part
frequency, and amperage for the machine; allowable of the machine design. In new installations it is par-
short- and long-term root mean square (RMS) voltage ticularly important to pay attention to the inherent
variations; and allowable transient voltages expressed instability and cure time of hydraulic concrete, as this
in percent of nominal voltage.4 These parameters are material can lead to unstable machine structures if
listed in the sample specification form, Form 1. improperly installed. For further discussions related
to foundations, see Nonmandatory Appendix F.
5.5 Utility Air
5.5.1 General. Air supplies to machines can affect 5.6.2 Responsibilities. For all machines requiring
their accuracy and useful working life. Temperature hydraulics or other services, it shall be the responsibility
variations in the utility air can generate thermal gradi- of the Supplier to provide for proper filtering and tem-
ents in the machine; and particulates, oils, and water perature control such that these services do not degrade
can degrade bearing performance, increase friction, and machine performance. If, for some reason, hydraulics,
accelerate wear. coolants, or other services are to be supplied by the
User, then the User shall be responsible for meeting all
requirements as specified by the Supplier. In the case of
5.5.2 Responsibilities. For all machines requiring
foundations, the responsibility for foundation design
utility air, it shall be the responsibility of the User to sup-
and installation shall be negotiated as part of the origi-
ply utility air meeting the requirements specified by the
nal contract, but foundation specifications, including
Supplier.
construction drawings (where applicable), shall be sup-
plied by the Supplier.
5.5.3 Specifications. For utility air, the Supplier shall
provide specification for all air parameters required for
the proper operation and maintenance of the machine 6 ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS
to be supplied. For air-bearing machines, these should 6.1 General
include mean temperature, permissible temperature
variation, pressure, and pressure variations. Further, on As stated previously, it is the philosophy of this
some machines, the acceptable dew point and the par- Standard that the environment is the responsibil-
ticulate content shall be specified. These parameters are ity of the machine User. However, if the User follows
listed in the environmental specification form, Form 2. the guidelines supplied by the machine Supplier, that
Air quality parameters, such as particulate, oil, and responsibility reverts to the machine Supplier. The fol-
water content, are the sole responsibility of the User, lowing tests are designed to reflect that philosophy,
although the Supplier shall offer guidelines. but if because of economic or other considerations the
machine User chooses not to conform to the Supplier’s
5.6 Other environmental specifications, this Standard provides a
derating procedure on the machine performance. This
5.6.1 General. Just as air supplies can affect the is particularly true in the case of nonconformance of the
accuracy and useful working life of a machine, so thermal environment.
can hydraulic supplies, coolant supplies, founda- In general, these environmental tests should be
tions, and the like. For example, temperature varia- performed before the performance tests to verify
tions caused by pumping can generate large thermal the suitability of the environment for machine test-
gradients in the machine, and, of course, particulates, ing. However, for machines with large specification
oil, and water can degrade machine performance and zones, the effects of the environment may be deemed
accelerate wear. Large machine tools also often rely acceptable by the Supplier without the testing speci-
on a User-supplied foundation for their stiffness, and fied below. In these cases, specific environmental tests
improperly installed foundations can significantly may be deferred. If measurements on the machine are
increase a machine’s compliance. Both the Supplier within the specified specification zones in the per-
and the User recognize the importance of foundations formance tests, the deferred tests may be eliminated.
when the machine design utilizes the foundation as If the performance fails, the environmental tests may
an integral part of the structure. It should be antici- be performed as part of the diagnostic process. The
pated that test data collected at the Supplier or User thermal computations (see para. 6.2.2) should not be
facility will likely be affected if static stiffness tests or deferred or eliminated.
horsepower cuts are attempted and the foundation at
the Supplier or User facility does not comply to the 6.2 Environmental Thermal Test and Computations
4 Percentage of nominal voltage is the percentage of the remain-
The thermal test shall be performed under conditions
ing voltage. For example, a reduction in voltage of 15% would be equivalent to those pertaining during machine perform-
expressed as 85% of nominal voltage. ance tests (see section 7).
35
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 6.2.1.4-1 Setup Showing Two Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental Temperature
Variation Error (ETVE) Between a Nominal Tool Location and a Work Spindle
Radial sensor
Axial sensor
Cross-slide
6.2.1 Environmental Temperature Variation Error, (b) To detect the effects of spatial temperature gradi-
ETVE. This test is designed to measure the response ents across the machine work volume, the location of the
of a machine to its ambient environment, and not the machine axes during warm-up shall be as far as possible
response of a machine to its internal heat sources. (This from the position selected by the machine Supplier for the
test shall therefore be run with the machine in a start-up, ETVE test.
cold condition, unless some other agreement is reached
between the User and the Supplier. Further tests to deter- 6.2.1.3 Test Location
mine the effects of machine-induced thermal behavior (a) The location for the ETVE test may be specified by
are described in para. 7.7.) the machine Supplier. The description shall include the
If the Supplier elects to defer the ETVE test, the value location of the test artifact with respect to the spindle
of ETVE shall be set to zero for computing TEI. If the and the position of each axis.
ETVE test is performed later, then the measured value (b) The default location of the test artifact shall be
shall be used after the test. on the spindle centerline, approximately 150 mm (6 in.)
ETVE shall be determined by a drift test. The choice from the spindle face.
of displacement sensor for this test depends on the envi-
ronment. Any displacement-measuring device meeting 6.2.1.4 Measurement Procedure. The following
the requirements of section 9 may be used. procedure should be used (see Fig. 6.2.1.4-1; for the proce-
dure using three displacement sensors, see Fig. 6.2.1.4-2):
6.2.1.1 Equipment. The following equipment should Step 1: Place the test artifact in the machine spindle.
be used:
(a) test artifact Step 2: Fix the gage holder and displacement sensors to
(b) two (or three) displacement sensors the turret or tool holder and align them to the axes.
(c) gage-holding fixture Step 3: Place the air temperature sensor near the center
(d) data-recording system or software (as required) of the machine work volume.
(e) air temperature sensor
(f) metal surface-temperature sensor Step 4: Place the surface temperature sensor in a location
to assess an estimate of the average temperature of the
machine near the working area.
6.2.1.2 Machine Warm-Up
(a) The machine shall be stabilized to “cold machine” Step 5: Adjust the machine axes and displacement sen-
condition. All systems that normally operate while the sors so that all displacement sensors are near the centers
machine is idle (including systems to control effects of of their ranges and positive reading occurs for relative
environmental temperature) shall be operating. motion of the displacement sensor toward the artifact.
36
ASME B5.57-2012
Step 6: Check for setup hysteresis in each direction, as five displacement sensors on the lathe is given in
discussed in para. 7.1.4.2. Fig. 6.2.1.6-1. Specifics of the test setup and analysis for
the five-sensor ETVE test may be found in ANSI B5.54.
Step 7: Ensure that electronic test equipment, computers,
etc., do not touch the machine. These shall be located as
6.2.2 Thermal Computations. On all tests that mea
far as possible from the machine tool for the duration of
sure machine accuracy, corrections shall be applied for
the test.
the nominal differential expansion of machine scales,
Step 8: Place the machine in the “feed-hold” condition mechanical masters, and, if applicable, changes in the
and zero the indicators electronically (if applicable). wavelength of the laser interferometer. These computa-
tions are described in the sections on the specific tests.
Step 9: Ensure the setup has thermally stabilized from
Besides these corrections, it is a requirement of this
the effects of handling before recording data.
Standard that the User also compute the expanded ther-
Step 10: Record data from the displacement sensors and mal uncertainty (with the ETVE equal to zero, if that test
two temperature sensors at intervals of 60 s or less. The has been deferred). This expanded uncertainty shall be
test period should be at least 4 h. However, the mini- used to determine the suitability of the test environment.
mum recommended test time is 24 h. See Fig. 6.2.1.4-3 The test environment shall be considered acceptable if
Normal activities surrounding the machine shall con- the expanded thermal uncertainty, as defined below,
tinue during the test. does not exceed 25% of the specification zone for any of
the performance tests listed in Form 4. If the expanded
6.2.1.5 Data Analysis thermal uncertainty exceeds 25% of the specification
(a) The thermal drift in the X direction, ETVEX, shall zone for a particular test in the table, the machine envi-
be taken as the maximum range of readings from either ronment does not conform to the Supplier’s guidelines,
displacement sensor in this direction for any 4-h period and the User chooses not to upgrade the environment,
over the duration of the test. permissible specification zone limits for those tests shall
(b) The thermal drift in the Z direction, ETVEz, shall be increased. The increase shall be equal to the amount
be taken as the maximum range of readings from either by which the expanded thermal uncertainty exceeds
displacement sensor in this direction for any 4-h period 25% of the specification zone. The following equation
over the duration of the test. shall apply:
(c) Tilt about the Y direction (relative to the starting Permissible specification zone 5 specification zone 1
position) shall be calculated and recorded for each mea [UT(L) − 0.25 specification zone]
surement interval. It is obtained by taking the difference
between the two X-direction displacement sensors and If the expanded thermal uncertainty exceeds 25% and
dividing by the distance between them. the machine environment conforms to the Supplier’s
(d) The thermal drift of tilt about the Y direction, guidelines, no derating of the permissible specification
ETVEYY, shall be taken as the maximum range of recorded zones for the tests given in Form 4 shall be allowed.
tilts for any 4-h period over the duration of the test. Methods for testing compliance of the thermal envi-
The standard uncertainty due to the environmental ronment to the Supplier’s guidelines are given in
temperature variation error is given by Nonmandatory Appendix C. The expanded thermal
uncertainty shall be calculated for each performance test
ETVE2 from the equation
uETVE 5
12 UT(L) 5 kucT 5 2ucT(L)
The ETVE used in the equation above shall be the where ucT is the combined standard thermal uncertainty
largest of the ETVEs measured by any displacement sen- for a given measurement and k is the coverage factor
sor for any spindle-and-turret combination and any axis (which, for this computation, will be assumed to be 2).
direction on the machine. Values in the equation are absolute values and should
See Fig. 6.2.1.4-3 for a graph of ETVE data. be taken as positive.
6.2.1.6 ETVE Test, Five Displacement Sensors. 6.2.2.1 Combined Standard Thermal Uncertainty,
It is also possible to measure the ETVE using a setup ucT. The combined standard thermal uncertainty is
that has five displacement sensors reading against an defined in section 4, Definitions, for the general case of a
appropriate test artifact. This test is appropriate for length measurement. For this Standard, it requires inter-
rotating-sensitive-direction tool spindles and also can pretation. The general form is given by
be useful for observing angular tilts of a work spindle. 2
Such five-sensor systems are also used in this Standard uETVE 1 L2s (Ts 2 20)2 u 2 (a s ) 1 L2 (T 2 20)2 u2 (a )
ucT (L) 5
for the measurement of spindle errors. A setup showing
2 2 2
1 Ls a s u (Ts ) 1 L2 a 2 u2 (T )
37
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 6.2.1.4-2 Setup Showing Three Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental Temperature
Variation Error (ETVE) Between a Nominal Tool Location and a Work Spindle
Radial Radial
sensor 1 sensor 2
Axial
sensor
Cross-slide
(a)
Radial Radial
sensor 1 sensor 2
Axial
sensor
Cross-slide
(b)
38
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 6.2.1.4-3 Graph of Environmental Temperature Variation Error (ETVE) Data
25 0.0400
Material temperature
0.0300
20
Air temperature
Displacement, mm
Temperature, °C 0.0200
15
ETVEx 0.0100
0.0000
10
X
–0.0100
5 ETVEz
–0.0200
Z
0 –0.0300
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24
Time from start of test, h
Fig. 6.2.1.6-1 Setup Showing Five Displacement Sensors Used to Measure the Environmental Temperature
Variation Error (ETVE)
Artifact (dual spheres)
Sensor 2 Sensor 5
Spindle Sensor 3
Sensor 1 Sensor 4
39
ASME B5.57-2012
Table 6.2.2.1-1 Specification Zones Derated Due to an Excessive Expanded Thermal Uncertainty
Parameter Lengths Used for Uncertainty Calculation Paragraph
Linear positioning (per axis) … 7.2

Bidirectional systematic deviation of positioning L 5 Ls 5 axis length 7.2.7.1
Bidirectional accuracy of positioning L 5 Ls 5 axis length 7.2.7.3
Unidirectional systematic deviations of positioning L 5 Ls 5 axis length 7.2.7.2
Unidirectional accuracies of positioning L 5 Ls 5 axis length 7.2.7.4
Thermal tests … 7.7
Spindle thermal stability test L 5 Ls 5 0 7.7.2
Thermal drift of axis drives L 5 Ls 5 axis length 7.7.3
Composite thermal error L 5 Ls 5 ½ longest axis length 7.7.4
Circular tests … 7.9

Circular deviations Ball bar length or circular contour radius 7.9.5
Tool-setting system drift L 5 Ls 5 0 8.4
Linear measurement accuracy L 5 Ls 5 axis length 8.6.4
GENERAL NOTE: See Nonmandatory Appendix L.
where (b) The estimate may be based on the distribution

L 5 the length being measured (usually, in found among published data.
machine tool applications, this is nominally (c) In the absence of other information, for the pur-
the same as the length of the standard) poses of this Standard, the uncertainty in the nominal
Ls 5 the length of the standard (calibrated gage coefficient of expansion should be represented by a rec-
or laser displacement) tangular distribution with bounds of 0.1. The stand-
T 5 the temperature of the machine scales, °C ard uncertainty then becomes
Ts 5 the temperature of the standard, °C u() 5 0.1/√3
u(T) 5 the uncertainty in the measurement of the
temperature of the machine scale u(s) 5 0.1s/√3
u(Ts) 5 the uncertainty in the measurement of the
temperature of the standard (air tempera- Of the three possibilities given above, (a) is the recom-
ture in the case of the laser) mended method.
u(s) 5 the uncertainty of the nominal coefficient of Because the effects of inaccuracy of the estimate of the
expansion of the master [u(s) 5 0 for laser uncertainty are of second order, it is considered suffi-
interferometers] cient that good judgment be used.
uETVE 5 the standard uncertainty due to the environmen- Clearly the concept of thermal expansion coefficient of
tal temperature variation error. Tilt ETVE used the standard does not directly apply to lasers. However,
for yaw specification zone (see Table 6.2.2.1-1) the wavelength of a laser is dependent upon the refrac-
 5 the thermal expansion coefficient of the tive index of air, and that refractive index is a function
machine scale of temperature, as is the length of a material body. It can
s 5 the thermal expansion coefficient of the be shown that without loss of generality, the coefficient
standard (s 5 0.93 3 1026/°C for lasers) used to correct laser readings or changes in ambient tem-
perature (0.93 3 1026/°C) can be used in the place of the
6.2.2.2 Uncertainty of Coefficients of Expansion, coefficient of expansion when using lasers. To the level of
u(). The uncertainty in the nominal thermal expan- accuracy currently required for machine tool calibrations,
sion coefficient of a body shall be denoted u() for the it is assumed that the uncertainty in this value is equal
part and u(s) for the standard. This value, like that of to zero.
 itself, must be an estimate. Various methods such as
the following can be used to make this estimate: 6.2.2.3 Uncertainty of Temperature Measurement.
(a) The estimate may be based on the distribution When the temperature of a body is measured
found among results of actual experiments conducted and there is an uncertainty associated with this
on a number of like objects. measurement, this uncertainty comes from the
40
ASME B5.57-2012
thermometer calibration, thermometer mounting 6.3 Relative Vibration Tests

procedures, and instrumental variations. This uncer-
The relative vibration tests shall be performed under
tainty can be estimated by various methods, such as
conditions equivalent to those pertaining during the per-
the following:
formance tests (see section 7). The test environment shall
(a) The estimate may be based on the distribution
be considered acceptable if the vibration amplitude mea
found among results of actual measurements conducted
sured between the machine spindle and the work table is
on a number of like objects, using the same thermom-
less than 25% of the machine specification zone for bidirec-
eters and the same procedures.
tional repeatability for the appropriate axis. For the pur-
(b) The estimate may be based on the distribution
poses of this Standard, this amplitude shall be assessed by
found in published data regarding the use of such ther-
the following simple functional tests. Care should be taken
mometers and specific procedures.
that such tests include both the steady state vibrations and
(c) The estimate may be made from prior judgment
any transients that might occur during normal use. In prin-
regarding the range of possible error. For the purposes
ciple, such tests would last for a complete daily cycle, but
of this Standard, in the absence of other information,
this is not practical. The minimum recommended duration
temperature measurement uncertainty should be esti-
is 10 min. These tests are specified with the full knowledge
mated as being represented by a rectangular distribu-
that they do not constitute a well-defined measurement of
tion with bounds of 1°C when using thermocouples
the forced vibration amplitude, but rather some compli-
and 0.5°C when using thermistors or platinum resist-
cated function that relates only in a very general way to
ance thermometers (RTDs).
that amplitude. If the machine does not pass the functional
For method(c), where the error is estimated by a rec-
test, Nonmandatory Appendix D provides recommended
tangular (uniform) distribution, the standard uncer-
procedures for accurate measurement of the vibration
tainty in temperature measurement is given by
spectra at the User–Supplier interface for the purposes of
determining conformance to the Supplier’s specifications.
( a1 − a2 )2 Should the vibration amplitude as measured in this
u(T ) 5
12 test exceed the requirements and the cause of the vibra-
tion be traced to sources that are the User’s responsi-
where bility, and if the User does not desire to upgrade the
a1 5 the upper range of the rectangular distribution machine interface, then the machine specification shall
a2 5 the lower range of the rectangular distribution be derated, as specified in para. 6.3.1.
Note that when estimating the uncertainty in tempera- It bears repeating that the vibration tests described
ture measurement when using a laser as a standard, the above do not assess the classical dynamic performance
uncertainty is in the measurement of air temperature. For of the machine tool when subjected to cutting conditions
the purposes of this Standard, it can be obtained from that lead to regenerative chatter.
any of the three options above. If method (c) is chosen,
the estimated ranges of temperature uncertainties are the 6.3.1 Methodology for Functional Relative Vibration
same. Tests. As with the ETVE test (para. 6.2.1), this test
may be conducted a single axis at a time or for all axes
6.2.2.4 Other Temperature Effects. It is possi- simultaneously. In either event, high-resolution, high-
ble for errors caused by differential expansion to be bandwidth displacement sensors, conforming to the
induced in machines when they are operated at mean requirements of section 9, shall be attached to the tool
temperatures significantly different from the tempera- post of the machine and set to read against a test ball
ture at which they were aligned and calibrated. It is or other artifact mounted in the machine spindle. (This
not within the current state of the art to develop sim- test can also be performed in reverse, with the displace-
ple tests for these effects. Therefore, if a machine is to ment sensor in the spindle and the artifact in the tool
be accepted at a mean temperature that is significantly post position.) The artifact used for the ETVE test is the
different from that used during alignment and calibra- recommended fixture since this test will be performed
tion, the positioning accuracy and repeatability, and the at the same time (see Fig. 6.2.1.4-1). In the absence of
circular performance tests described in para. 7.9 shall be other guidance, the position used for the ETVE test
repeated for each temperature. The Supplier shall spec- shall be the default position for this functional vibra-
ify quantitatively the magnitude of temperature change tion test. Recommended displacement sensors are
that is significant, i.e., the significant mean temperature capacitance gages or other high-bandwidth sensors
change (SMTC), for a given machine with given specifi- meeting the requirements of section 9. In the event that
cation zones. Furthermore, the Supplier shall specify a only two displacement sensors are used, the direction
safe operating temperature range (SOTR) within which of each displacement sensor shall be aligned with the
the machine should be kept to prevent physical damage machine axis. The maximum spread of the displacement
to the machine. sensor(s) reading over a period of no longer than 5 s
41
ASME B5.57-2012
Table 6.3.1-1 Performance Parameters Derated Due to Excessive

Environmental Vibration
Parameter Paragraph
Linear positioning (per axis) 7.2

Unidirectional accuracies of positioning 7.2.7.4
Bidirectional accuracy of positioning 7.2.7.3
Bidirectional repeatability 7.2.7.5
Unidirectional repeatabilities 7.2.7.6
Spindle axis of rotation (per spindle) 7.6
Asynchronous radial error motion 7.6.3.1
Asynchronous axial motion 7.6.3.2
Circular tests 7.9
Circular hysteresis 7.9.5
Radial deviations 7.9.5
Subsystems repeatability 8.3
Tool-change repeatability 8.3.1
Turret repeatability 8.3.2
Repeatability, location, and drift of tool-setting system(s) 8.4
Repeatability of tool-setting system 8.4.1
Machine performance as a measuring tool 8.6
Measurement repeatability 8.6.1
Linear measurement accuracy 8.6.4
shall be judged to be the machine vibration amplitude NOTE: This test does not measure vibrations caused by machine
for that axis. The displacement sensors shall be read electronics, hydraulics, axis drives, etc. Further tests given in this
as rapidly as possible, and therefore, high-bandwidth Standard provide this information (see para. 7.6.2).
capacitance gages, as described in section 9, should be
used. In the event that a single displacement sensor is
used, the direction of displacement indication shall be 6.4 Electrical Tests
aligned with each machine axis in succession and a simi- Well-defined procedures and highly developed instru-
lar analysis performed on the data. The purpose of this ments exist that enable the measurement of the param-
test is to assess vibration caused by the environment, eters characterizing the electrical power supplied to a
not vibration caused by the machine. The test is there- machine. It is, however, the position of this Standard
fore carried out with the machine turned off, that is, the that such tests are, in the general case, not required and
main machine power off. In some cases, high-precision should be undertaken only in the event that the machine
machines are supplied with vibration isolation (pneu- does not meet performance specifications and there is
matic isolators, for example). In these cases, the isolation reason to suspect the electrical power. Failures due to
system shall be turned on or a separate agreement shall electrical power usually show up as intermittent control
be made between the Supplier and the User. In the case or readout failures, which are difficult to link to mechan-
where the relative vibration amplitude, measured with ical causes. In the case that the power is suspect, this
the machine off, exceeds 25% of the specification zone of Standard provides Nonmandatory Appendix E, which
the machine for a particular test, the machine vibration describes the recommended procedure for determin-
environment does not conform to the Supplier’s guide- ing the conformance of the electrical environment to
lines, and the User chooses not to upgrade the environ- the Supplier’s guidelines. The User should pay partic-
ment, permissible specification zone limits for specific ular attention to the proper grounding of the machine
tests in this Standard, given in Table 6.3.1-1, shall be in accordance with the Supplier’s guidelines, as this is
automatically increased such that the measured vibra- one of the most common causes of improper electrical
tion amplitude is 25% of the new specification zone. performance.
42
ASME B5.57-2012
6.5 Utility Air and Other Tests reached a thermally stable condition before testing. They
shall be protected from drafts and external radiation
As with electrical power tests, there exist many com-
such as sunlight, overhead heaters, and machine lights.
plicated procedures for determining the quality of the
All tests should be run under the lighting conditions
utility air, hydraulics, or other services to the machine
that will be used during normal machine operation; that
when such services are required. It is the position of this
is, if the machine is to be run with its internal lights on,
Standard that exhaustive tests should not be required
it should be tested with the lights on. For a thorough
for checking conformance to specification unless a prob-
discussion of thermal time constants, see ANSI B89.6.2.
lem traced to the air or other supply is evident. As stated
previously, variations in the mean value of the supplied
air pressure can, on certain machines, cause changes in 7.1.1.2 Sign Conventions. In addition to mag-
machine squareness and positional drifts, so that if such nitude, the signs of machine performance parameters
changes occur, air pressure is a possible suspect. It shall can be important when communicating and analyzing
therefore be the responsibility of the Supplier to exam- measurement results and when making compensa-
ine, using the gages supplied with the machine, the tions and adjustments. Recommendations are given in
mean pressure and pressure variations of air or other Nonmandatory Appendix N.
services at the input to the machine. If, in the Supplier’s
judgment, such fluctuations are excessive, then further 7.1.1.3 Machine to Be Tested. The machine shall
tests shall be performed for determining conformance be completely assembled and fully operational. All the
of User-supplied air or other services to the Supplier’s necessary leveling operations, geometric alignment, and
specification. If, however, the Supplier judges such fluc- Supplier functional checks shall be completed before
tuations to be insignificant, then the utility air and/or starting performance testing. A minimal set of func-
other services shall be judged as conforming to specifi- tional checks is given in Nonmandatory Appendix F. All
cation, without further testing. performance tests in section 7 shall be carried out with
the machine in an unloaded condition (i.e., without a
workpiece, unless specified otherwise).
7 MACHINE PERFORMANCE Users should be aware that changing machine param-
eters or adjustments of any kind may affect the results
7.1 General
of various performance tests. When using this Standard
The Supplier shall be responsible for providing a for machine acceptance, these parameter changes and
machine that meets all performance specifications agreed adjustments should be made prior to the commence-
upon between the Supplier and the User, when installed ment of acceptance testing.
according to the Supplier’s recommendations in any
environment meeting the requirements of section 5. If 7.1.1.4 Compensation Systems. Some machines
required, derating of the acceptable specification zones are equipped with computer-controlled compensation
shall be applied as described in section 6. Note that the systems for geometric or thermal errors, or both. If the
specification zone for any given test is the value given machine is so equipped, tests should be run with the
in para. 1.1. If a machine meets the performance speci- compensation system on. Users desiring to see uncom-
fications and other conditions agreed upon between pensated errors may request, as part of the original
the Supplier and the User, the User should accept the specification, that these tests also be performed with the
machine. compensation system off.
7.1.1 Test Conditions 7.1.1.5 Machine Warm-Up. The tests shall be pre-
7.1.1.1 Environment. Where the temperature of ceded by an appropriate warm-up procedure. If the pro-
the environment can be controlled, it shall be set to 20°C cedure is not specified in this Standard for a particular
(68°F). Otherwise, the measuring instrument output test, it may be specified by the Supplier of the machine
and the machine nominal readings shall be adjusted to or agreed upon between the Supplier and the User. If no
yield results corrected to 20°C (68°F), where applicable. conditions are specified, the preliminary machine move-
This means that for material standards, a nominal dif- ments shall be restricted to only those necessary to set
ferential expansion (NDE) correction shall be applied up the measurement instrument.
(see section 4) and other instruments, such as laser inter-
ferometers, shall be compensated for environmental 7.1.2 Foundation Checks and Machine Alignment. In
conditions. Those tests where environmental compen- some cases, Users will be applying this Standard to
sation and NDE correction shall be used are listed in machines that have been installed for some time. Before
Table 6.2.2.1-1 (see para. 6.2.2.1). performing any measurements, the User should realign
The machine and, if relevant, the measuring instru- the machine following the Supplier’s recommended pro-
ment or artifact standard shall have been in the test envi- cedures. If the machine has more than three supports,
ronment long enough (preferably overnight) to have the User should pay particular attention to checking
43
ASME B5.57-2012
that the foundation is properly cured and meets the Step 4: Apply a force by hand in the opposite direction,
Supplier’s specifications. If the machine is not correctly gradually decrease the force to zero, and read the indica-
aligned and supported, poor performance test results tor. The difference in readings is the datum hysteresis.
are very likely. For a further discussion of these issues,
Step 5: Apply the force to the fixture holding the
see Nonmandatory Appendix G.
indicator
7.1.3 Chucks and Other Part-Holding Devices. Several Step 6: Gradually decrease this force to zero and read the
of the performance tests described in this Standard indicator.
require the use of a chuck or other part-holding device
to attach instrumentation to the machine. Unless other- Step 7: Apply a force by hand in the opposite direction,
wise agreed upon between the Supplier and the User, gradually decrease the force to zero, and read the indi-
the part-holding device to be used for these tests shall be cator. The difference in readings is the indicator fixture
that which is supplied with the machine and to be used hysteresis. The arithmetic sum of the hysteresis values
during normal machine operation. If the machine has for the datum fixture and indicator fixture is the total
been supplied without such a part-holding device, then test setup hysteresis.
a part-holding device specified by the machine Supplier The sensitivity of the result to the magnitude of the
shall be used for the purposes of performance testing. force is, in general, insignificant. If significant hys-
teresis5 is measured, and if this hysteresis cannot be
7.1.4 Test Setup and Instrumentation reduced by increasing the stiffness of the test setup, it
7.1.4.1 General. Most measurements prescribed may be caused by the machine itself. In such cases, fur-
in this Standard are carried out to measure motion ther testing shall be discontinued until this condition
between the component of the machine that holds the is corrected.
workpiece and the component that holds the cutting
tool. All test setups normally involve two fixtures: one 7.1.4.3 Setup Stability Tests. Machine tools are
that establishes the reference point or surface, and a sec- subject to a wide variety of vibrations from both inter-
ond that holds some type of indicator to read against nal and external sources. These vibrations vary in both
this reference point or surface. The specific setups and frequency and amplitude depending on time, location
instrumentation are provided for suggestions only. within the machine, and machine axis positions. The
Other instrumentation and setups providing compara- stiffness and damping characteristics of machines may
ble results can be used. However, before starting any exclude these vibrations from having an effect on the
of the measurements, the User of this Standard shall actual performance of the machine. However, improper
ensure that the particular setup and instrumentation mounting of test equipment may also make the instru-
function properly within the machine tool environment. ment or the test sensitive to these vibrations. The setup
Two main tests should be used for such checks: setup stability test is designed to assure that the mounting of
hysteresis and stability. instruments does not significantly affect the uncertainty
The machine hysteresis is measured, in this Standard, of measurements.
as part of the compliance and hysteresis check in The procedure is as follows:
Nonmandatory Appendix H. Step 1: Mount the measuring instrument in the manner
used for the performance test.
7.1.4.2 Setup Hysteresis Tests. The goal of this
test is to discover any hysteresis effects, which may be Step 2: Position the machine in the middle of travel for
caused by loose bolts in test setups, insufficient struc- the performance test.
tural strength in the brackets, etc. Any hysteresis is
Step 3: Set the instrument to zero and sample the output
normally revealed as a lack of repeatability in machine
at a rate and time equal to those used in the test,6 with-
performance testing.
out moving the machine.
Setup hysteresis is measured by applying a suitable force
The mounting of instruments can be altered to reduce
in the direction of the intended measurement, between
the range of sampled data. Mountings preferably should
these two fixtures and observing the resulting deflection.
be stiffened; however, softening of mounts can also
The procedure is as follows:
reduce the sensitivity to certain vibrations. If changes
Step 1: Set up and zero an indicator between the two fix- to the mounting do not reduce the range, the machine
tures in the direction and location of the intended axis itself may be responsible. Check seismic vibration, and
performance test. continue testing.
Step 2: Apply the force by hand to the fixture holding the
datum reference. 5 Conventional practice is that the hysteresis be less than one-tenth
of the desired measurement repeatability.
Step 3: After the force is applied, gradually decrease this 6 The range of the data sampled should not exceed 10% of the
force to zero and read the indicator. specification zone for the performance test.
44
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.2.3-1 Typical Setup for a Laser Interferometer
Retroreflector Turret
Work spindle
Remote
interferometer
Bending
Laser mirror
7.2. Positioning Accuracy and Repeatability, 7.2.3 Alignment. The laser interferometer shall be
Linear Axes aligned as recommended by the laser interferometer
Supplier. Particular attention should be paid to cosine
7.2.1 General. The tests described in paras. 7.2.2
error, and alignment should be such that cosine error is
through 7.2.8 are meant to represent a minimum require-
less than 1% of the specification zone of the axis under
ment to ensure conformance to accuracy and repeatabil-
test. A typical laser setup for testing a slide way is shown
ity specifications. They are not comprehensive. A laser
in Fig. 7.2.3-1. In the figure, the interferometer is shown
interferometer is the preferred measuring instrument.
mounted in the spindle; however, on some machines the
WARNING: These tests should not be performed until after the spindle cannot be locked, and thus the setup as shown
thermal test outlined in para. 6.2, as, if the thermal environment would lead to instabilities. On machines where the spin-
is inadequate, these tests will yield incorrect results and will dle cannot be locked, a bracket should be made to posi-
have to be redone. tion the interferometer (or retroreflector) near the point
where a part would be, with the bracket attached to the
7.2.2 Lines of Measurements. The default lines spindle housing. This is very important. An easy check
of measurement for laser interferometer tests shall be is to set up the interferometer, lock the spindle, and try to
along two (or more) lines in the work zone parallel to rotate the spindle by hand, observing the interferometer
the machine linear axis directions. For a simple Group 1 readout. No change greater than one-tenth of the specifi-
turning machine, the cross-slide (X) should be mea cation zone required for the test should be observable.
sured close to the work spindle face and the in-feed (Z)
axis along the work spindle centerline. Other options 7.2.4 Compensation for Environmental Conditions.
may be specified according to machine group, usage, This test requires that the interferometer be corrected for
and configuration. If so, such lines shall be made part air temperature, air pressure, and air humidity, and the
of the original machine specification and described machine scale be corrected for thermal expansion. To per-
in equivalent detail. Note that this Standard requires form these corrections, the environmental compensation
the measurement of angular error for each linear axis unit supplied with the laser interferometer shall be used.
(see para. 7.4). For efficiency, these measurements can Further, the part temperature sensor shall be placed in a
be made at the same time and in essentially the same position where the temperature corresponds, as closely
locations as the positioning accuracy and repeatability, as possible, to the temperature of the machine scale or its
linear axes. equivalent. The correct effective coefficient of expansion
45
ASME B5.57-2012
of the machine scales shall be used (see Form 4), and the deviation data shall be plotted in a graph such as that
instrument manufacturer’s instructions for the compen- illustrated in Fig. 7.2.7-1. Figure 7.2.7-1 shows the com-
sation shall be followed. Note that it is a requirement plete set of data. For clarity, the forward data are shown
of this Standard that the nominal differential expansion separately in Fig. 7.2.7-2. On both figures, the data aver-
(NDE) correction be performed. If the laser system does ages are shown as dark lines. From these data, the fol-
not provide for environmental correction, both laser lowing parameters shall be computed and reported for
readings and scale readings shall be corrected manually. each axis, and the resulting quantities shall be compared
The procedure for making these corrections is given in to the appropriate specification zones:
Nonmandatory Appendix I. (a) bidirectional systematic deviation of positioning, E
(b) unidirectional systematic deviations of position-
7.2.5 Measuring Intervals. Measuring intervals ing, E↑ and E↓
shall be no larger than 25 mm (1 in.) for axes of 250 mm (c) bidirectional repeatability, R
(10 in.) length or less. For longer axes, the interval (d) unidirectional repeatabilities, R↑ and R↓
shall be no more than one-tenth of the axis length. The The equations for computing these parameters
points chosen for measurement should not be those are given in the paras. 7.2.7.1 through 7.2.7.8. These
points used by the Supplier to acquire data used for computations should be calculated using a computer
ball screw or lead screw compensation. Furthermore, program. For those who wish to perform the computa-
these points should be chosen at intervals that are not tions graphically, an approximate method is given in
even fractions of the machine scale intervals. A simple para. 7.2.7.9. A report for a typical axis is summarized
way to accomplish this is to use metric intervals on a in Table 7.2.7-1.
machine with English scales or screws, and vice versa.
For machines that use ball or lead screws for displace- 7.2.7.1 Bidirectional Systematic Deviation of Pos
ment readout, the User should make these closer-spaced itioning of an Axis, E. To determine the bidirectional
measurements an integral part of the specification. The systematic deviation of positioning, first average the com-
procedure for measuring periodic error is described in puted deviations from the target position in the forward
para. 7.2.8. and reverse directions. The difference between the algebraic
maximum and minimum of the mean (average) unidirec-
7.2.6 Measurements. Before commencing mea tional positional deviations for both approach directions
surements, the machine shall be run through an exer- (i.e., x↑ and x↑) at any position along or around the axis
cise sequence of two complete back-and-forth cycles is the reported value, that is, the range of the average or
for each linear axis, using the same program or manual mean values as shown in Fig. 7.2.7-1. The equation is
time sequence that will be used during data acquisition.
The default traverse speed for these measurements shall E 5 max . ( x ↑ , x ↓) 2 min . ( x ↑ , x ↓)
be the machine’s maximum programmable feed rate.
Other traverse speeds may be negotiated between the 7.2.7.2 Unidirectional Systematic Deviations of
User and the Supplier. Next, five sets of bidirectional Positioning, E↑ and E↓. The unidirectional system-
measurements shall be taken for each axis sequentially atic deviations of positioning are just the ranges of the
along the line specified in para. 7.2.2 and at the points average plots in the forward and reverse directions.
specified in para. 7.2.5, stopping the machine for a short Mathematically they are the differences between the
duration, 1 s to 5 s, at each of the data points. The laser algebraic maximum and minimum of the mean unidi-
readings should be averaged for about 0.25 s, and at rectional positional deviations for both approach direc-
least 120 points should be taken to compute this average. tions (i.e., xi ↑ or xi ↓) at any position along or around the
(On some large machines, longer settling times may be axis; that is
required. In that case, the settling time should be nego-
tiated between the User and the Supplier.) These data E↑ 5 max . ( xi ↑) 2 min . ( xi ↑)
shall be acquired without rezeroing the laser system. A
and
set of measurements shall consist of the machine axis
readings and the corresponding laser readings. Note E↓ 5 max . ( xi ↓) 2 min . ( xi ↓)
that for each point there will be 10 measurements, 5 in
each direction. These data shall be treated as described 7.2.7.3 Bidirectional Accuracy of Positioning of an
in the para. 7.2.7. Axis, A. The bidirectional accuracy of positioning is the
range derived from the combination of the bidirectional
7.2.7 Data Analysis and Reported Parameters. For systematic deviations and the estimator of the standard
each measurement, the respective deviation of position uncertainty of bidirectional positioning obtained using a
(xi↑ or xi↓) shall be calculated as the measured actual coverage factor, k, of 2. The estimates of the uncertainty
position minus the target position. For each axis, the are computed for each average value according to
46
Table 7.2.7-1 Typical Test Results (Test for Linear Axis up to 2 m)
i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Target position, 6 711 175 077 353 834 525 668 704 175 881 868 1055 890 1234 304 1408 462 1580 269 1750 920
Pi, mm
Approach direction ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑
Positional deviations, µm
j51 2,3 21,2 3,6 20,5 3,5 0,2 3,0 20,6 1,7 21,9 0,4 23,0 20,4 23,7 20,2 23,7 0,2 23,5 0,3 23,2 20,1 23,6
2 2,1 21,7 3,5 20,9 3,3 20,6 2,7 21,2 1,5 22,3 0,2 23,5 20,7 24,3 20,6 24,4 20,2 24,3 20,1 23,8 20,6 24,0
3 1,9 21,9 3,1 21,1 3,0 20,7 2,4 21,3 1,0 22,9 20,2 23,7 21,0 24,6 21,0 25,1 21,0 25,0 20,9 24,7 21,2 24,5
4 2,8 21,3 3,7 20,2 3,8 0,1 3,6 20,7 1,9 21,4 0,9 22,8 0,0 23,6 20,2 23,6 0,5 23,2 0,5 22,8 0,4 23,2
5 2,2 21,9 3,2 20,8 3,5 20,7 2,6 21,3 1,1 22,3 20,1 23,7 20,9 24,5 21,1 24,6 20,5 24,5 20,4 24,1 20,9 24,5
Mean unidirectional 2,3 21,6 3,4 20,7 3,4 20,4 2,8 20,9 1,4 22,2 0,2 23,3 20,6 24,1 20,6 24,3 20,2 24,1 20,1 23,7 20,5 24,0
positional
deviation, x i
Estimator of standard 0,3 0,4 0,3 0,4 0,3 0,5 0,3 0,5 0,4 0,5 0,4 0,4 0,4 0,5 0,4 0,6 0,6 0,7 0,6 0,7 0,6 0,6
uncertainty, sJ
2sJ 0,7 0,7 0,6 0,7 0,6 0,9 0,6 0,9 0,8 1,1 0,9 0,8 0,9 1,0 0,9 1,3 1,2 1,4 1,1 1,5 1,2 1,2
47
x i 2 2sJ 1,6 22,3 2,8 21,4 2,8 21,3 2,2 21,9 0,6 23,2 20,6 24,2 21,4 25,1 21,5 25,5 21,4 25,5 21,3 25,2 21,7 25,1
x i 1 2sJ 2,9 20,9 4,0 0,0 4,0 0,5 3,4 0,0 2,2 21,1 1,1 22,5 0,3 23,2 0,3 23,0 1,0 22,7 1,0 22,3 0,8 22,8
ASME B5.57-2012
Unidirectional 1,3 1,4 1,2 1,5 1,2 1,8 1,2 1,9 1,6 2,2 1,7 1,7 1,7 1,9 1,8 2,5 2,3 2,9 2,3 2,9 2,5 2,3
repeatability, RJ 5 4sJ
Reversal value, Bi 23,9 24,1 23,8 23,7 23,6 23,6 23,6 23,7 23,9 23,6 23,5
Bidirectional 5,2 5,4 5,3 5,2 5,5 5,3 5,4 5,8 6,5 6,2 5,9
repeatability, Ri
Mean bidirectional 0,3 1,4 1,5 0,9 20,4 21,5 22,4 22,5 22,2 21,9 22,2
positional
deviation, x i
Axis Deviation, mm Unidirectional ↓ Unidirectional ↑ Bidirectional
Reversal value, B Not applicable Not applicable 0.0041 (at i 5 2)
Mean reversal value, B Not applicable Not applicable –0.0037
Range mean bidirectional positional deviation, M Not applicable Not applicable 0.0040 [0.0015 – (–0.0025)]
Systematic deviation of positioning, E 0.0040 [0.0034 – (–0.0006)] 0.0039 [–0.0004 – (–0.0043)] 0.0077 [0.0034 – (–0.0043)]
Repeatability of positioning, R 0.0025 (at i 5 11) 0.0029 (at i 5 10) 0.0065 (at i 5 9)
Accuracy, A 0.0057 [0.0040 – (–0.0017)] 0.0061 [0.0005 – (–0.0055)] 0.0096 [0.0040 – (–0.0055)]
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.2.7-1 The Full Data Set for the Positioning Deviations of an Axis
B
Deviation, �m
R1
B1
A
E
R
–2
X
–4
X
X 2s or X 2s
–6
X
0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000
Position, mm
1 n A↓ 5 max . ( xi↓ 1 2si↓) 2 min . ( xi↓ 2 2si↓)

si↑ 5
n21
∑ (x
j51
ij 2 x i ↑ )2
7.2.7.5 Bidirectional Repeatability for an Axis, R.

and Bidirectional repeatability for an axis is defined as the
1 n
maximum value of the bidirectional repeatability of
si↓ 5
n21
∑ (x
j51
ij 2 x i ↓ )2
positioning for an axis; that is
R 5 max. (Ri)
Then A is given by where
Ri 5 max. (2si↑ 1 2si↓ 1 |Bi|; Ri↑; Ri↓)
A 5 max . ( xi↑ 1 2si↑ ; xi↓ 1 2si↓) Ri↑ 5 4si↑
2 min . ( xi↑ 2 2si↑ ; xi↓ 2 2si↓) Ri↓ 5 4si↓
7.2.7.4 Unidirectional Accuracies of Positioning, 7.2.7.6 Unidirectional Repeatabilities, R↑ and R↓.

Unidirectional repeatabilities are defined as the maxi-
A↑ and A↓. The unidirectional accuracies of position-
mum value of the repeat abilities at any position; that is
ing are computed analogously to the computation of A,
described in para. 7.2.7.2. They are the ranges represent- R↑ 5 max. (Ri↑) 5 max. (4si↑)
ing the combination of the unidirectional systematic and
deviations and the estimator of the standard uncertainty
R↓ 5 max. (Ri↓) 5 max. (4si↓)
of unidirectional positioning obtained using a coverage
factor of 2.
7.2.7.7 The Reversal Deviation, B. The reversal
A↑ 5 max . ( xi↑ 1 2si↑) 2 min . ( xi↑ 2 2si↑) deviation is the algebraic maximum of the absolute
and mean reversal deviations, |Bi|, at any position along or
48
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.2.7-2 Positioning Deviations of an Axis, Forward Direction Only
–1
2s1
R1
2s1
–2
Deviation, �m
A
–3
R
–4
X
X 2s
–5
–6
0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000
Position, mm
around the axis, determined using the procedure and the range into a standard uncertainty using the factors
under the conditions specified in this Standard. shown in Table 7.2.7.9-1. For a given sample size, n, and
B 5 max. (|Bi|) range, Rni, the appropriate standard uncertainty, si, is
estimated by
7.2.7.8 The Mean Reversal Value, B . The mean si 5 Rni/d2(n)
reversal value is the algebraic mean of the absolute In the table, the entry for a sample size of 5 is highlighted,
reversal values, |Bi|, at all target positions along or as the recommended number of repeated measurements
around the axis. for each target position is 5. The table, however, may also
1 m be used for other sample sizes. Note that the sample size
B5
m
∑B i of 20 is also highlighted, as that is the sample size used for
i51 the analysis of uncertainty in spindle error motion (see
para. 7.6).
7.2.7.9 Approximate Calculations. If a compu-
ter program is not available to calculate the standard 7.2.8 Periodic Error. Nearly all scales used on turn-
uncertainties of the positioning data, then it is possi- ing centers contain either classical periodic error (caused
ble to estimate them from the range. This can be done by pitch error in lead screws or ball screws, mismounted
graphically. The procedure is as follows. At each of the nuts, etc.) or some form of interpolation error, which
target points, measure the range graphically. Convert occurs during electronic interpolation between scale
49
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.2.8-1 Periodic Error of a Linear Axis (Unidirectional)

2.5
1.5
Error, �m
1
P
0.5
–0.5
–1
0 1 2 3 4 5
Axis position, mm
Run 1 Run 2 Run 3

Run 4 Run 5 Average
Table 7.2.7.9-1 Conversion Factors for Graphically

Estimating Standard Uncertainty
Sample Size, n Conversion Factor, d2(n)
5 2.33
6 2.53
7 2.70
8 2.85
9 2.97
10 3.08
12 3.26
15 3.47
20 3.74
divisions on line scales, moiré scales, inductive scales, for periodic error by measuring a large number of
and the like. Even laser interferometer scales have peri- closely spaced displacements over an interval equal to
odic error with a periodicity that is the wavelength of the periodicity of the machine scale. For the purposes of
light or a fraction thereof, depending upon the exact this Standard, the positioning error should be measured
optical configuration of the system (although peri- for 20 points unidirectionally, evenly spaced, over two
odic error in laser systems is generally small, it can be periods of the pitch of the expected periodic error. For a
important on very high-precision machines). Users of screw, this would be the screw pitch; for a line scale, the
this Standard with machines whose bidirectional sys- line spacing; for an inductive scale, the coil spacing, etc.
tematic deviation of positioning is expected to be less If the pitch of the scale is quite small, as on a line scale,
than 300 nm (approximately 8 μin.) should consult with fewer points can be taken. These measurements shall be
a laser manufacturer regarding this effect. repeated five times. These data shall be plotted as shown
With a laser interferometer on all turning machines in Fig. 7.2.8-1. The periodic error, P, is the total range of
except those noted above, it is particularly easy to check the average of the deviations, as shown in the figure. It
50
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.3.1.1-1 Setup for Measuring Straightness Using an Electronic Indicator and a Mechanical Straightedge
Straightedge
Straightedge
support points
(three), both sides
on
moti
ble
Ta
(–)
Po
lar
ity (+)
Electronic
indicator
Normal Position
(+)
Po
lar
ity (–)
Machine table
Machine slideway
Reversed Position
is computed precisely the same as E↑, as described in aligned approximately parallel to an axis motion.7 The
para. 7.2.7.1; that is, for this test straightness error is measured with a mechanical or elec-
P 5 max. (xi ↑) – min. (xi ↑) tronic indicator or a plane mirror interferometer (if the
straightedge has an optical-quality reflective surface)
7.3 Straightness Error mounted in the machine’s tool position. This setup is
depicted in Fig. 7.3.1.1-1.
The straightness of a linear axis is measured by posi-
WARNING: The calibration chart of the straightedge should
tioning a straightedge in the workpiece position, aligned
be used to determine if its accuracy is adequate compared to
to the motion axis, and measuring the lateral motion in
the straightness specification of the slide under test (see sec-
the two directions orthogonal to the traverse direction,
tion 9). If the straightedge is not accurate enough, the calibra-
using an indicator in the tool position. The best posi-
tion chart or a technique called straightedge reversal should
tions for performing the straightness measurement in the
be used to eliminate the effects of straightedge errors from
machine work zone are those that most commonly reflect
the measurements. However, the straightedge reversal tech-
the normal position of the workpiece in the work zone.
nique does not work when measuring the vertical straight-
7.3.1 Test Procedure. Common methods of straight- 7 For large machines, either a very long straightedge is required
ness measurement use mechanical straightedges, opti- or the straightedge must be staged. To improve relative alignment
cal straightedges, taut wires, geometry lasers, and laser between stages, larger overlap of gage positions is required, but this
straightness interferometers. increases the number of gage positions. It is thus difficult and time-
consuming to make accurate straightness measurements on a large
machine using a short straightedge [cases exist where mechanical
7.3.1.1 Mechanical Straightedges. The straight- straightedges have been used successfully for distances up to 2 m
edge is fixtured in the work-holding spindle and is (approximately 80 in.)].
51
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.3.1.2-1 Test Setup for Measuring Straightness Using a Taut Wire
Spindle
Microscope
Taut wire
ble
Ta
Weight
ness of a horizontal axis when the sag of the straightedge due the laser path should be vigorously mixed using fans, and an
to gravity is important. adequate number of repetitions should be performed.
WARNING: When an interferometer is used as the measurement

sensor, the air gap between the interferometer and the straight- 7.3.1.4 Laser Straightness Interferometers. The
edge should be kept as small as possible to avoid effects of air most commonly used laser straightness interferometers
turbulence. Since the measurement is differential and the air gap consist of a Wollaston prism and a straightness reflec-
is small, it is usually not necessary to make corrections for errors tor. The straightness reflector should be mounted in the
in laser wavelength due to atmospheric conditions such as tem- work-holding spindle, and the Wollaston prism should
perature and pressure. For the highest measurement accuracy, be mounted in the tool position (see Fig. 7.3.1.4-1).
however, these corrections should be made. WARNING: The centerline of the straightness reflector is analo-
gous to the mechanical straightedge. Thus, extreme care must
7.3.1.2 Taut Wire. Taut wires are often used for be taken in the fixturing of this reflector, particularly in situa-
measuring the horizontal straightness on large machines. tions where bending is suspected. Any local bending will cause
The wire is stretched along the axis direction, and mea the centerline of the reflector to change its position (see Fig.
surements of wire position are made with a sensor (prox- 7.3.1.4-1), and the result obtained will not reflect the straightness
imity sensor or microscope) mounted in the machine’s one would obtain on a part fixtured at multiple points over the
tool position (see Fig. 7.3.1.2-1). table surface. This situation can be partially rectified by mount-
ing the reflector to a secondary surface that is kinematically sup-
7.3.1.3 Geometry Laser. A laser head is mounted ported over the table.
in the work-holding spindle and the laser beam aligned Laser straightness interferometers, like alignment and
along the axis of motion, as shown in Fig. 7.3.1.3-1. A geometry lasers, are sensitive to changes in the proper-
sensor8 (either a lateral effect photodiode or a quadrant ties of the air. Mixing and averaging should be used to
photodiode) capable of measuring the lateral motion of minimize the effects of these changes.
the spindle from the laser beam is attached in the nomi- Flatness errors of the mirrors of the straightness reflec-
nal tool position. tor are also sources of measurement errors. Reversing the
WARNING: When using this method, care must be taken due straightness reflector as shown in Fig. 7.3.1.4-1, and aver-
to “wandering” of the laser beam and to intensity variations aging the results from the two positions, is conceptually
over the beam cross-section as a function of distance, which are similar to straightedge reversal and can cancel this error.
caused by interference, diffraction, and thermal effects. For best
results, averaging should be performed at every point, the air in 7.3.1.5 Measurement Procedure. Before com-
mencing measurements, the machine shall be run
8 Interference filters are often used at the sensor to reduce the through an exercise sequence of two back-and-forth
effects of changes in ambient illumination. movements between the first and last target points.
52
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.3.1.3-1 Test Setup for Measuring Straightness Using an Alignment Laser
Spindle
Quadrant
photodiode
Alignment
laser
n
tio
c
re
di
n
io
ot
M
Table
Fig. 7.3.1.4-1 Typical Straightness Interferometer
Spindle
Straightness optic Straightness

reflector
Laser
Rotate 180 deg

about this axis
for “reversal”
Table
The machine shall be programmed to move the consist of the target positions and the corresponding
axis under test and to position it at a series of target instrument readings.
positions.
At a target position, the data can be recorded with the 7.3.2 Data Analysis. For each set of bidirectional
machine stationary or during continuous motion. The measurements, two parallel lines are created such that
target positions are required over the full travel range all measured values are between the two lines, and the
of the axis. The measuring intervals shall be no larger separation of the two lines is a minimum.
than 25 mm (1 in.) for axes of 250 mm (10 in.) or less. For Although common algorithms can establish these two
longer axes, the interval shall be no more than one-tenth lines, other line “fitting” methods may be more read-
of the axis length. ily available to the User and are therefore acceptable as
Five sets of bidirectional measurements shall be approximations. For example, the two enveloping lines
made at all the target positions. The default traverse may be established as parallel to a simple regression line
speed shall be the machine’s maximum programmable fit (least-squared error) or end point fit.
feed rate. Other feed rates may be negotiated between The straightness for each measurement is the range of
the User and the Supplier. A set of measurements shall residual values from the applicable fit. Graphically it is
53
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.3.2-1 Typical Plot Showing Straightness Data With the Straightness for a Particular Axis Clearly Labeled
Indicator reading, �m
2
Straightness
0
–2
–4
–6
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Axis position, mm
the distance between the enveloping lines as measured (f) unidirectional repeatabilities of angular error, Rae↑
against the deviation (vertical) graph scale (i.e., slope and Rae↓
due to alignment removed). The average and the stand- (g) reversal deviation of angular error, Bae
ard uncertainty of the five straightness values calculated
as such are reported as the straightness error of the axis. 7.4.2 Estimating the Effect of Angular Error. Angular
Straightness errors should also be plotted in a manner error leads to positioning error for positions not on the
similar to that shown in Fig. 7.3.2-1, where the least- lines measured in the linear positioning accuracy and
squared error line has been applied and the slope has repeatability test (see para. 7.2). The magnitude of this
been subtracted such that the straightness value for the error depends upon the perpendicular distance to the
axis may be obtained directly as the distance between axis measurement lines and the point under considera-
the two enveloping lines. tion (the functional point). This perpendicular distance
is called the Abbe offset (see section 4). To obtain the
7.4 Angular Error (Yaw) Motions, Linear Axes estimated error at any point, the value of the angular
error for that position, in radians, need only be multi-
7.4.1 General. Because of significant Abbe offsets
plied by the Abbe offset.
when machining, errors in tool point location can occur
due to angular errors in the machine linear slides. On a
7.4.3 Angular Error Measurement Methods. Angular
simple Group 1 machine, these errors consist of small
error is usually measured with electronic levels, a laser
rotations about the Y-axis and are called yaw errors.
angular interferometer, or an autocollimator. The data
This Standard requires that these angular error motions
can be recorded with the machine stationary or during
be measured for all linear machine axes. For machines
continuous motion. However, for measurement during
where rotations about other than the Y-axis are important,
continuous motion, the use of electronic levels should
measurements of these angular error motions should be
be avoided in favor of the angular interferometer or
made part of the original machine specification. The lines
autocollimator.
of measurement shall be those lines used for the posi-
tioning accuracy and repeatability test for linear axes as
specified in para. 7.2.2. A typical setup for making these 7.5 Positioning Accuracy and Repeatability,
measurements is shown in Fig. 7.4.1-1 for the cross-slide Rotary Axes
of a Group 1 machine. The measuring intervals, averaging 7.5.1 General. As with the measurement of lin-
times and number of points, and measurement sequence, ear positioning, complete verification of a rotary axis
including the exercise cycle, shall be those used for the designed for positioning can be a time-consuming task.
linear tests as specified in paras. 7.2.5 and 7.2.6. The data In paras. 7.5.2 through 7.5.8, a practical set of tests is
shall be reported as given in para. 7.2.7, except that the defined that represents a good compromise between the
names of the parameters shall be different. They shall be cost of testing and the cost of inaccuracy. The tests are
computed for each axis as follows: divided into two types. The first is for full-circle angular
(a) bidirectional systematic angular error, Eae positioning (paras. 7.5.2 through 7.5.7), and the second is
(b) bidirectional total angular error, Aae for interpolation errors on a much finer scale (para. 7.5.8).
(c) unidirectional systematic angular error, Eae↑ and Eae↓ These tests are analogous to the tests performed for lin-
(d) unidirectional total(s) angular error, Aae↑ and Aae↓ ear axes, and the same parameters are reported, except
(e) bidirectional repeatability of angular error, Rae in angular units. A similar exercise procedure should be
54
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.4.1-1 Typical Setup for Measuring the Angular Error Motion (Yaw) of the Cross-Slide on a Group 1 Machine
Tool
turret
Angle
retroreflector
Angle
interferometer
Laser
Work
spindle
Bending
mirror
followed, i.e., twice through the bidirectional test before shall be square with the rotary axis being tested.
acquiring data. The angular positioning test can be used Figure 7.5.2-2 illustrates the method for adjusting and
for any servoed rotary axis. The angular positioning verifying this alignment. An indicator is bracketed to
accuracy and repeatability are measured in a minimum the cross-slide and adjusted so that the stylus contacts
of nine positions. the outer edge of the double corner cube reflector.
The indicator is zeroed at this point. The cross-slide
7.5.2 Setup With an Indexing Table and an Interfero is moved so that the indicator is clear of the corner
meter. The preferred method for testing the positioning cube. The rotary table is lifted,9 and the rotary axis
accuracy of a rotary axis is to use a calibrated indexing being tested is rotated 180 deg, with the antirotation
table in combination with a laser angular interferometer. bar in place on the rotary table of the indexing table.
Using this combination provides continuous angular dis- The indexing table is then reclamped and the cross-
placements and automatic operation. A calibrated index slide returned to its original position. The procedure is
table is fixtured to the face of the rotary axis to be tested. repeated for a 90-deg and a 270-deg rotation. For each
The angular attachment to a commercial laser interferom- pair of rotations, the reading of the indicator should
eter is attached to the indexing table with a double retro- be within 50 μm (0.002 in.) to ensure an error less than
reflector mounted on the center. Figure 7.5.2-1 illustrates a 1 part in 1,000 of the measured angle.
typical setup for angular positioning measurement using NOTE: Such a procedure assumes that the side faces of the angular
a calibrated index table and a laser interferometer on the retroreflector assembly are parallel to the plane defined by the cen-
spindle, C-axis, of a lathe. Laser-based, angular interferom- terline of the two cube corners to within 5 μm (0.0002 in.).
eters can have large errors if not properly aligned and need
to be corrected for nonlinearity if the measurement angle 9 When measuring turrets, which also “rise” when indexed,
exceeds a few degrees. In such cases, the laser interferom- the combination height change of indexing table and turret
eter Supplier’s recommendations should be followed. may cause loss of laser signal. In this case, it is acceptable to
The axis of rotation of the calibrated indexing table index the turret and indexing table independently, provided the
optics can accommodate the angular increment. If this cannot be
shall be aligned parallel to the rotary axis being tested. accommodated, the autocollimator method (para. 7.5.3) or the
In addition, the centerline of the double retroreflector polygon method (para. 7.5.4) may be substituted.
55
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.5.2-1 Schematic for the Measurement of Angular Positioning Using an Indexing Table and a
Laser Interferometer
Spindle “Toe clamp”
Three support
points
C-
ax
is
Calibrated
indexing
Angular table
Angle
interferometer retroreflector
Laser
Cross-slide
Fig. 7.5.2-2 Setup for Adjusting the Alignment of an Indexing Table and a Laser Angle Interferometer
Antirotation
Sp for indexing
ind table
Calibrated le
indexing
table
Electronic
indicator
Angular
retroreflector
Cross-slide
56
ASME B5.57-2012
Before commencing measurements, the machine shall accuracy. Details on the polygon and autocollimator are
be run through an exercise cycle of two complete clock- given in section 9.
wise and counterclockwise cycles for each rotary axis, After checking for on-scale behavior of the system by
using the same program or manual time sequence that commanding the machine under computer control to
will be used during data acquisition. The testing proce- step the appropriate faces of the polygon to a condition
dure is to command the machine under computer con- of perpendicularity with respect to the autocollimator,
trol to step known angular intervals and either manually the axis should be exercised (two complete cycles, see
or under computer control rotate the calibrated index- para. 7.5.2) and a series of readings shall be taken in
ing table in the reverse direction to maintain a condi- an incremental fashion on the angular position of each
tion of perpendicularity between the retroreflectors and of the polygon faces.10 After exercise (see para. 7.5.2),
the interferometer. Data shall be taken and analyzed as measurements shall be taken and the data analyzed as
described in para. 7.5.7. described in para. 7.5.7.
7.5.3 Setup With an Indexing Table and an Auto 7.5.5 Setup With a Rotary Encoder. A third method
collimator. The procedure for testing angular posi- for checking angular positioning, and perhaps periodic
tioning using an indexing table and autocollimator is angular positioning, involves using a calibrated rotary
conceptually similar to that using an indexing table and encoder. If such a system is used, the instrument manufac-
an interferometer, as described in para. 7.5.2. As before, turer’s recommendations for system mounting and align-
a calibrated indexing table is fixtured to the face of the ment shall be followed, and the calibration of the device
rotary axis to be measured. Again, attention should be shall meet the minimum requirements as specified in sec-
paid to fixture-induced stresses and table alignment, tion 9. A typical setup is shown in Fig. 7.5.5-1. Following
which can alter the calibration accuracy. A flat mirror, exercise (see para. 7.5.1), measurements shall be taken
with its face parallel to the axis of rotation, is mounted and the data analyzed as described in para. 7.5.7.
to the surface of the indexing table facing a manual or
electronic autocollimator with the appropriate resolu- 7.5.6 Setup With a Level. On some machines it is
tion and accuracy (see section 9). possible to measure the angular positioning of the tur-
NOTE: The autocollimator has a smaller range than the laser inter- ret or other rotary axis using an indexing table and an
ferometer and is therefore not preferred, except in the case when appropriate level as a small-angle indicator. In this case,
the combination of turret “rise” and indexing table “rise” is exces- the level should be bracketed in a position equivalent
sive for a laser interferometer. to that shown for the laser angular retroreflector in
The procedure is to first exercise the machine by run- Fig. 7.5.2-2. If a level is used, the procedure outlined in
ning the calibration program twice (see para. 7.5.2) and para. 7.5.2 should be followed, including machine exer-
then to command the machine under computer control cise cycle. Measurements shall be made and the data
to step known angular intervals and either manually or analyzed as described in para. 7.5.7.
under computer control rotate the calibrated indexing
table in the reverse direction to maintain a condition 7.5.7 Angular Position Measurements and Data Analysis.
of near perpendicularity between the mirror surface Independent of the measurement instrumentation selected,
and the autocollimator. After exercise, measurements a series of bidirectional measurements shall be taken in this
shall be taken and the data analyzed as described in fashion over the full-circle angular position of the spin-
para. 7.5.7. dle, rotary axis, or turret at the predetermined number of
locations, repeating this procedure 5 times as described in
7.5.4 Setup With a Polygon. This test is performed para. 7.5.1. Five sets of bidirectional measurements shall be
using a calibrated optical polygon with a minimum taken. When using the laser interferometer, the readings at
of nine faces for a positioning axis, or with a number each location shall be averaged for 0.25 s, taking a minimum
of faces equal to the number of turret positions for an of 120 points. The angular deviation at each angular position
indexing axis. The polygon is appropriately fixtured to shall be measured 10 times, 5 times in one rotation direction
the face of the rotary axis to be measured. Special atten- and 5 times in the reverse rotation direction. The data shall
tion should be given to the attachment of the polygon to be plotted as shown in Fig. 7.2.8-1 and analyzed following
minimize any fixture-induced stresses that might distort
10 Particular attention must be paid to obtain the correct sign
the polygon mechanically and alter the calibration accu-
(1 or 2) for the autocollimator deviation when performing this
racy. Calibration shall be to at least the level required calibration. On a machine with a servoed rotary axis, this sign
for the application. A manual or electronic autocollima- may easily be obtained by jogging the machine in a direction of
tor should then be placed so that an image is obtained increasing angle and ensuring that the autocollimator reading
from one of the polygon faces. A sample setup is shown also indicates an increasing angle. On an indexing machine, hand
pressure on the rotary table, in the correct direction for a positive
in Fig. 7.5.4-1 for a servoed spindle axis. The autocol- angle, is usually sufficient to create an autocollimator reading for
limator shall also have been calibrated to the required obtaining the correct sign.
57
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.5.4-1 A Polygon Mounted to a Spindle Axis
Yaw
Pitch
“Wobble”
adjustment
Sp
ind
le
Polygon
Autocollimator
Cross-slide
the prescription for linear axes as given in para. 7.2.7, except angular encoders are often built in such a fashion that
that the units are in arcseconds or decimal degrees and only the error between integral angles can be extremely small,
nine target angular positions are required. Although only but the error in interpolation between these angles can
nine positions are required by this Standard, if the instru- greatly exceed the error at integral angles. The interval
mentation allows, taking a larger number of points is highly for periodic angular positioning measurement should
recommended. Note also that, in many cases, the periodic be chosen such that it encompasses at least the interpo-
angular positioning (see para. 7.5.8) can be assessed simul- lation interval on an angular axis using optical encod-
taneously with performing this test. ers, moiré gratings, or inductive scales. On rotary tables
The data obtained from the angular positioning tests whose angular position is measured by the position of a
shall be analyzed using the same procedures as are used worm gear drive, the interval shall correspond to at least
to analyze a linear axis (see para. 7.2.7). The parameters two rotations of the worm gear. Once the interval has
reported shall be the same except that the units shall be in been established, this Standard provides for three meth-
arcseconds or decimal degrees rather than millimeters. ods of measuring the periodic angle positioning. One
uses the angular attachment to a commercial laser inter-
7.5.8 Periodic Angular Positioning. After obtaining ferometer system, the second uses a mechanical setup
the large angular positioning parameters, it is necessary consisting of an electronic or mechanical indicator and a
on a servoed angular axis to check the angular interpo- micrometer, and the third uses a rotary encoder.
lation of the scale devices. Since many different types of
angular scales are used, it is difficult to define, in general, 7.5.8.1 Periodic Angular Positioning Using a Laser
an interval of small angle measurement that will be suf- Interferometer. The setup for this measurement is sim-
ficient for all applications. This test is necessary because ilar to that shown in Fig. 7.5.2-1, without the indexing
58
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.5.5-1 Typical Setup for Measuring the Angular Positioning Accuracy of a Rotary Axis Using
an Angular Encoder
“Wobble” adjustment
Small four-jaw chuck
Encoder
Spindle
C-axis
Antirotation
fixture
X-axis cross-slide
table. Here, the angular attachment to a commercial for nonlinearity if the measured angle exceeds a few
laser interferometer is used with the double retroreflec- degrees. The interferometer manufacturer’s recommen-
tor mounted in the position of the polygon of para. 7.5.4. dation shall be followed regarding the angle range of the
Note that this measurement may be made with the index- angle interferometer.
ing table in place as part of the angular positioning test if
the option in para. 7.5.2 is used. The servoed axis of the 7.5.8.2 Periodic Angular Positioning Using Displace
machine is then commanded to move in intervals one- ment Measurements. Periodic angular positioning can
twentieth of the period of the expected periodic error also be readily measured using displacement-measure-
cycle and the laser angle reading recorded. This proce- ment apparatus. A mechanical setup using a micrometer
dure shall be performed unidirectionally and repeated and an appropriate electronic or mechanical indicator
five times over the same range, without rezeroing the with a spherical stylus is shown in Fig. 7.5.8.2-1. A laser
laser interferometer, to ensure consistency and assess displacement-measuring interferometer, or other long-
instrumental and environmental drifts. The differences range displacement indicator, can also be substituted
between the laser angle reading and the incremental for the micrometer and indicator shown. The machine is
angle command shall be plotted as shown in Fig. 7.2.8-1 commanded to move in intervals of one-twentieth of the
for a linear axis (except the deviation units are in arc- interval determined, and at each point the electronic or
seconds). The periodic angular positioning is the range mechanical indicator is rezeroed using the micrometer.
of the average angular deviations as shown in the fig- The angular motion,  (in radians), is approximately the
ure. The analysis is analogous to that for unidirectional ratio of the measured displacement divided by the radius,
systematic deviation of positioning (see para. 7.2.7.2). as shown in the figure. With either the laser interferom-
Note that this procedure often reveals periodic compo- eter or the mechanical setup, this approximation is valid
nents of interpolation that can be used for analysis pur- only for small angles, and corrections shall be applied if
poses outside the scope of this specification. Note also the measured angle exceeds a few degrees.
that laser-based angular interferometers can have large Differences between the angle calculated from the
errors if not properly aligned and need to be corrected displacement measurement and the incremental angle
59
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.5.8.2-1 Typical Setup for Periodic Angular Error Measurement Using Mechanical Means
Large thimble micrometer

(0.2-�m resolution)
MR
Rotary axis
Electronic or mechanical
indicator mounted in
tool position
(0.2-�m resolution)
command shall be plotted as shown in Fig. 7.2.8-1 for tools. Modern machines can be equipped with multiple
a linear axis (except the units are angular), and the spindles, multiple turrets, and even rotating (“live”) tool-
periodic angular positioning shall be computed as in ing (tool spindles). It is impossible, in this Standard, to
para. 7.2.8. The angle may be calculated from the discover all conceivable configurations. For the purposes of
placement measurements by dividing the displace- this Standard, tests are defined for all work spindles and
ment measurement by the measurement radius, MR all part spindles that are supplied as part of a machine
(Fig. 7.7.4.1-2), and then computing the answer, which purchase. If spindles are to be excluded from these tests
is in radians, to either arcseconds or decimal degrees. because they are “auxiliary” spindles (see section 4), this
exclusion shall be agreed upon between the User and
7.5.8.3 Periodic Angular Positioning Using a Rotary the Supplier as part of the original machine specifica-
Encoder. The periodic angular positioning may also tion. Otherwise, such spindles shall be tested following
be measured using an appropriate rotary encoder. The the procedures described in paras. 7.6.1 through 7.6.4
setup shall be performed as described in para. 7.5.5 and and 7.7.
as shown in Fig. 7.5.5-1, and, in fact, the periodic angu-
lar positioning shall be assessed as part of the angular 7.6.1 General. The general problem of the specify-
positioning if such instrumentation is available. The ing and testing of axes of rotation is thoroughly treated
measurement intervals and the data reduction shall be in ANSI B89.3.4M. The details of that Standard will not
as described in para. 7.5.8. Note that the rotary encoder be repeated here. Rather, minimum tests are defined that
often has periodic errors of the same magnitude of the are necessary for ensuring spindle performance for the
rotary measurement device used in the table or spindle average User; others should refer to ANSI B89.3.4M for
to be tested. This should be thoroughly assessed before further background material. Measurements for both
using such a device for this measurement, and in no rotating sensitive direction and fixed sensitive direction
case should a rotary encoder be used that has the same (see section 4) are discussed.
interpolation interval as the encoder used on the table or For axes of rotation, the general term “error motion”
spindle to be tested. is used herein to refer to the relative displacement in the
sensitive direction between the tool (or gage head) and
the workpiece. Error motions in the sensitive direction
7.6 Spindle Axis of Rotation cause one-for-one form errors to be cut into the work-
Traditionally, a simple lathe or turning machine is piece and thus are most significant for machine tool
equipped with a spindle for fixturing a part (work spin- performance characterization. Error motions perpen-
dle), and a cross-slide, mounted on a saddle, for fixturing dicular to the sensitive direction are considered to be in
60
ASME B5.57-2012
the nonsensitive direction and are not evaluated in this the axis of rotation so as to minimize eccentricity. (It
Standard. For the purposes of this Standard, two types is assumed in the later text that the spindle analysis
of sensitive direction are recognized. The first, fixed sen- system is capable of removing small residual eccen-
sitive direction, occurs in turning, i.e., lathes, where the tricities.) The displacement indicator11 and test artifact
part is rotating in the spindle of interest and the tool is should meet the specifications outlined in section 9.
fixed. The second, called rotating sensitive direction, (In the case of ultrahigh precision machines, such as
occurs where the tool is rotating and the workpiece diamond turning machines, residual errors due to arti-
fixed. In the case of turning centers, this Standard is fact out-of-roundness should be removed. See ANSI
applicable only where such machines are equipped with B89.3.4M for this procedure.)
“live” tooling. This Standard provides procedures for
the evaluation of the ranges of some of the relevant spin- 7.6.3.1 Radial Error Motion, Fixed Sensitive
dle error parameters. The error parameters used in this Direction. The radial error motion shall be measured
Standard are limited to subsets of average and uncer- by positioning the displacement indicator in the radial
tainty in radial, axial, and tilt motions. direction, as shown in Fig. 7.6.3-1. Radial error motion
All the measurements in this section require rotating measurements shall be made at three spindle speeds
a test ball, mandrel, or other artifact in a fixture at high after the spindle has been allowed a warm-up period at
speeds. Users are therefore warned to use appropriate half the maximum revolutions per minute for a period
cautions to ensure operator safety. of 10 min. The spindle speeds chosen for this test shall
be approximately 10%, 50%, and 100% of the machine’s
7.6.2 Structural Motion. Before commencing with recommended maximum spindle speed. At each speed,
spindle error testing, the structural motions of the a polar plot of the spindle error motion shall be made for
machine shall be assessed with the spindle off. These a minimum of 20 revolutions. The machine User should
tests are similar in setup to those tests for relative vibra- also simply observe the output of the error-indicating sys-
tion given in para. 6.3.1. They are, however, conducted in tem while changing the spindle speed slowly throughout
conditions designed to point out relative motion between its total speed range. There may be speeds at which exces-
the spindle and the tool, which is caused by the machine sive error motion results due to structural motion. If such
itself rather than the environment or actual spindle rota- speeds exist, they should be reported and avoided when
tion. The tests shall be run two times for each axis machining. A typical plot for a single spindle speed is
(a) first with the machine’s power and auxiliary sys- shown in Fig. 4-2. This plot should be evaluated as follows.
tems on but with the machine drives off, that is, the First, the data shall be least-squares fit to a circle and any
emergency stop position residual eccentricity removed. Then the average (mean)
(b) second with the machine’s power and auxiliary values of the radial error motion and the asynchronous
systems, such as hydraulics, turned on, and with the error motion values shall be computed for a minimum
machine drives on, that is, with the machine in the feed- number of 16 angles uniformly distributed around the
hold mode circle. (Many commercial spindle error analyzers sample
The setup is shown in Fig. 6.2.1.4-1. The values obtained at a much larger number of angles; 16 is the minimum,
from these tests should be compared to those obtained in but a larger number is preferred.) The maximum range
the functional relative vibration tests (para. 6.3.1). If the of these averages shall be called the average radial error
vibration amplitude in either of these conditions exceeds motion (it is precisely analogous to the unidirectional sys-
25% of the specification zone for unidirectional repeat- tematic deviation; see para. 7.2.7.2). Similarly, the maxi-
ability and the User has met the Supplier’s guidelines mum value of the asynchronous motion shall be called
regarding vibration and environment, the Supplier shall the asynchronous error motion.
be responsible for rectifying the situation. Although the plot (see Fig. 4-2) looks the same for
fixed sensitive direction and rotating sensitive direction,
7.6.3 Spindle Tests, Fixed Sensitive Direction. the plot represents the measure of a different quantity.
Figure 7.6.3-1 shows some test setups suitable for the The rotating-sensitive-direction setup(s) should never
measurement of the spindle error motions for the case be used for fixed sensitive direction measurements.
of fixed sensitive direction, that is, for a work spindle.
(In the following tests, it is assumed that a signal, pro- 7.6.3.2 Axial Error Motion Test for Fixed Sensitive
portional to the angular orientation of the spindle, is Direction. The axial error motion shall be measured by
generated so that polar plots of the error motion as a
function of spindle angle can be generated either in a 11 At the time of the writing of this Standard, displacement
computer or on an oscilloscope.) A precision test ball, indicators that work on eddy current principles are, in general,
or other suitable artifact, is mounted in the machine unsuited for spindle measurements. This is because they sense
spindle, and the displacement indicator is mounted to changes in the metallurgy of the test artifact, as well as its geometry,
and can give incorrect results. For all spindle measurements, a
the tool post or to a fixture rigidly attached to the tool high-bandwidth indicator that senses only the geometry of the
post. The ball or artifact should be centered around artifact shall be used.
61
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.6.3-1 Test Setups for Measuring Spindle Error Motions in the Case of Fixed Sensitive Direction
Radial Radial
sensor 1 sensor 2
Axial
sensor
Cross-slide
(a)
Radial Radial
sensor 1 sensor 2
Axial
sensor
Cross-slide
(b)
62
ASME B5.57-2012
positioning the displacement indicator in the axial direc- same and their outputs differenced before input into a
tion, as shown in Fig. 7.6.3-1. Axial error motion shall be spindle analyzer, or their gains calibrated and the subtrac-
measured following the same procedure, including the tion performed in software. In either event, the spindle
warm-up cycle, and at the same spindle speeds as those shall be run for at least 20 revolutions at the three spin-
specified for radial error motion. The analysis of the dle speeds selected, as in para. 7.6.3.1, and the differences
error motion polar plot for axial error motion is also con- between the two readings (gage 1 and gage 2) plotted on
ceptually identical to that for radial error motion, except a polar plot. The asynchronous tilt error motion value
that fundamental error motion should not be removed shall be the maximum range from the total error motion
analytically. The asynchronous axial motion shall be the polar plot obtained from the difference between the two
maximum value of the range at any angle on the error gage readings, measured along a radial line through the
motion polar plot measured on a radial line through the polar chart center and scaled by the length, Ld, between
polar chart center. The average axial error motion shall the two gages. That is
be the range of the average error motion values, defined
with respect to the least-squares center. ( ) 5 [r2( ) 2 r1( )]/Ld
where
7.6.3.3 Tilt Error Motion, Fixed Sensitive Direction. Ld 5 distance between the centers of the two
Traditionally, tilt error motion in the fixed sensitive direc- gages
tion has been measured by simultaneously sensing error r1( ) 5 radial motion at gage 1
motions at two spatially separated points, as is shown r2( ) 5 radial motion at gage 2
in Fig. 7.6.3-1. For the purposes of this Standard, the fol-  ( ) 5 tilt motion, rad
lowing alternative is offered. First, the test ball or other  5 angular orientation of the spindle (angle on
artifact and capacitance gage are fixtured as described in polar chart)
para. 6.2.1 and shown in Fig. 7.6.3-1, illustration (a), and The average tilt error motion shall be the difference
the average radial error motion and the asynchronous between the maximum and the minimum average error
radial error motion measured. Next, the ball or other motion value, irrespective of radial direction, and defined
artifact and indicator are refixtured a distance of at least with respect to the least-squares center, as in the equa-
50 mm (approximately 2 in.) from the previous position tion above. For practicality, the computation of the aver-
and a second set of measurements of these parameters ages and the asynchronous error motions at 16 positions
performed. The difference in the radial error/motion shall be sufficient. For the purposes of this Standard,
measurements divided by the distance between them the maximum value of the asynchronous motion at the
[nominally 50 mm (approximately 2 in.)] is the average tilt 16 positions shall be reported as the asynchronous tilt
motion error. The difference in the asynchronous radial error motion. For the most accurate estimate, the average
error motion divided by the length is the asynchronous tilt motion shall be removed from the data and the maxi-
tilt motion error, in radians. The measurement of radial mum range on the resulting plot used for the asynchro-
error motion may be used for the first measurement if the nous motion analysis procedure.
second measurement is taken shortly thereafter.
Accurate measurement of the tilt error motion requires 7.6.4 Spindle Tests, Rotating Sensitive Direction.
simultaneous sensing of the radial error motion at two This test is used only on machines that have auxiliary
spatially separated points, as shown in Fig. 7.6.3-1, illus- spindles for milling, i.e., “live tooling.” Figure 7.6.4-1
tration (b), using radial sensors 1 and 2. A commercial shows a test setup for the measurement of the spindle
spindle error analyzer can be used for this purpose, or error motions for the case of rotating sensitive direc-
a test fixture with two balls with their centers spaced tion. In this setup, a precision test ball or other artifact
some distance apart [50 mm (approximately 2 in.) is ade- is mounted in the machine tool “live” spindle, which is
quate], or a precision test mandrel or other artifact may be the normal location for a tool. The precision test ball or
attached to the spindle and aligned with high precision artifact can be the ball or artifact used previously for the
to the axis of spindle rotation, to minimize eccentricity. ETVE test, hysteresis test, and the like, and shall be of a
As stated previously, the balls (or mandrel, or any master precision greater than that desired for the spindle error
in the commercial system) shall have a roundness such motion test. (Various methods exist for removing the
that any errors in their form are less than the value of imprecision of the test ball or artifact from the spindle
error expected in the machine (see section 9). Otherwise, error motion measurement. These techniques should
procedures taken from ANSI B89.3.4M should be used to be used in ultraprecision equipment and are outlined
extract artifact out-of-roundness from the measurement. in ANSI B89.3.4M. For the “live tooling” on most turn-
In either case, the analysis below assumes that the two ing centers, however, a test ball or artifact of sufficient
capacitance gages are set upon the equators of the balls or accuracy that imperfections in form may be neglected is
along the test mandrel at a distance, Ld, from one another. readily procured.) Displacement indicators are generally
The two displacement indicators should be adjusted such mounted to the work spindle of the machine in orthogo-
that their sensitivity (output voltage/displacement) is the nal orientations. The displacement indicators should be
63
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.6.4-1 Test Setup for Measuring Spindle Error Motions in the Case of Rotating Sensitive Direction
Artifact (dual spheres) Adjusting

mechanism
Sensor 5 Sensor 2
Sensor 3
Sensor 4 Sensor 1
Tool
spindle
Angle plate in work spindle
of the no ncontacting type, such as capacitance, with a 7.6.4.1 Radial Error Motion, Rotating Sensitive
bandwidth sufficient to cover the rpm range specified. Direction. The radial error motion shall be measured
The bandwidth required depends upon the number of by computing and displaying the error motion polar
undulations per revolution to be resolved and the rpm plot according to the following equation:
range of the spindle. For most turning centers with “live
r( ) 5 r01 DX( ) cos  1 DY( ) sin 
tooling,” a bandwidth of 10 kHz is acceptable for speeds
upto 6 000 rpm, and scaling of this value can be used where
for other spindle speeds. If capacitance gages were used r0 5 the value of the radius set by the alignment
for the ETVE and other tests and they have appropriate of the test ball or artifact
bandwidth, they can also be used for the spindle analy- DX( ) 5 output of the gage oriented with the X-axis
sis tests. Figure 7.6.4-1 shows one type of commercial DY( ) 5 output of the gage oriented with the Y-axis
error analyzer, but other models that meet similar speci-  5 angle of rotation of the spindle
fications are perfectly suitable. Radial error motion measurements shall be at three
The ball or artifact should be centered around the axis spindle speeds after the spindle has been allowed a
of tool rotation so as to minimize eccentricity, and a sig- warm-up period at half the maximum revolutions per
nal proportional to the spindle rotation angle, generated minute for a period of 10 min. The spindle speeds chosen
by some subsidiary means or the ball or artifact, should for this test shall be 10%, 50%, and 100% of the machine’s
be mounted slightly eccentric and this eccentricity used recommended maximum spindle speed. At each speed, a
to generate the signals necessary for a polar plot. The polar plot of the spindle error motion shall be made for
setup for this latter case is shown in Fig. 7.6.4-2, and a minimum of 20 revolutions.12 A typical plot for a single
both cases are described in detail in ANSI B89.3.4M. A
third method, using a commercially available spindle 12For maximum accuracy, a higher number of revolutions may be
analyzer, is also acceptable. required for ball and roller-bearing spindles.
64
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.6.4-2 Spindle Test Setup With an Eccentric Ball
Wobble plate
Vertical sensor
Master ball C
Y X
offset distance r 0 in
direction of tool
Horizontal
sensor
spindle speed is shown in Fig. 4-2. The machine User should and sophisticated data analysis are not required. Here, the
also simply observe the output of the error-indicating sys- maximum range of the displacement over approximately
tem while changing the spindle speed slowly through- 20 revolutions of the spindle shall be used as a measure-
out its total speed range. Speeds may be observed where ment of axial error motion. The measurements can be
excessive error motion results due to structural resonances. done most simply with a commercially available spindle
If such speeds exist, they should be avoided when machin- analyzer, but an oscilloscope can also be used. This test is
ing. For the purposes of this Standard, only two error sometimes not required, since for many applications, such
motion values shall be computed from the error motion as boring, axial motion is in the nonsensitive direction. For
plot. The asynchronous radial error motion value (per certain other applications, such as contour milling and fly
spindle) shall be the maximum range in the radial error cutting, however, it can contribute significantly to machin-
motion as computed from the total error motion polar plot ing error and degradation of surface finish. For these appli-
(before averaging), measured along a radial line through cations, these tests should be performed.
the least-squares center, as shown in Fig. 4-2. Next, the
average (synchronous) radial error motion polar plot shall 7.6.4.3 Tilt Error Motion, Rotating Sensitive Direction.
be computed by averaging the radial error motion polar In the past, tilt motion has not been commonly measured
plot results for the total number of revolutions. A typical for axes of rotation with a rotating sensitive direction.
average (synchronous) error motion polar plot is shown as To measure this tilt motion, either a suitably equipped
the dark line in Fig. 4-2. The average (synchronous) radial commercial spindle error analysis system or four capaci-
error motion, for the purpose of this Standard, shall be the tance sensors and electronics for differencing the data in
maximum value of the average (mean) radial error motion a setup similar to that shown in Fig. 7.6.4-1 shall be used.
minus the minimum value of the average (mean) radial In the first case, the spindle error analyzer shall be set
error motion, as measured with respect to the least-squares up according to the Supplier’s recommendations and
center of the polar plot. the tilt motion computed in the software. In the second
case, data shall be taken and analyzed as in para. 7.6.3.3
7.6.4.2 Axial Error Motion Test for Rotating Sensitive or para. 7.6.3.4, except that the differences between the
Direction. The axial error motion shall be measured by outputs of sensors 1 and 4 and sensors 2 and 5 shall be
positioning the displacement indicator (such as a capaci- used as the DX and DY in the equation and r0 shall be
tance gage) in the axial direction, as shown in Fig. 7.6.3-1, set equal to zero (note that sensor 3 is not required).
or by using a commercial spindle analyzer system. For the The average tilt motion, in radians, shall be obtained by
measurement of axial motion with a rotating sensitive direc- dividing the average differences by the distance between
tion, synchronization to the spindle angular orientation the sensors in the test setup. The maximum value shall
65
ASME B5.57-2012
be reported. The maximum value of the differences in sitivity to those used in the ETVE and spindle error tests
the asynchronous error motions (total range on the polar and be of the noncontacting type (see section 9). If desired,
plot), divided by the distance between the sensors, shall a test mandrel and a sensor-mounting bracket, made of a
be reported as the asynchronous tilt motion value. low-expansion alloy material, may be substituted for the
test balls and fixturing used previously.14 In either event,
7.7 Machine Thermal Tests the mandrel or balls shall be adjusted to minimize radial
runout and the sensors set to read positive for deflec-
7.7.1 General. For the thermal tests described in this
tions of the balls or mandrels toward them. The spindle
section, the machine shall be powered up with auxiliary
shall then be turned on to 75% of maximum speed. Data
services operating and axis in the feed-hold position, with
from the five sensors shall be taken at intervals of 5 min
no spindle rotation, for a period sufficient to stabilize the
max. During the first 30 min of the test, the range of the
effects of internal sources. The machine and measuring
data at all sensor locations shall be noted. The test shall
instrument shall be protected from drafts and external
proceed until the maximum change in any sensor read-
radiation such as that from overhead heaters or sunlight.
ing over any 30-min period, at all of the sensor locations,
If the machine is equipped with an enclosure and the
has reduced to 15% of the maximum of that sensor change
machine will be operated with this enclosure closed, then
over the first 30 min of the test, or for a maximum of 4 h,
these thermal tests shall be done in this configuration.
whichever is smaller. The data shall be plotted as shown
All tests shall be carried out with the machine in the
in Fig. 7.7.2.1-1. Angular drifts of the axis average line are
unloaded condition. Where the machine involves rotating
plotted in Fig. 7.7.2.1-2. The data recorded at each interval
both the workpiece and the tool on separate spindles, the
should be an average of measured displacements over a
tests shall be carried out for each spindle. In all cases, the
5-s period. If a digital measurement system is used, a min-
tests shall be between a nominal workpiece location and
imum of four samples per revolution for 20 revolutions, at
a nominal tool location, or vice versa. If any compensa-
any time during the 5-min period, shall be sufficient. The
tion capability or facilities for minimizing thermal effects,
zero for this figure shall be established by reading the sen-
such as air or oil showers, are available on the machine
sors immediately after spindle rotation has commenced.
tool, they shall be used during the tests and their exist-
To facilitate comparison between machines, this Standard
ence recorded.
requires reporting the offsets of the spindle axis average
All measuring instruments described in paras. 7.7.2
line, as close as possible to the chuck, part-holding device,
through 7.7.4 shall conform to instrumentation and test
or, in the case of tool spindles, the tool-holding device (see
equipment requirements given in section 9 and also be
para. 7.1.3). First, compute the thermal tilts of the spindle
“cap” tested according to the procedures outlined in
axis average line (refer to Fig. 7.6.4-1 for gage designa-
Nonmandatory Appendix J. The results of the cap test
tions). The tilts are
on the instrument should be no greater than one-tenth of
the expected test deviation, or the instrument should be D5 2 D2
modified or changed. Dx , z 5
Ld
7.7.2 Spindle Thermal Stability Test. Movements of and

spindles caused by self-induced temperature changes D4 2 D1
yield significant errors in machining for both rotating Dy , z 5
Ld
and fixed sensitive direction. Before proceeding with
this test, the machine should be in a quiescent state as where subscripts x, y, and z designate the plane of tilt,
described in para. 7.7.1, after a soak-out period of at and
least 12 h. D1 5 reading of gage 1
D2 5 reading of gage 2
7.7.2.1 Spindle Warm-Up Test. This test should D4 5 reading of gage 4
be performed for all lathe, tool, and work spindles. For D5 5 reading of gage 5
this test, a test fixture, such as that used for the spindle Dx, z 5 tilt about the x direction
error analysis tests (paras. 7.6.3 and 7.6.4), is fixtured in Dy, z 5 tilt about the y direction
the machine spindle and set to read against a five-sen-
sor “nest” as shown in Fig. 7.6.4-1 for a tool spindle and Ld 5 distance between gages 2 and 5 or 1 and 4
Fig. 7.6.3-1 for a work spindle. The sensor nest should be Note that the tilt angles are in radians, defined with
fixtured to the tool post or to the cross-slide in the loca- respect to the gages and not to the machine’s axes.
tion of the tool post when measuring work spindles.13 The Positive tilts indicate tilting toward the gage pair used in
sensor nest should be fixtured to the work spindle when the computation.
testing a tool spindle. The sensors should be of similar sen- 14 If desired, the fixturing for the gage nest and for the test ball may
also be made of low-expansion material. The concept here is, in so
13For work spindles, two sensors in a five-sensor nest will be in the far as possible, to check the thermal stability of the spindle and not
nonsensitive direction and need not be used. the thermal stability of the test fixture(s).
66
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.7.2.1-1 Sensor Data From a Typical Spindle Thermal Warm-Up Test
25 40
Sensor 4
Spindle housing 35
temperature Sensor 1
20
30
15
Ambient temperature 25
Indicator reading, �m
Temperature, °C
Sensor 3
10 20
15
10
Sensor 2
0
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191 201 211221 231 241
5
Sensor 5
–5 0
Time, min
To determine the offset drifts, measure the distance, Like the angles, the offsets are positive in the direction
L1,2, between the centerlines of sensor 1 or sensor 2 and of the gages and not necessarily in machine coordi-
the face of the chuck, other part-holding device, or tool- nates. For this test, the numbers reported shall be a
holding device. The offsets of the axis average line at the range of the average in precise analogy to the system-
face of the chuck, etc., are given by atic deviations of positioning discussed in para. 7.2.
Dx 5 D2 2 L1,2 3 Dx,z As with the ETVE test, this test should be performed
in a configuration suggested by the Supplier; that is,
Dy 5 D1 2 L1,2 3 Dy,z if the machine has spindle thermal control, this facil-
Dz 5 D 3 ity should be on. If thermal control involves fluids
where on external spindle components, appropriate instru-
D3 5 the reading of gage 3 ments should be used.15
Dx 5 the X offset in the selected plane
Dy 5 the Y offset in the selected plane 15When tests are performed using cutting lubricant, capacitance
Dz 5 the Z offset sensors should not be used.
67
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.7.2.1-2 Tilts of the Axis Average Line, Spindle Warm-Up Test
80 38
60 36
Tilt Y
40 34
Temperature, °C
Spindle housing
20 32
temperature
Tilt, �rad
0 30
–20 28
Tilt X
–40 26
–60 24
Air temperature
–80 22
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Time, min
7.7.2.2 Transient Shutoff Test. The behavior 7.7.3.1 Test Procedure. A displacement-measuring
of a spindle during warm-up is often dramatically instrument, usually a laser interferometer, shall be set so
different than the behavior of a spindle during cool- as to measure the distance traversed by the axis under
down. This can lead to significant problems when test (corresponding to the relative motion between
using machines in intermittent duty cycles. It is there- the nominal tool and the nominal workpiece of the
fore recommended that a transient shutoff thermal machine) between two target positions. Note that prior
stability be measured. This is performed with either to the test, the laser interferometer should be “cap”
of the two setups, fixed sensitive direction or rotating tested as specified in Nonmandatory Appendix J. An
sensitive direction, and for each of the machine work example of a typical test setup is shown in Fig. 7.2.3-1.
or tool spindles. For the purpose of this Standard, this Note that the setup is the same as that used for the posi-
test should last for the length of time required for the tioning accuracy and repeatability test. The two target
preceding test on that spindle (see para. 7.7.2.1) or 4 h, positions should be selected close to the end points of
whichever is shorter. For either rotating or fixed sensi- travel, where applicable. Two additional reversal posi-
tive direction, this test is performed in the same way. tions should be selected outside this test range to allow
At the end of the warm-up test, the spindle is turned for bidirectional measurement. Measuring instrumen-
off and the sensors read for a period equal to that of tation shall be located so as to allow for minimum
the warm-up test. The data are analyzed as described opening in the machine enclosure (if supplied) during
in para. 7.7.2.1. The transient shutoff thermal stability the measurements.
is defined as the total range of the linear (and angular) Starting from one of the reversal positions, the machine
readings for a period of 1 h after spindle shut-down. shall be programmed to move the axis to target position 1,
Again, the data are taken at intervals of 5 min max., where it shall remain at rest long enough for the actual posi-
with each data point being an average of all the read- tion reached to be measured and recorded. The axis shall
ings obtained for a minimum of 5 s within the 5-min then move in the same direction to target position 2, where
interval. For a more detailed discussion of the sam- the second reading shall be taken. The motion should then
pling required, see para. 7.7.2.1. continue to reach the second reversal point where the direc-
tion will be reversed. The readings at target positions 2 and
7.7.3 Thermal Distortion Caused by Moving Linear 1 shall then be measured and recorded during this motion
Axes. This test is carried out to identify the effects of in the reverse direction. A diagram showing this procedure
internal heat generated by the machine positioning system is given in Fig. 7.7.3.1-1. The programmed traverse rate shall
(linear axes only) on the machine structure observed as dis- be 0.5 times the rapid traverse rate, and the dwell time shall
placements between a nominal workpiece and a nominal be the settling time used for the positioning accuracy and
tool. The test indicates the amount of drift in the machine repeatability tests (see para. 7.2). Different dwell times and
axis “home” position as well as the amount of the elonga- traverse rates produce different heat inputs; therefore, they
tion of machine scales during the warm-up period. cause different axis drifts. If other dwell times and traverse
68
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.7.3.1-1 Path for Measuring Thermal Distortion Caused by Moving Linear Axes
Reversal Reversal
Point 1 Point 2
point 1 point 2
X X
X X
START Read 1 Read 2
(forward) (forward)
X X
Read 1 Read 2
(reverse) (reverse)
X
Read 1
(forward)
rates are to be specified, they shall be the subject of prior for positioning feedback, environmental compensation
agreement between the User and the Supplier. for air temperature, pressure, and humidity should be
The test sequence described above shall then be used, if available as part of the normal machine configu-
repeated, recording data bidirectionally at the two target ration as supplied by the Supplier.
positions. During the first 30 min of the test, the range
of the data for each axis shall be noted. The test shall 7.7.3.2 Interpretation of Results. At the end of
proceed until the maximum change in any axis reading the test period, the error at the two target positions for
over any 30-min period at both endpoints has reduced to each direction shall be calculated at 10-min intervals.
15% of the maximum of either endpoint change over the This shall be done by subtracting the first average posi-
first 30 min of the test, or for a maximum of 4 h, which- tion reading from all subsequent readings. The data sets
ever is smaller. Before commencing the test on another shall be plotted in the form of position error versus time
axis, sufficient time should be allocated to allow for the graphs, an example of which is shown in Fig. 7.7.3.2-1.
machine to cool down. The ambient temperature shall With reference to this figure, error e(x1↑) is the total range
be continuously monitored during these tests.16 Note of thermal drift of target position 1 in the X direction for
that on a machine of normal size, a very large number the forward direction, and error e(x2↑) is the total range
of data will be produced by this test, which may last as of thermal drift of target position 2 in the X direction for
long as 4 h. It is recommended that the average value the forward direction. The drifts in the reverse direction
over 10-min intervals be retained, rather than the full will be noted similarly, using the down arrow (↓).
data set. The average position values should then be The dwell (settling) times, traverse rates, setup posi-
used to compute the thermal drift. Note that this test tions, position of the air temperature sensor, type of test
does not fully assess the machine’s thermal behavior but equipment, and target positions shall be recorded with
rather indicates thermal problems and can be effective the test results.
for machine comparison.
If the measuring instrument incorporates compensa- 7.7.4 Composite Thermal Error. This test is carried
tion for environmental factors, such as air temperature out to identify the combined effects of the internal heat
and pressure, then these shall be used. If the measuring generated by the main spindle(s) and the positioning
instrument incorporates facilities by which the measured systems on the relative position between the work-
data can be modified for the part temperature, then the piece and the tool. Note that the results of this test can-
part sensor shall not be used. For machines using lasers not be derived from the results of the two types of tests
16
described in paras. 7.7.2 and 7.7.3.
It is useful to measure the drift during the cool-down period.
To do this, at the end of the test period, the machine should be at
the target position that indicated the largest drift and this position 7.7.4.1 Test Procedure. Figure 7.6.3-1 shows a
periodically recorded as the machine cools down. typical measurement setup for a lathe or a turning center
69
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.7.3.2-1 Position Error Versus Time for a Typical Test for Thermal Distortion Caused by a
Moving Linear Axis
Target 2
18
e(X2 )
Target 2
16
14
12
Positioning error, �m
10
Target 1
2 e(X1 )
Target 1
0
10 50 100 150 200 250
Time, min
with a single work spindle and a single tool position or If the machine has more than one spindle or turret,
turret. Three displacement indicators shall be rigidly the test(s) should be performed as follows. On multi-
mounted to the tool-holding zone of the machine, so as ple-turret, single-spindle machines, the sensor should
to be able to monitor be placed in the most commonly used turret and the
(a) the relative displacements occurring between the artifact in the spindle. Where possible, all axes should
structure that holds the tool and the structure that holds be exercised. On machines with two spindles and one
the workpiece along the two orthogonal axes parallel to turret, use one spindle with the gage and sensor nest
the axes of travel of the machine and the turret, but exercise both spindles and the tur-
(b) tilt or rotation around one axis17 normal to the ret. On machines with two spindles and two or three
spindle axis turrets, one commonly used spindle and one com-
monly used turret should be selected, but all spindles
and all turrets should be exercised. For machines with
17 If desired, this test may also be performed on a turning center
a milling spindle head, the test should be performed
with “live tooling” for each of the tool spindles. In that case, the
test for each spindle should be specified in equivalent detail. Also, twice: first with the sensor nest in a turret, measuring
the five-gage nest (Fig. 7.6.4-1) may be used. with respect to a work spindle; and second with the
70
ASME B5.57-2012
sensor nest in a work spindle, reading with respect to spindle-running period] shall be recorded along with the
the milling spindle. Wherever possible, all the other distance, Lcte, between the two X displacement indicators
axes and spindles should be exercised during the test. and the total time of the test, t. These values, as shown in
If desired, the User may also select other combinations Table 7.7.4.3-1, shall be presented with the deflection-ver-
if these combinations are made part of the specification sus-time graphs. The test procedure, traverse rate, dwell
and described in equivalent detail. time, sequence of axes movements, location of target posi-
The temperature of the machine structure, as close tions, and the location of the measurement setup, includ-
as possible to the front spindle-bearing housing, along ing the locations of the temperature sensors, should also be
with the ambient temperature, shall be continuously reported with the results of the tests.
monitored. Although these temperatures do not exactly Thermal drift for each direction shall be reported as the
correlate to the measured displacements, they are indica- range of displacements for the indicator reading in the
tions of the thermal changes on the machine structure. respective direction. For X and Y directions, the greater
The spindle(s) shall be run continuously at half the max- range of either displacement indicator shall be the value
imum speed throughout the test. The axes shall be moved reported. Thermal tilts shall be calculated as the range
from the test position to the far end of travel and immedi- of tilts about X and Y directions. The thermal tilt at any
ately returned to the test position, where they should dwell time is the difference in the two indicated readings in
for a sufficient time for the next reading to be recorded. the same direction divided by the separation distance.
Axis movements shall be at half the rapid traverse rate
except for the final 5-mm (approximately 0.2 in.) approach 7.8 Critical Alignments
to the test position, which should be carried out at a low
7.8.1 General. In a lathe or turning center, some
feed rate, and the dwell time shall be the settling time as
alignments reflect themselves one-to-one into errors in
specified in the positioning accuracy and repeatability test
the finished part. For a simple two-axis machine, these
(see para. 7.2).
alignments are the parallelism of the in-feed (Z slide)
NOTE: The sequence of axis and other movements, including with the spindle axis of rotation and the perpendicularity
turret indexing, should be such as to avoid collisions with the of the cross-slide (X-axis) to the spindle axis. These critical
measuring equipment and to keep the direction of approach to alignment parameters shall be measured using metrology
the test position constant. Other test conditions, including vari- instrumentation or by cutting test parts and performing
able spindle speed spectra, may be specified by prior agreement part-trace tests for all X–Z axis pairs. The procedure for
between the User and the Supplier. The dwell time, spindle speed performing a part-trace test is outlined in Nonmandatory
spectrum, traverse rate, sequence of axis movements, and travel Appendix K. If the machine is equipped with on-machine
ranges change heat input and therefore can cause different drift probing, the probing system could possibly be used
rates. to perform these tests. In such cases, the Supplier shall
The test shall proceed in this manner until the change provide appropriate brackets and electrical connections.
in the position over any 30-min period, at all the mea Both procedures are allowed in this Standard. Note, how-
surement locations, has reduced to less than 15% of the ever, that the measurements performed by cutting test
maximum position change over the first 30 min of the parts contain information regarding the thermal varia-
test, with a maximum test time of 4 h. The results should tions of the machine due to spindle growth and thus will
be plotted in graphs of deflection and temperature ver- yield different results than the measurements performed
sus time, as shown in the example given in Fig. 7.7.4.1-1. using metrology instruments. The choice of test(s), either
Note that, as in the preceding test, a large number of measurement with a straightedge or test part measure-
data points may be generated by this test. Again, only ment, or both, shall be clearly stated as part of the original
the average value over a reasonable period of time, for machine specification.18
example, 5 min to 10 min, should be retained for the NOTE: Those Users desiring to assign an algebraic sign to square-
purposes of analysis. ness and parallelism measurements should follow the conventions
given in Nonmandatory Appendix N. Most of the figures in the
7.7.4.2 Interpretation of Results. The effect of following sections show negative squareness errors.
warming up the machine structure on the ability of the
machine to maintain the position of the tool relative to 18 In the absence of specifications to the contrary, the general
the workpiece can be assessed from the deflection-ver- parameters of machine geometry are presumed to apply when the
sus-time graphs. The results are influenced by the posi- machine is “cold.” The reason for this rule is that the “hot” conditions
are too variable to have any meaning. If the squareness of X to C
tional repeatability of the machine axis. is measured when the machine is “cold” using the straightedge
or log reversal, and then measured “hot” using the part-trace past
7.7.4.3 Presentation of Results. The range of dis- center, the thermal errors can be identified. The machine User is,
placements along each machine axis within the first 30 min of course, concerned with the “bottom line” accuracy. If the User
is aware of the sources of each error, special procedures can often
[c(X1,30), c(X2,30), c(Z,30)] and during the total test period be developed to improve the bottom-line accuracy. These are often
[c(X1,t), c(X2,t), c(Z,t), where t is the time at the end of the called “procedural solutions.”
71
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.7.4.1-1 Typical Results From a Composite Thermal Error Test
20 35
c(X1,t)
18
re
ratu
te mpe 30
sing
le hou
16 Spind
X1 data
c(X2,t)
14
25
Ambient temperature
12
X2 data
Displacement, �m
20
Temperature, C
10
8
15
Z data
6
c(Z,30) c(Z,t)
10
4
c(X1,30)
c(X2,30)
2
5
0
10
19
28
37
46
55
64
73
82
91
100
109
118
127
136
145
154
163
172
181
190
199
208
217
226
235
244
1
–2 0
Time, min
Table 7.7.4.3-1 Typical Presentation of Results From Composite Thermal Error Tests
Reported Data X1 X2 Y1 [Note (1)] Y2 [Note (1)] Z
After 30 min c(X1,30) c(X2,30) N/A N/A c(Z,30)

After end of spindle c(X1,t) c(X2,t) N/A N/A c(Z,t)
running period, t
Time, t
Distance, Lcte
NOTE:
(1) Values for Y1 and Y2 are obtained only when the optional five-gage nest is used. They are in the nonsensitive direction for work spindles on
lathes.
72
ASME B5.57-2012
7.8.2 Squareness of the Cross-Slide (X-Axis) With the an appropriate tool.21 Since this test is performed after
Work Spindle Axis (Often a C-Axis)19 the spindle has been on the machine, the Supplier shall
recommend an appropriate warm-up cycle, machining
7.8.2.1 Measurement Using a Mechanical Straight time, and soak-out time. The size of the cylinder depends
edge. A typical setup for measuring the squareness on the size of the machine. The diameter, Dc, should be
of the cross-slide to the spindle axis using a mechani- somewhat less than the swing of the lathe but need not
cal straightedge and a displacement indicator (or an be greater than 300 mm (approximately 12 in.) for small
optical straightedge substituting for a mechanical machines. The cylinder may also be used, if the User
straightedge and a plane mirror interferometer as the selects, to measure the Z-axis parallelism; thus, its length,
indicator) is shown in Fig. 7.8.2.1-1, which shows a hor- Lc, should be at least 300 mm (approximately 12 in.) or the
izontal spindle turning center. (A straightedge can be maximum Z capacity of the lathe, whichever is smaller.
manufactured rather than purchased; see para. 7.8.2.2.) Figure 7.8.2.2-1 shows that the test cylinder is drilled
With the spindle at position  5 0, the straightedge is and countersunk at six locations but is only mounted at
mounted so as to straddle the rotary axis center and three. Six holes are necessary only if the cylinder will be
aligned using the indicator with the machine axis. The measured using straightedge reversal methods (see ANSI
change in separation between the gaging surface of the B5.54). The part should be “roughed” with one tool and
straightedge and the appropriate machine axis, which then finished with a light cut using a new, sharp tool. After
in Fig. 7.8.2.1-2 is the X-axis, is measured either opti- cutting, the spindle is stopped and the machine allowed
cally or mechanically. A least-squares fit to the data to soak out. A displacement indicator is then bracketed on
yields a line whose slope is equal to the angle, ANGF, the X slide in the tool position and indicated against the
between the X-axis and the straightedge gaging sur- part over the range of X travel used to machine the face.
face. Next, the rotary axis is rotated to  5 180 deg and The data obtained from this are shown in Fig. 7.8.2.2-3,
a similar measurement performed yielding an angle, as the “before center” data. (Ideally, the indicator should
ANGR. Note that the straightedge must be of the right always read zero when traversed along the cutting path,
length and properly clamped for this 180-deg reversal but thermal changes may cause the machine spindle
to be possible without damaging the machine or the axis to move.) Next, the indicator is rebracketed to the
straightedge, or both. The angles involved are shown tool post, with the bracket that moves it the radius of the
in Fig. 7.8.2.1-2. In Fig. 7.8.2.1-2, an arbitrary “for- part in the X direction. This is illustrated in Fig. 7.8.2.2-2.
ward direction” with the angular axis at zero angle is This allows the indicator to travel beyond center. The
depicted and the “reverse direction” with the angular data obtained from this measurement are shown in Fig.
axis rotated 180 deg. The angle F in the figure is the 7.8.2.2-3 as the “after center” data. The bisector of these
squareness error between the straightedge and the two angles is the machine out-of-squareness, as is clearly
spindle axis resulting from initial alignment, while the indicated in Fig. 7.8.2.2-3. Calculations are equivalent to
angle W is the desired squareness error. The measured those given in para. 7.8.2.1.
angles and the respective orientations are denoted by NOTES:
ANGF and ANGR. The out-of-squareness is the bisector (1) One-half the change in direction (angle) that is observed by the
of these two angles, algebraically W 5 ½ 3 (ANGF 1 indicator as it travels across center is the “effective” nonsquare-
ANGR). If the straightedge is supplied with a correc- ness of the X-axis (including spindle growth) at one particular
tion table, corrections should be made prior to the crea- interval of the spindle growth curve. The “effective” nonsquare-
tion of the graph shown in Fig. 7.8.2.1-3.20 In the cases ness will depend on which direction the facing cut is made as well
of highest accuracy, the straightedge should be precali- as the interval on the spindle growth curve. This test can be used
brated using straightedge reversal (see ANSI B5.54 for as an educational experiment to reveal the sensitivities to these
the mathematics of this technique). If it is desired to variables. The effect of using the constant cutting velocity feature
measure the out-of-squareness of a Y-axis, this can be (variable spindle speed) can also be measured. Since the test part
done using the same procedure, but with the spindle at is generated with the spindle running, this test will not, in general,
positions  5 90 deg and  5 270 deg. give the same results as the test conducted with the mechanical
straightedge.
7.8.2.2 Measurement by Part Tracing Past (2) A diamond tool and aluminum cylinder is the preferred
Center. Measurement by part tracing past center is equipment because of minimum wear, lack of built-up edge, and
illustrated by Figs. 7.8.2.2-1 and 7.8.2.2-2. The procedure sharpness. Elimination of the built-up edge means that there is
consists of facing an aluminum cylinder to center with minimum sensitivity to cutting velocity, rake angles, type of cool-
ant, etc. Diamond tools have a sharpness that permits very light
cuts [0.1 μm (approximately 4 μin.) or less] if the machine has that
19 Note that many lathes use “diameter programming” and care
should be taken when programming a machine with these setups 21Depending upon the machine accuracy, this tool can be a single
to avoid possible damage to expensive instruments. crystal diamond tool, or a polycrystalline diamond insert with a
20 The data shown in this figure contain a sinusoid straightness small nose radius [less than 0.75 mm (approximately 0.03 in.)], or
term that may not be typical of most machines. another sharp tool of comparable nose radius.
73
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.2.1-1 Setup for Measuring Squareness of the Cross-Slide to the Work Spindle Using a
Mechanical Straightedge
Turret
Clamps
Traverse
range
Spindle
face
Straightedge LVDT
or other
indicator
Angle bracket
Fig. 7.8.2.1-2 Schematic Showing the Angles Involved When Measuring Cross-Slide Squareness
to the Spindle Axis
F F
X-axis X-axis
C-axis
C
ANGF ANGR
Forward, = 0 deg Reverse, = 180 deg
74
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.2.1-3 Typical Data From a Cross-Slide Out-of-Squareness Measurement
12
Best-fit line
10 = 0 deg
Indicator reading, µm
8
ANGF
Raw data Angle bisector
6
= 0 deg (squareness)
4 W
2 Best-fit line
ANGR = 180 deg
0 Raw data
= 180 deg
–2
0 50 100 150
X slide position, mm
GENERAL NOTE: The direction of axis travel and the corresponding indicator reading are important to determining the direction of
squareness error.
positioning capability. Cutting-force deflection on light finishing can also be assessed since the cylinder now has a known
cuts is usually negligible. nonstraightness, but that is not a requirement of this
(3) Bracketing the indicator to a position different than the func- Standard.)
tional point of the tool causes an error in the calculated squareness
if the X-axis has a yaw error. The error equals the change in yaw 7.8.3 Parallelism of the Longitudinal Slide (Z-Axis)
error per unit of X-axis motion times half the distance between the With the Work Spindle (C-Axis) in the X–Z Plane22
indicator positions. The yaw error per unit of axis motion can be
estimated by plotting the measured yaw error as a function of the 7.8.3.1 Straightedge Rotation Method. Figures
X-axis position. It equals the angle of the best-fit line through the 7.8.3.1-1 and 7.8.3.1-2 illustrate the straightedge rota-
data points over the range of the X-axis positions used to measure tion method. It consists of mounting a straightedge
the face of the cylinder. (either optical or mechanical), or precision mandrel, on
the spindle and adjusting it approximately parallel to
7.8.2.3 End-for-End Cylinder Reversal. The same the Z-axis. Figure 7.8.3.1-1 shows the setup on a verti-
cylinder faced in para. 7.8.2.2 may also be used for a cal spindle lathe, and Fig. 7.8.3.1-2, a horizontal spin-
straightedge, as described in para. 7.8.2.1. First, the cyl- dle lathe. An indicator is bracketed in the tool position,
inder is machined using the machine Z-axis to make a facing in the X direction, and a trace is made along the
cylinder. While the turned cylinder is still in the machine, front side of the straightedge. These data are plotted as
its straightness is measured using reversal principles, as shown in Fig. 7.8.2.1-3. The spindle is rotated 180 deg,
described in ANSI B5.54. The diamond turned cylin- the indicator is rebracketed using an extension bracket
der, which has a known straightness profile as a result from the tool post, and a second trace is made from the
of the straightedge reversal procedure, is removed and back side along the same line element of the straight-
remounted on a bracket on the spindle approximately edge. These data are also plotted. The angle that bisects
parallel with the X-axis in both horizontal and vertical the best-fit straight line to these two sets of data is the
planes. This is shown in Fig. 7.8.2.3-1. The cylinder serves “cold” out-of-parallelism of the Z-axis to the C-axis. The
as the mechanical straightedge described in para. 7.8.2.1. calculations are identical to those given in para. 7.8.2.1.
A displacement indicator is mounted on the X-axis at (Analysis of these two traces also gives the straightness
the functional-point tool location, and traversed in the X of the straightedge and the straightness of the Z-axis
direction along the crest (diameter) of the cylinder until of the machine; see ANSI B5.54 for a full discussion of
it reaches center. The spindle is then rotated 180 deg and straightedge reversal).
the trace repeated in the outward direction. The data are
fit to straight lines, as shown in Fig. 7.8.2.1-3. The bisec-
22Some lathes are quite long. If either the mechanical straightedge
tor of the angle between the two best-fit straight lines
or part-trace test option is chosen, the User should specify the
to these data is the nonsquareness of the X-axis to the length of the straightedge or cylinder as part of the original
C-axis in the cold condition. (Straightness of the X-axis machine specification.
75
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.2.2-1 Two Views of the Cylinder Used for Measuring Machine Out-of-Squareness and Parallelism
LC
DC
X cross-
slide axis
C spindle axis
Z slide axis
Tool
Mounting
pad (three) Six clearance holes for 180-deg rotation
Faceplate
(a)
Pads — position 1
Counterbored
clearance
holes
(b)
GENERAL NOTE: The taper and the cone angle on the test cylinder are highly exaggerated.
76
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.2.2-2 Part-Trace Test Past Centers to Determine Cross-Slide Squareness With the Spindle Axis
Test cylinder
To readout
device
Tool position
when cutting
Fig. 7.8.2.2-3 Typical Data From a Cross-Slide Out-of-Squareness Measurement by Part Tracing Past Center
20
18
16
“After center”
14 best-fit line
12 “After center” Angle bisector
raw data (squareness)
10
8
6 “Before center” “Before center”
raw data best-fit line
4
2
0
0 50 100 150
X slide position, mm
GENERAL NOTE: The direction of axis travel and the corresponding indicator reading are important to determining the direction of squareness error.
7.8.3.2 Turned Cylinder Method. Figure 7.8.3.2-1 plotted as shown in Fig. 7.8.3.2-2. As in the previous
illustrates the technique for part tracing on a cyl- test, the out-of-parallelism of the Z-axis to the C-axis
inder. It consists of turning an aluminum cylinder is the line that bisects the best-fit straight lines to these
(see Fig. 7.8.2.2-1), using tooling as described in data. Note that the indicator, when it is bracketed
para. 7.8.2.2, on the “front” side (normal machining across centers, should be at the same Z position, with
side) of center, letting the machine soak out, and then respect to the turret, as was the cutting tool and, when
making two part traces with an appropriate displace- the cylinder is traversed, the same range is traversed
ment indicator (see Nonmandatory Appendix K), one as when the part was machined. (The straightness of
on the front side and the other on the back side of the Z-axis as well as its parallelism to the C-axis in
center. If this option is selected, the Supplier should both the machine “hot” and “cold” condition can be
specify a soak-out time, a machining time, and an determined from these traces.)
appropriate warm-up cycle. Note that the second trace The part trace on the front side of center is conceptu-
has to be made by rebracketing the indicator and not ally zero since it has just been diamond turned. It may,
moving the machine in the X direction. This is partic- however, show a slope if the heat generated in the spin-
ularly true for vertical turret lathes, where the Z slide dle during machining is not symmetrically distributed
is stacked on the X slide. Data from these traces are or the drive motor is located next to the spindle. These
77
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.2.3-1 Cylinder Reversal for Cross-Slide Squareness
Lathe spindle
Test cylinder
To meter
or recorder
Fig. 7.8.3.1-1 Setup for Straightedge Rotation on a Vertical Spindle Lathe for Measuring Z-Axis
Parallelism to the C-Axis
Rotate 180 deg

for second
measurement
C
Straightedge
Indicator in
tool post
Indicator bracketed
across centers
for second To readout
measurement device
Spindle
78
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.3.1-2 Setup for Straightedge Rotation on a Horizontal Spindle Lathe for Measuring Z-Axis
Parallelism to the C-Axis
Turret
Z
Sp
ind
le
Straightedge
Rotate 180 deg

for second
measurement
Indicator C
Bracket
(brackets across
center for second
measurement)
Fig. 7.8.3.2-1 Z-Slide Parallelism Schematic Showing the Test Cylinder
Indicator on
back side
X (cross-
slide axis)
Z-axis
C-axis
Indicator on Tool position

front side when cutting
79
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.3.2-2 Typical Data From a Parallelism Measurement Using the Turned Cylinder Method
16
14
“Back side”
raw data
12
Angle bisector
10 (parallelism)
“Back side”
8 best-fit line Z-axis
straightness
6
4 “Front side”
“Front side” best-fit line
raw data
2
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Z slide position, mm
GENERAL NOTE: The direction of axis travel and the corresponding indicator reading are important to determining the direction of squareness error.
heat sources can rotate the headstock of the machine of 2 000 data points. Neither data curve is corrected for
so the average axis line tilts with respect to the Z-axis. alignment of the optics, slide way, and laser beam.23
The slope of the part trace on the front side of center The setup for a vertically traversing axis is more com-
represents this tilt. The “cold” parallelism is determined plicated. It is shown in Fig. 7.8.4-3. In this case, a retro-
by the bisector of the angle between the best-fit straight reflector is used in the tool position, and the laser and
lines on the front- and back-side traces. bending mirror must be moved between the setups. In
no case should the straightness reflector, shown in the
7.8.4 Long-Range Parallelism of the Z-Axis (Long insets 1 and 2 of the Fig. 7.8.4-3, be moved.
itudinal Slide) With the C-Axis (Work Spindle). When
parallelism is required for the total length of a lon- 7.9 Contouring Performance Using Circular Tests
gitudinal axis, a dual straightness measurement can 7.9.1 General. Circular tests provide a rapid and
be made using the laser straightness interferometer efficient way of measuring a machine tool’s contouring
and straightness reflector, as shown in Fig. 7.8.4-1. accuracy along a circular contour.24 Circular contours
Conceptually, this is the same as cutting a cylinder and provide one of the best checks for contouring perform-
indicating the opposite side. Two straightness mea ance in that as a machine is traversing with multiple
surements are required. For the first measurement, the axes along a circular trajectory, each axis goes through
laser beam and path of the moving Wollaston prism sinusoidal acceleration, velocity, and position changes.
(straightness interferometer) are aligned mechani- The tests specified here are for machines with only two
cally (i.e., no data fit is permitted). The spindle, with axes. More complex tests, if desired, should be devised
straightness reflector, is rotated 180 deg and the sec-
ond straightness measurement recorded. The average 23 In principle, the parallelism of the Z-axis to the spindle axis
straightness at each Z-axis position is plotted for each can be obtained without mechanical alignment for the first
of the two measurements, as shown in Fig. 7.8.4-2. At measurement. However, error can be significant when measuring
large straightness values.
each measurement point in both the forward and the 24 When used statically in a point-to-point positioning mode, the
reverse directions, the laser reading should be averaged ball bar can also provide valuable information about positioning
for a minimum of 5 s and should include a minimum performance and machine geometry.
80
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.4-1 Dual Straightness Measurement for Parallelism
Laser straightness
interferometer
(Wollaston prism)
2 × parallelism
Z-axis Parallelism
angle
path angle
Laser Laser
Spindle at 0 deg: Spindle at 180 deg:

straightness reflector straightness reflector
aligned with laser beam nonaligned with laser
and Z-axis path beam and Z-axis path
Fig. 7.8.4-2 Graphing of Both Straightness Measurements for Twice the Angle of Parallelism
0.025
–0.025
Deviation, mm
0.045 mm
1 400 mm
–0.05
Spindle at 0 deg
–0.075
Spindle at 180 deg
–0.10
Parallelism = 0.045 mm/1, 400 mm
= 0.000032 mm/mm = 32�rad
–0.125
0 500 1 000 1 500
Position along Z-axis, mm
81
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.8.4-3 Setup for Measuring Long-Range Parallelism of the Z-Axis in the Case of a Vertically Traversing Axis
Retroreflector
and Wollaston
1 Bending
mirror
2
Laser
180 deg
Straightness
reflector
for other machines and agreed on between the Supplier spindle shall be rigidly locked.25 Other test conditions
and the User as part of the machine purchase. Each test are given in para. 7.1.
specified shall be run at two speeds: approximately 10%
of the maximum feed rate and 80% of the maximum 7.9.2 Telescoping Ball Bar Performance —X–Z Plane,
feed rate. On some machines, the controller will auto- 360-deg Trace.26 On some machines, there is enough
matically slow the feed rate to compensate for errors. axis travel in both X and Z to perform a 360-deg full-
Therefore, the User shall measure the time required circle test. On such machines, the 360-deg ball bar test is
to perform the ball bar test and report the actual feed required. A setup for such a test is shown in Fig. 7.9.2-1.
rate from the circle circumference and the time. Other Note that in this configuration the fixed socket is no
feed rates may be specified by the User, if desired. For
this test, the length of the telescoping ball bar should 25 Machines that incorporate angular positioning capability with
be slightly less than one-half the range of travel of the spindle rotation may exhibit angular “hunting” of the spindle,
shortest axis under test or 250 mm (approximately leading to unwanted errors when making measurements. Angular
motion may be reduced by turning the spindle off and disengaging
10 in.), whichever is smaller. For clarity of explana- the drive (if possible). A frictional antirotation device, such as a
tion, the tests described in paras. 7.9.2 through 7.9.4 are magnetic base, should be placed between the fixed and rotating
illustrated for a particular type of telescoping ball bar. positions of the spindle. Under no circumstances should a rigid
Any ball bar system conforming to the requirements connection be made between the fixed and rotating portions of the
spindle. The friction connection protects both the operator and the
of this Standard shall state, as part of the output data, spindle from damage due to inadvertent starts.
the angular interval used for ball bar length measure- 26 Many lathes are programmed in diameter, rather than radius.
ment during circular contouring. For these tests, the Users should take care not to damage the instrumentation.
82
ASME B5.57-2012
longer on the centerline of the spindle in the X direction. clockwise and counterclockwise directions. The circular
Before programming the machine, it shall be located hysteresis is the maximum radial difference between the
using the procedure recommended by the ball bar man- two actual tool paths in the clockwise and counterclock-
ufacturer. After location of the fixed socket, the machine wise directions at any given angle. The circular deviation
should be programmed to make a complete 360-deg is the minimum radial separation of two concentric circles
trace in the X–Z plane, in both the clockwise and coun- that will envelope the actual path. Finally, the radial devia-
terclockwise directions. Typical results of such a test are tions are the maximum and minimum deviations from
shown in Fig. 7.9.2-2. The data for the test shall be ana- the true ball bar length, corrected to 20°C (68°F). For the
lyzed and reported as described in para. 7.9.5. purposes of this Standard, the manufacturer of the ball bar
shall supply an effective coefficient of thermal expansion
7.9.3 Telescoping Ball Bar Performance—X–Z Plane, for the ball bar and recommendations as to appropriate ball
190-deg Trace. Where possible, a 190-deg test should bar calibration procedures, where applicable. Table 7.9.5-1
also be performed. [The primary limitation is usually shows typical results of a ball bar test. The data are taken
the minimum length of the ball bar and the traverse from the 190-deg trace shown in Fig. 7.9.3-2.
length of the X-axis. Many commercial ball bars have a
minimum length of 100 mm (approximately 4 in.), thus 7.9.6 Contouring Performance Using Precision Disks or
requiring an X-axis of 200 mm (approximately 8 in.) a Grid Encoder. This Standard allows the substitution of
before this test can be performed.] A setup for this test is precision disks or grid encoders for the telescoping ball
shown in Fig. 7.9.3-1. For this test, the support arm may bars in the circular test. The circular test is a comparison of
also be placed below the ball bar. The machine should be a circular path carried out by a machine tool to an accurate
programmed to move along the arc shown in the figure, circle, a circular comparison standard. For disks, this com-
from 190 deg to 0 deg and back, at both of the prese- parison is carried out using a 2D probe reading against a
lected feed rates (see para. 7.9.1). Typical results of such precision disk. When grid encoders are used, the pattern
tests are shown in Fig. 7.9.3-2. Data are analyzed and on a special grid encoder is sensed using photo-optical
reported as described in para. 7.9.5. sensors. On the machine tool, a circle is programmed; the
diameter of the circle corresponds to the diameter of the
7.9.4 Telescoping Ball Bar Performance—X–Z Plane, circle comparison standard. The 2D probe or the photo
100-deg Test. The 100-deg test should be used only on sensor is moved on the circular path by the machine tool
those machines where either the 360-deg test or the 190- and either measures deviations of the program circle from
deg test cannot be performed due to limitations in axis the disk standard, or, in the case of the grid encoder, sim-
positioning or available ball bar lengths. The telescop- ply gives the X–Y coordinates of the programmed path.
ing ball bar conforming to the requirements of section 9 Commercial systems are available for both the precision
shall be used for this test. One of the magnetic sockets, disks and the grid encoders. The deviations from circu-
called the “fixed socket,” is attached to the work spin- larity so measured are analogous to those obtained with
dle using a suitable fixture and the machine chuck. The the circular test using the ball bar. The analysis shall be
other socket, called the “free socket,” is attached at the done in the same manner as that for the circular test; see
nominal position of the tool in the turret. Such a setup para. 7.9.5.
is shown in Fig. 7.9.4.-1. The machine is commanded to
move along a radius from the position labeled 0 deg to 7.9.7 Equivalent Test Procedures. At the time of
the position labeled 100 deg and back to position 0 deg the issuance of this Standard, several ball bar designs
at both of the preselected feed rates (see para. 7.9.1). The or other instruments are in the process of development
results are presented in a polar plot such as that shown and testing. The use of any of these ball bars or other
in Fig. 7.9.4-2. Data are analyzed and reported as in instruments is suitable, as long as the instrument system
para. 7.9.5. is able to perform the tasks described in para. 7.9 with
the required accuracy (see section 9).
7.9.5 Telescoping Ball Bar Data Analysis. For each
ball bar test — the 100-deg, the 190-deg, or the 360-deg 7.10 Cutting Performance Tests
—the circular hysteresis,27 H; the circular deviations for 7.10.1 General. In the performance of a cutting oper-
clockwise, G↑, and counterclockwise, G↓, contouring; and ation, the following conditions or limitations may arise:
the radial deviations, Fmax and Fmin, for clockwise (↑) and (a) The drive cannot deliver the necessary torque and
counterclockwise (↓) contouring, corrected to 20°C (68°F), it either stalls or the machine breaks. This leads to a test
shall be reported, as well as the measured feed rates in the of the ability to utilize the rated torque. A preliminary to
this test is the test of spindle idle run losses.
27 When performing this test, care should be taken that the machine (b) Chatter occurs. In roughing cuts, this leads to
is moving at the correct feed rate. If the feed rate is different in the
counterclockwise and clockwise directions, the circular hysteresis excessive vibratory forces that may damage the tool and
will be measured erroneously. to chatter marks on the surface in finishing cuts.
83
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.9.2-1 Typical Setup for a 360-deg Ball Bar Test
Turret
Desired path
Z
Ball bar
Chuck
Support arm 2
Support arm 1
Full-Circle Test (360 deg)
Fig. 7.9.2-2 Typical Results From a 360-deg Ball Bar Test
Nonround: 26.2 �m
Max. 15.5 �m, 358.6 deg
Min. –10.7 �m, 67.0 deg
7101-XZ3. RTB
Machine: Lathe 360
90
Length: 100.0000 mm –Z
Radius: 100.0000 mm 180 –X +X 0
Best radius: 99.9964 mm
+Z
Center off X: +21.9 �m
270
Center off Z: –24.0 �m
Sample: 62.50 per sec
Feed: 1905.0000 mm/min
Start End
Machine 180.0 deg 180.0 deg
Data: 0.0 deg 0.0 deg

CCW
2 runs, bidirectional
CW Scale: 4.0 �m/div
84
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.9.3-1 Typical Ball Bar Setup for the 190-deg Test on a Lathe
X
Chuck
Turret
Desired path
190 deg
Support arm
Ball bar
Fig. 7.9.3-2 Typical Results From a 190-deg Ball Bar Test on a Lathe
Nonround: 12.1 �m
Max.: 7.4 �m, 180.6 deg
Min.: –4.8 �m, 271.2 deg
Lathe–XZ. RTB
Machine: Lathe 180
90
Length: 100.0000 mm
Radius: 100.0000 mm 180 –X +X 0

+Z
Center off X: –2.3 �m
270
Center off Z: +32.5 �m
Start End

CCW
85
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.9.4-1 Typical Ball Bar Setup for a 100-deg Test
Chuck
Z
Turret
100 deg
Ball bar
(c) In stable cuts (without chatter), the deflections in the 7.10.2-1 produced. The wattmeter is connected to the
system (e.g., in the tool, spindle, structure, fixture, or work- power feed of the spindle drive. The measured lost
piece) cause errors of position and profile of the machined power includes losses in the electric drive as well as
surface. those in the transmissions and bearings. It has been suf-
(d) Other kinds of problems may arise, such as fail- ficiently established that these losses are little affected by
ures of the coolant delivery system, leakage of oil from the useful load on the spindle. The net available power
the spindle-lubricating system, or clogging of chips in shall correspond to that provided in the specifications of
the chip-removal system. These are not discussed fur- the machine tool (see Form 1).
ther in this Standard.
7.10.3 Chatter Limits Test and Full Torque Test.
7.10.1.1 Limitations. The limitations specified in Because of the wide variety of turning centers currently
para. 7.10.1 (a) and (b) shall be determined in well-or- available, the User and the Supplier should negotiate as
ganized tests performed under carefully specified con- part of the original specification a cutting performance
ditions. For practical reasons, the tests are organized in test that will determine the capability of the machine to
the following sequence: apply its full torque (horsepower) to a metal-removal
(a) Spindle Idle Run Loss Test. This test is carried out operation, without the existence of chatter.
first to measure the power available for the cutting tests.
(b) Chatter Limits and Full Torque Test. Measurements 7.11 Multifunction Cycle Test
of these two limitations are combined in a test(s) agreed 7.11.1 General. The machine shall be cycled through
upon by the User and the Supplier, during which one or all basic machine functions for a specified time period
the other limitation prevails. (usually 24 h) to demonstrate its complexity, capability,
and short-term reliability. Preceding this test, a subsidi-
7.10.2 Spindle Idle Run Loss Test. This test mea ary test should be performed to check the function of the
sures the economy of the drive and potential heat machine limit switches, coolant cycling, etc.
sources. It is also useful, for the cutting tests, to know
the actual power available on the spindle at the various 7.11.2 Procedure. The machine and control shall
speeds. This test should be performed for each work cycle automatically under numerical control for a speci-
spindle and each tool spindle. fied time period agreed upon between the Supplier and
In this test, the spindle is run idle in five steps over the User. The program used for the cycling test shall
its total speed range and, using a wattmeter, the power position the machine over its entire work zone and
required is recorded and a graph like the one in Fig. shall include all basic machine functions, tool changes,
86
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.9.4-2 Typical Results of a 100-deg Ball Bar Test
Nonround: 10.2 �m
Max.: 6.6 �m, 89.5 deg
Min.: –3.7 �m, 87.2 deg
Lathe–90.RTB
Machine: Lathe 90
90
Length: 100.0000 mm –Z
Radius: 100.0000 mm 180 –X +X 0

+Z
Center off X: +4.3 �m
270
Center off Z: +44.4 �m
Start End

CCW
Table 7.9.5-1 Typical Results of a Ball Bar Test

Parameter Name Symbol Value, μm
Circular hysteresis H 131.7

Circular deviation, clockwise G↑ 130.0
Circular deviation, counterclockwise G↓ 127.0
Minimum radial deviation, clockwise Fmin↑ –70.0
Minimum radial deviation, counterclockwise Fmin↓ –59.0
Maximum radial deviation, clockwise Fmax↑ 61.7
Maximum radial deviation, counterclockwise Fmax↓ 73.2
GENERAL NOTE: The results are dependent on the following conditions:

(a) machine: not applicable
(b) test angular range: 190 deg
(c) ball bar length: 77 mm
(d) angular measurement interval: manufacturer supplied
(e) contour speed: 1 335 mm/min
87
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 7.10.2-1 A Typical Plot of the Power Loss in the Spindle Idle Run Loss Test
Typical MTDR (machine

tool duty rating), 30 min
Pnom.
Power, kW
Typical
continuous
rating
Plost
100%
Spindle speed, %
traverse and feed motions, contouring, G-code canned 8.2.2) have been traditionally used for the alignment
cycles, etc. The spindle shall operate through its entire of rotating machinery. The third method (para. 8.2.3) is
speed range during the test. A complete program run more modern and requires the use of a laser alignment
time (cycle) shall not exceed 15 min, unless specifically system. The fourth method (para. 8.2.4) relates to meth-
negotiated between the Supplier and the User. The ods used for establishing rotary table axis alignment
Supplier and the User shall also negotiate and make on machining centers. Finally, the fifth method (para.
part of the original specification the number of failures, 8.2.5) is one that is traditionally used for aligning tail
if any, and the type of failures that are to be allowed dur- stocks on normal production machines. The choice of
ing the specified time period. the method used is left to the User; however, the cho-
sen method should be made part of the original speci-
8 MACHINE PERFORMANCE (ADDITIONAL) fication and should have an accuracy sufficient for the
intended use of the machine. Note that none of these
8.1 General methods can determine the coaxiality that may exist
Many turning centers offer optional features. In this during operation with a workpiece loaded, tail stock
section, an attempt has been made to include tests for pressure, etc.
those most commonly supplied. If a machine is to be Four parameters are required to specify the alignment
purchased with options that are not covered in these of two axes of rotation.29 Two of these parameters spec-
sections, the User and the Supplier should devise an ify the angularity between the two axes, and the other
appropriate functional test to be made part of the origi- two, the offset between the two axes in some specified
nal machine specification. plane. Note that in the presence of any angularity, the
offset is a function of position. This situation is depicted
8.2 Coaxiality of Axes of Rotation28 in Fig. 8.2-1 in one plane. For historical reasons, as well
as reasons relating to measurement procedures, angles
The alignment of axes of rotation is necessary on are normally described with respect to vertical and
many machines. For example, it may be necessary when horizontal planes, and offsets are defined similarly. We
two spindle axes need to be aligned or when a tail stock follow this convention in this Standard and, for each of
needs to be aligned to a spindle axis. This alignment the proposed measurement methods, clearly specify the
parameter is independent of the actual mechanical plane where the offsets are to be reported. If not speci-
runout of the spindle nose(s) or tail stock itself. Such fied, these offsets should be reported in a plane nomi-
runout should be determined by traditional machine nally 50 mm (approximately 2 in.) from the face of the
tool practices and corrected where necessary. Five
methods of checking the alignment of axes of rotation
are given below. The first two methods (paras. 8.2.1 and 29The nomenclature in this section refers to horizontal spindle
machines. Those using other configurations should specify
28These measurements are often used to make machine the planes in which the offsets and angles are to be reported.
adjustments. If the alignments are worse than the Supplier’s Sag measurements should not be required for vertical spindle
specifications, then such adjustments should be made. machines.
88
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2-1 Illustration of Angularity and Offset Between Two Axes of Rotation
Offset
Angularity
Offset 2
Offset 1
machine main spindle. For the purpose of this section, position (12:00 in the figure) and the mandrel rotated until
the following nomenclature is defined: the indicators are at the bottom position (6:00 in the figure).
HA 5 the horizontal angle between two axes of The readings of both indicators are recorded. The sag of the
rotation rim indicator, RRs, will generally be negative (pay attention
HO 5 the horizontal offset between two axes of to signs), while the sign of the sag of the face indicator, FRs,
rotation in a specified plane will depend on details of the setup. This test shall be per-
VA 5 the vertical angle between two axes of formed three times and the mean of the readings computed.
rotation The indicators are then fixtured to the two axes of rotation
VO 5 the vertical offset in a specified plane (see Fig. 8.2.1-1), the two axes rotated together, and indi-
Traditionally these measurements are performed with cator readings taken at the 12:00, 3:00, 6:00, and 9:00 posi-
the machine cold, but the User is warned that the offsets tions. These measurements should be repeated three times,
and angles change with temperature. These changes are with care taken to avoid thermal effects (gloved hands and
measured in para. 7.6. a temperature shield may be required on high-accuracy
machines). The alignment parameters of the two axes in
8.2.1 Rim-and-Face Method. The rim-and-face meas- the plane of the rim indicator are given by
urement method requires the use of two displacement
indicators conforming to the requirements of section 9. RR0 2 RR6 2 RRs
VO 5
Depending upon machine accuracy levels, the displace- 2
ment indicators could range from dial gages to air-bearing FR6 2 FR0 2 FRs
LVDTs. A typical setup, using dial gages attached with VA 5
DIA
brackets to short stiff mandrels fixtured to the two axes
of rotation, is shown in Fig. 8.2.1-1. In the figure, the indi- RR3 2 RR9
HO 5
cators are set for positive reading for motions toward the 2
indicator dials. For simplicity of notation, the rotary axis to FR9 2 FR3
the left in the figure is called the C-axis, and the axis to the HA 5
DIA
right, the M-axis. The bracket holding the indicators and
the mandrels should be as short and as stiff as possible. where
Before commencing the test, the sag (compliance) of the DIA 5 the diameter of the circle traveled by the
bracket shall be measured. This is done by attaching the face indicator centerline
bracket to a stiff mandrel supported between centers, as FRs 5 the mean sag of the face indicator
shown in Fig. 8.2.1-2. For spans up to 200 mm (approxi- FR0 5 the mean face reading at 12:00
mately 8 in.), a steel mandrel 50 mm (approximately FR3 5 the mean face reading at 3:00
2 in.) in diameter shall be considered adequate. (For very FR6 5 the mean face reading at 6:00
high-accuracy machines, a calculation of the requisite man- FR9 5 the mean face reading at 9:00
drel diameter should be calculated or a correction applied HA 5 the horizontal angle
for mandrel sag.) The indicators are zeroed at the top HO 5 the horizontal offset
89
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2.1-1 Typical Setup for the Rim-and-Face Test
Rim indicator
Bracket
Down 12:00
Face indicator
9:00 3:00
C-axis M-axis
6:00
Plane of
Measurement positions
rim indicator
Side View End View
Fig. 8.2.1-2 Setup for Measuring the Sag of a Pair of Indicators
Rim indicator
12:00
Down
Face indicator
9:00 3:00
50-mm mandrel 6:00
Centers Measurement positions
Side View End View
90
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2.2-1 Typical Setup for the Reverse Indicator Method
S indicator
Bracket
Down 12:00
9:00 3:00
C-axis M-axis
6:00
Measurement positions
End View
Bracket
M indicator
Plane of S Indicator
RRs 5 mean sag of the rim indicator taken at the 12:00, 3:00, 6:00, and 9:00 positions. These
RR0 5 mean rim reading at 12:00 measurements should be repeated three times and the
RR3 5 mean rim reading at 3:00 means computed. The misalignment of the two axes in
RR6 5 mean rim reading at 6:00 the plane of indicator S is given by
RR9 5 mean rim reading at 9:00
2 (SR0 2 SR6 2 SRs )
VA 5 vertical angle VO 5
VO 5 vertical offset 2
If desired, standard uncertainties in these quantities may 2 (SR0 2 SR6 2 SRs 1 MR0 2 MR6 2 MRs )
VA 5
be computed (see Nonmandatory Appendix M). 2D g
2 (SR3 2 SR9)
8.2.2 Reverse Indicator Method. The setup for HO 5
the reverse indicator method is shown in Fig. 8.2.2-1. 2
As in the rim-and-face method, two appropriate indi- 2 (SR3 2 SR9 1 MR3 2 MR9)
HA 5
cators shall be used, with the choice depending upon 2Dg
machine accuracy. The indicators shall be set to read
positive for motions toward the dials, as shown in the
figure. Before commencing measurements, the sag of the where
indicator setup shall be measured. The procedure is as Dg 5 the distance between the S and M gages
outlined in para. 8.2.1, with the reverse indicator brack- MR0 5 the mean M gage reading at 12:00
ets (Fig. 8.2.2-1) being substituted for the rim-and-face MR3 5 the mean M gage reading at 3:00
brackets in Fig. 8.2.1-1. The indicators shall be zeroed at MR9 5 the mean M gage reading at 9:00
the 12:00 position, the mandrel rotated to the 6:00 posi- MRs 5 the mean sag of the M gage
tion, and the readings from the S and the M indica- R6 5 the mean M gage reading at 6:00
tors recorded. This measurement shall be performed SR0 5 the mean S gage reading at 12:00
three times and the mean sags computed. The indicators SR3 5 the mean S gage reading at 3:00
shall then be fixtured to the two axes of rotation, using SR6 5 the mean S gage reading at 6:00
mandrels as described in para. 8.2.1. Once mounted, SR9 5 the mean S gage reading at 9:00
the two axes shall be rotated and indicator readings SRs 5 the mean sag of the S gage
91
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2.3-1 Rotation Axes Alignment Using an Optical Alignment Laser
Position 1: Target in tail stock Position 2: Target in spindle
For the definitions of HA, HO, VA, and VO, see nomen- circle center, CX1, CY1, determined. Next, the indicator
clature in para 8.2.1. is rebracketed to make three traces around the artifact at
position 2. Again, the data are least-squares fit to a circle
8.2.3 Optical Tail Stock Alignment. Several align- to obtain a CX2, CY2 center. (Two indicators can also be
ment laser systems are available that may also be used used at the same time, which requires less stability but
for axes of rotation alignment. A basic system is shown in introduces the problem of matching gage calibrations.)
Fig. 8.2.3-1. In such a system, a laser is attached to either For this Standard, the offsets are reported at position 1,
of the axes of rotation and a photodetector attached to which is nominally 50 mm (approximately 2 in.) from
the other of the two. Procedures vary. Some systems the main spindle face. The equations are
require rotating one axis by hand, taking readings of the
laser position, and then rotating the other axis by hand
HO 5 HO1 5 CX1
and again recording the results. Other systems require
rotating the axes together as described in paras. 8.2.1 SR1
and 8.2.2. The out-of-alignment of the two axes of rota- VO 5 VO1 5 CY1 2
2
tion is calculated by the system software. In all cases, the
HO2 5 CX 2
Supplier’s recommendations for the laser instrument
system usage should be followed. The measurements HO2 2 HO1
HA 5
shall be repeated three times, and mean values for the Dg
four out-of-alignment parameters shall be calculated.
SR2
VO 2 5 CY2 2
8.2.4 Two-Sphere Axis Alignment. To perform the 2
two-sphere axis alignment test, a set of test balls is fix- VO2 2 VO1
VA 5
tured to one spindle and adjusted to have minimum Dg
runout (each ball is separately adjusted). Such a situation
is shown in Fig. 8.2.4-1, illustration (a), where the fixture
is in the machine main spindle. Here, the fixture used for where Dg is the distance between the two gages.
the spindle error analysis may be readily used. Next, an As shown in Fig. 8.2.4-1, illustration (b), the setup may
indicator bracket is attached rigidly to the second rotary be reversed and the measurement repeated. Similar pro-
axis [shown as a tail stock in Fig. 8.4.2-1, illustration (a)]. cedures should be followed. Note that the gage number-
The bracket should be stiff and light and needs to be sta- ing is the same to make the previous equations apply.
ble only for the duration of the test. The bracket should
also be checked for sag using a procedure similar to that 8.2.5 Parallelism of the Z-Axis With Other Linear
described in paras. 8.2.1 and 8.2.2. If the sag is excessive, Axes, W. For machines equipped with auxiliary axes
a stiffer bracket should be used or the sag measured, as that move in the Z direction, such as a tail stock, it is
described in para. 8.2. The mean sag at gage 1, SR1, and important to measure the parallelism of the auxiliary
the mean sag at gage 2, SR2, as well as their standard axis motion with the machine Z-axis. This situation is
uncertainties, shall be recorded. Also, if a high-thermal- illustrated in Fig. 8.2.5-1 for a machine with a movable
expansion material is used, the thermal effects may bias tail stock. The simplest method for measuring this par-
the result and the bracket should be insulated. An indi- allelism is to indicate against the tail stock center using
cator shall be positioned on the bracket to read against indicators in the X–Z and Y–Z plane. At some initial
the artifact at position 1, and three full-circle traces shall position, the indicators are zeroed. Then the tail stock is
be taken as the tail stock is rotated. Data from these cir- moved in increments. After each motion increment, the
cle tests are least-squares fit to a circle, and the mean indicators are again moved to read against the tail stock,
92
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2.4-1 Two-Sphere Setup for the Alignment of Two Rotation Axes
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Lightweight
bracket
Spindle
Spindle or
Artifact tail stock
(a)
Sensor 1
Sensor 2
Artifact
Spindle
Spindle or
tail stock
Lightweight bracket
(b)
Fig. 8.2.5-1 Schematic of the Measurement of Parallelism of the Z-Axis to the Axis of a Movable Tail Stock
Turret
Angle
(if required)
Quill extended
as required
�
Tool
reference Z–X plane
Tail stock
Z–Y plane
Z-axis motion
GENERAL NOTE: Move the tail stock in increments along the entire stroke, and clamp during measurement.
93
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.2.5.1-1 Setup for Measuring Tail Stock Alignment Using the In-Feed (Z) Axis
C1 C2
(a)
C1 C2
(b)
at the same point on the tail stock, using the machine the indicator, and the X deviation of the second sphere
Z-axis. The indicator data are plotted for both planes, and C2 determined. The measurement is performed
and the slopes of the lines obtained by least-squares fit- similarly in the Y direction. Offsets and angles are then
ting are the out-of-alignment in the respective planes. calculated.
At least 10 positions along the Z-axis should be used for
each plane and the standard uncertainty obtained from 8.2.6 Parallelism of the Z-Axis (Longitudinal Slide) With
the least-squares fit to the slopes reported. the C-Axis (Work Spindle) in the Y–Z Plane.31 Parallelism
of the Z-axis to the C-axis in the Y–Z (vertical) plane is
8.2.5.1 Mechanical Tail Stock Alignment. Many important on some machines that require facing a work-
machines are equipped with a tail stock. In these cases, piece to center without a defect, at different positions
it is often sufficient to indicate the tail stock centerline along the Z-axis. Stated in a different way, if the tool is
location with respect to the spindle centerline, using set to centerline height at one position of the Z-axis, it
the machine in-feed.30 This situation is depicted in will not be at centerline in other positions unless the
Fig. 8.2.5.1-1, illustrations (a) and (b), where the two Z-axis motion is parallel to the C-axis in this plane. This
axes of rotation are called C1 and C2. First the paral- parallelism may be measured by one of the three meth-
lelism of the C1-axis to the Z-axis is measured in both ods mentioned previously for measuring the parallelism
the X and Y planes, using the procedures described in the Y–Z plane. That is, it may be measured using a
in para. 7.7.3.1. (Values obtained previously may be mechanical straightedge positioned in the correct direc-
used.) Next, the Z-axis is traversed and the parallel- tion (para. 7.8.3.1), by part traces on a machined cylinder
ism of C2 measured by the same procedure. Note that (para. 7.8.3.2), or by using a straightness interferometer
this procedure does not require that the mandrels be (para. 7.8.4). When using the first two methods, appro-
precisely aligned to the spindle axis. The offset is mea priate attention should be paid to gravitational sag on a
sured using precision spheres. These precision spheres, horizontal spindle machine.
of the same diameter (see section 9), are mounted at a
fixed distance from the face of the spindle and the face 8.3 Subsystems Repeatability
of the tail stock. The recommended distance is 50 mm
Turning centers are complex systems and contain
(approximately 2 in.), as discussed previously, though
many subsystems that also contribute to the accuracy and
other distances may be chosen. They are adjusted to
performance of the machine. Subsystems that contribute
have minimum runout. First, the X deviation of the
surface of the sphere in spindle C1 is measured; then, 31 Parallelism of the Z-axis to the C-axis in the X–Y (vertical) plane
the Z-axis is traversed to position 2, without rezeroing is important on some machines that require facing a workpiece
to center without a defect (“blip”) at different positions along the
Z-axis. Stated in a different way, if the tool is set to centerline height
30 Note that the results of this procedure are biased by angular and at one position of the Z-axis, it will not be at centerline at other
straightness errors of the in-feed axis. positions.
94
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.3.1-1 Tool Holders Used for Tool-Change Repeatability
100 mm
(approx. 4 in.)
Gage line
to the accuracy are the tool-change repeatability; turret into position such that the two displacement indicators
repeatability; and tool-setting-system repeatability, loca- are nulled. This position is recorded. This procedure is
tion, and drift. Tests for these important subsystems are repeated on the second sphere. An automatic cycle is
addressed in paras. 8.3.1 through 8.4. established to place sphere 1 into the turret and posi-
tion it to its established null in the displacement indica-
8.3.1 Tool-Change Repeatability. For the purposes of tor nest, withdraw it safely from the nest, interchange
this Standard, tool change repeatability is checked using it with sphere 2, position sphere 2 to its null position in
two tool holders selected by the User from a Supplier’s the nest, and then withdraw and return sphere 2 safely
specified tooling package. Precision test spheres are to to the tool magazine. This program is executed 10 times
be mounted in these tool holders in a manner similar to in rapid succession, and the X and Z offsets of each ball
that shown in Fig. 8.3.1-1. One of the test spheres is to be are recorded for each trial. Four tool-change repeatabil-
at the minimum possible distance from the turret or tool ities are defined: they are the difference between four
holder, and the second test sphere is to be mounted on standard uncertainties of the X and Z readings for the
a rigid column at a distance of 100 mm (approximately short setup, minus the machine unidirectional repeat-
4 in.) from the first sphere. (These lengths are default ability for the direction(s) of approach to the sensor nest
options, and the User is free to select other lengths (para. 7.2.7.6); and the difference in 4 times the standard
appropriate to the application, if required.) The tool uncertainty of the X and Z readings, minus the machine
holders with their test spheres are to be inserted in User- unidirectional repeatability for the direction of approach
selectable positions in the tool magazine for the machine, to the sensor nest for the long setup.33 For example, the
and a displacement indicator nest is to be rigidly tool-change repeatability for one tool length in the X
attached to the machine chuck in the nominal position direction is given by
of the part.32 The test then proceeds as follows. The first
sphere is loaded into the turret and the machine jogged
33Note that on most lathes the Y is the nonsensitive direction;
however, improper Y positioning will lead to a dimple at the
32This test can, if required, be performed on an axis-by-axis basis center of a faced part and thus is included here as an important
using a single sensor. parameter.
95
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.3.2-1 Example Tool Holders to Be Used for Turret Repeatability
mm )
100 x. 4 in
pro
(ap
1 n should be those normally supplied with the machine.

ux 5
n−1
∑ (x ti 2 x t )2 If the machine has straight-shank tooling, tool holders
i51 such as those shown in Fig. 8.3.2-1 are appropriate. As
and described in para. 8.3.1, a two-indicator sensor nest is
Rxts 5 4ux 2 R↑ rigidly attached to the machine chuck in the nominal
or position of the part. After establishing the null locations
Rxts 5 4ux 2 R↓ for both tools, an automatic cycle is established to place
sphere 1 into the indicator nest, withdraw it, index the
where turret, and place sphere 2 into the indicator nest. This
n 5 10, the default value for this test program is executed 10 times in rapid succession and
R↑ or R↓ 5 the appropriate repeatability for the the X–Z deviations for both tool and turret positions
X-axis are recorded. Four turret repeatabilities are defined.
Rxts 5 the tool-change repeatability for that They are the difference between 4 times the standard
direction and tool length uncertainty of the X and Z readings for the short setup,
ux 5 the estimate of the standard uncertainty minus the machine unidirectional repeatability for the
xti 5 the ith reading in the X direction direction(s) of approach to the sensor nest (para. 7.2.7.6);
xt 5 the average of the 10 readings in the X and the difference in 4 times the standard uncertainty
direction of the X–Z readings, minus the machine unidirectional
Note that this test includes changes in tool position caused repeatability for the direction(s) of approach to the sen-
by rotating the tool magazine and any thermal errors sor nest for the long setup in the second turret position.
induced by traversing to and from the tool-change loca- The calculation and notation are identical to those out-
tion. To obtain the most realistic estimate of tool-change lined in para. 8.3.1.
effects, the User should have the two spheres with their
tool holders placed in magazine locations that require 8.3.3 Optional Tool-Change and Turret Repeatability
extensive motion of this mechanism. Using a Tool Probe. When a machine is equipped
with a tool probe, there may be significant advantages
8.3.2 Turret Repeatability. Turret repeatability is to using it to assess tool-change repeatability and tur-
checked using a method analogous to that described in ret repeatability. In addition to reduced setup, the test
para. 8.3.1 for tool-change repeatability. For this test, the parameters may be more accurately isolated from the
short and the long precision test spheres are mounted positioning repeatabilities of the machine and the mea
in two User-selectable turret positions. The tool holders surement sensors.
96
ASME B5.57-2012
The required hardware is the same as that for the pri- machine part-holding device. The X direction, on the
mary tests except that the gage nest is replaced by the other hand, is set with respect to a more stable machine
tool probe measuring in X and Z directions. parameter, that is, the spindle axis of rotation. Tests here
are designed with this in mind. If the machine has more
8.3.3.1 Test Procedure for the First Sphere. Measure than one work spindle or turret, tests should be per-
the X and Z location 10 times. Between each measure- formed for each possible spindle–turret combination.
ment, return the machine to the location where a tool Further, if the tool-setting system is on a movable arm,
change would take place, but do not exchange tools. the arm should be moved between each tool set when
Exchange spheres. Repeat the 10 measurements for the checking repeatability. Only one such combination is
second sphere. discussed here, namely, the single spindle–single turret.
Alternate measurements of first and second sphere for If other options are desired, they should be negotiated
a total of 10 additional cycles in which the tool changer between the User and the Supplier and be made part of
is used. the original machine specification.
8.3.3.2 Analysis. The analysis is the same as that 8.4.1 Repeatability of the Tool-Setting System. Before
for the primary test procedure (see para. 8.3.1) except establishing the position of the tool-setting system with
that the unidirectional machine positioning repeatability respect to the spindle centerline, it is necessary to check
values are not used. For the 20 sets of X and Z measure- its repeatability. To do this, a new insert or a small preci-
ments for each sphere, the first 10 do not include a tool sion ball should be mounted in the location of an insert
change and the second 10 do include the tool change. in the tool holder. Whichever option is chosen, the tool
holder should be short and as stiff as possible. Before
1 20 proceeding, the machine should be exercised following
ux 5
9
∑ (x ti 2 x t )2 an exercise procedure to be specified by the machine
i 5 11
Supplier. Next, the machine should be jogged to allow the
1 10 tool or ball to contact the tool-setting system in both the X
u′x 5
9
∑ (x
i51
ti 2 x t ’ )2 and Z (if applicable) directions and an original X–Z posi-
tion established. A cycle should be established, following
and the Supplier’s recommendations, to quickly reset the tool
Rxts 5 4ux 2 u'x 10 times. This procedure should be representative of how
the tools will be set during normal machine operation. If
This calculation is performed for each direction, and the machine is equipped with an arm that moves in and
each sphere (i.e., four times) out of the work zone, that arm should be introduced dur-
ing each cycle; that is, the tool-setting cycle should be that
8.3.4 Gage Line Repeatability. The purpose of this normally used to set tools when machining. For each of
test is to determine the gage line repeatability for all these 10 repeats, the X and Z locations of the tool (ball)
of the pockets on a turret with tool-changing capabili- should be recorded. From these numbers, a standard
ties. For this test, the short tool (see Fig. 8.3.2-1) is used. uncertainty should be computed for each axis, following
First the tool is put in one pocket and its X–Z offsets the procedures outlined in para. 8.3.1. The repeatability
measured three times using the tool-setting system. should be reported for both the X and Z (if applicable)
The tool is then inserted in all the other pockets, in directions as 4 times the standard uncertainty obtained
turn, measuring its offsets three times for each pocket. from these measurements.34
The total range of the X offsets is reported as the X gage For some specific purposes, it might be desirable to test
line repeatability, and the total range of the Z offsets the tool-setting sensor independent of the complete sys-
is reported as the Z gage line repeatability. If desired, tem performance. In that case, the procedures described
the standard uncertainty in the offsets may be calcu- above should be followed but the tool-setting arm left
lated on a pocket-by-pocket basis (see Nonmandatory in position. The repeatability of the sensor in both the X
Appendix M). and Z directions should be computed as above.
8.4 Repeatability, Location, and Drift of Tool- 8.4.2 Original Location of the Tool-Setting System.
Setting System(s) To initially establish the position of the tool-setting system,
Turning centers are now supplied with tool-setting this Standard requires cutting a test part. This proposed
systems that allow for the automatic setting of tool off-
sets in the X and Z directions. (Other names, such as 34 The results obtained from this test will vary, depending upon the
tool-setters, tool-gaging, and tool-setting probes, are withdrawal distance from the tool-setting station and the machine
traverse speeds used. It is recommended, for this repeatability test,
also used.) On most turning machines, the Z direc- that the withdrawal distance be only 5 mm (approximately 0.2 in.) and
tion location is set with respect to some feature on the the traverse speed be kept at less than one-tenth maximum traverse.
97
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.4.2-1 Test Part for Determining the Location of a Tool-Setting System and Tool-Setting-System Drift
25 O .01
.01 A
0.80
31
(1.25 in.)
Bar stock
–A–
.01 A
0.80 0.80
25
Material: 6061-T6
test part is shown in Fig. 8.4.2-1. It consists of a small cyl- 8.4.3 Combination Test for Tool-Setting-System
inder, the cut portion of which is 25 mm (approximately Drift.35 The location of the tool-setting system with
1 in.) in diameter and 25 mm (approximately 1 in.) long. respect to the spindle centerline and an appropriate
These dimensions do not need to be precise. The mate- spindle surface will vary with the machine’s thermal
rial for this test part is 6061-T6 aluminum, like that used state. Exhaustive tests could be conducted analogous
for the previous tests for machine critical alignments (see to those given in para. 7.7. This Standard defines a sin-
para. 7.8). A part program is established to face the part, gle test that combines several of these effects. This test
turn the diameter, and face the small ledge near the spin- requires the machining of four test parts of 6061-T6 alu-
dle base. For the finish cut, a sharp single-crystal diamond minum using two tools. A drawing of the test part is
tool, polycrystalline diamond tool, or other appropriate given in Fig. 8.4.2-1. The duration of the test shall be the
insert with a small nose radius of approximately 0.5 mm duration established in previous spindle thermal stabil-
(approximately 0.020 in.) and low-tool-wear characteris- ity tests (para. 7.7.2) or 4 h, whichever is shorter. The
tics when machining aluminum shall be used. Before the tools used for this test are the same type as the tool used
finish cut is made, the tool position shall be sensed using for the original location of the tool-setting-system tests
the tool-setting system in both the X and the Z direc- described in para. 8.4.2.
tions. The locations in machine coordinates of the tool as The test normally proceeds as follows.36 The first part
reported by the tool-setting system should be recorded. is mounted following the procedure that will normally
The final cut should then be made on the part to a speci- be used in machining. The spindle is then set to run at
fied nominal diameter. Before the part is removed from 50% of maximum speed (revolutions per minute). The
the spindle, the Z offset between the step on the part and first part is faced. Then the tool is set following the
an appropriate feature on the chuck face, spindle nose, or normal procedures used when machining. Then the
spindle faceplate should be measured in the Z direction. diameter and face “A” of the part are cut. At the end
This distance should be compared to the Z reading of the of this machining cycle, the spindle is kept running at
tool-setting system to establish the correct offset. the same speed and the X and Z axes of the machine are
The diameter of the test part should then be measured. exercised over most of their travel (the part should not
Depending upon the application, this diameter may be be contacted), at 80% of rapid traverse, for a period of
measured on the machine with an appropriate micro one-fourth the duration of the test, or 1h, whichever is
meter or taken off the machine and measured using suit- shorter. At the end of this period, the spindle is stopped,
able metrology instrumentation of the requisite accuracy a new blank mounted, and the process of facing, tool-
for the application. The difference between the actual setting, and part diameter and step cutting repeated.
diameter and the programmed diameter should then After the second part is cut, a new tool is inserted into
be used to establish the correction to the X location of the tool holder (or the turret indexed to a new tool) and
the tool-setting system. For high-accuracy applications, the process repeated for two more parts. At the comple-
nominal differential expansion corrections should be tion of this test, all four test parts are measured for both
made (see section 4, Definitions). This should be entered
into the machine controller, taking care to get the appro- 35This test may include spindle thermal stability (see para. 7.6.2).
priate sign (the sign of the correction can be checked by 36For machines that cannot follow this procedure, a conceptually
remachining the same part to a smaller diameter and equivalent procedure shall be agreed upon between the User and the
repeating the test). Supplier and made part of the original machine specification.
98
ASME B5.57-2012
step height (Z direction) and diameters (X direction). The 8.6 Machine Performance as a Measuring Tool37
instrumentation chosen for the measurement is applica-
The following procedures have been designed to eval-
tion and machine-accuracy dependent. For example, on
uate the performance of a turning center, equipped with
many turning centers, micrometers and height gages
a suitable probing system, as a measuring machine. The
might be sufficiently adequate. On diamond turning
tests described in paras. 8.6.1 through 8.6.4 are meant to
centers, other instrumentation is required.
apply to machines equipped to measure in the point-to-
The data are analyzed as follows. The differences
point mode. Although machines equipped for part scan-
between the programmed diameters and the measured
ning are not currently commercially available, these tests
diameters are computed. The step height data are com-
could also be used on such machines, provided their data
puted similarly. The total range of the difference between
were acquired in the point-to-point measuring mode. The
the programmed and actual diameters is reported as the
results of these tests do not reflect on the performance of
X-axis tool system drift, and the total range of the dif-
the machine tool in a metal-cutting mode. The following
ference in programmed step heights versus actual step
tests address the issue of measuring performance in dis-
heights is reported as the Z-axis tool system drift. If
crete stages that depend on the level of software capabil-
desired, more than four test parts may be used to estab-
ity provided by the Supplier and the intended use of the
lish the statistical validity of the results. In this case,
measuring system. Testing shall be performed in a man-
groups of parts should be machined in rapid succession
ner that most closely represents the way in which the
at each of the time intervals previously defined and the
machine’s measurement system will be used after accept-
average diameter step height and standard uncertainties
ance. The tests described in paras. 8.6.1 through 8.6.4 are
computed for each interval.
in conceptual agreement with similar tests for coordinate
measuring machines, as outlined in ASME B89.4.1, and
8.5 CNC Performance Tests
machining centers, as outlined in ANSI B5.54. For three-
8.5.1 Test for Minimum Block Execution Time. A axis applications, ANSI B5.54 should be used. Prior to
part program shall be prepared to run the machine tool commencing these tests, the machine probe shall be cali-
in one axis only, using the maximum practical traverse brated according to the Supplier’s recommendations for
length and linear interpolation. This is normally the normal operation of the machine when measuring parts,
Z-axis on turning centers. The length of line segments using an artifact of a different size than the part that will
shall be set to a value one-fourth the “desired increment be machined and measured. Qualification on the test
length,” which should be the chordal length normally artifact to be used for this test is specifically excluded. It
used when contour cutting. For example, if the machine is also assumed that prior to performing these tests the
will be used to make parts with a normal chordal length machine performance has been assessed as described in
of 1 mm (approximately 0.04 in.), the test line segment section 7 of this Standard.
length shall be 0.25 mm (approximately 0.01 in.). The
part program shall have the feed rate programmed 8.6.1 General. Unless otherwise specified by the
in the first block, where it can be easily modified. The User, the measurement repeatability and feature mea
number of program blocks shall not exceed the “block surement accuracy tests shall be performed along the
look-ahead” limit of the control. spindle centerline and in the center of the work zone.
The program shall be run and the feed rate set at the The probe orientation and configuration shall repre-
maximum feed rate specified by the Supplier for this sent the configuration to be used after acceptance, with
test. The feed rate shall be measured by a time-recording a default stylus length of 50 mm (approximately 2 in.).
device or by a laser interferometer set in the feed rate Note that the value for measurement repeatability and
measurement mode. The measured feed rate and the feature measurement accuracy is dependent on posi-
programmed feed rate shall be compared. If the mea tion, probe configuration, and stylus length; therefore,
sured feed rate matches the programmed feed rate within the User may specify other locations and configurations
5%, the controller passes this test and the minimum block or several locations and configurations, if required, as
execution time, MBET, is computed as below. If the mea part of the original specification.
sured feed rate is less than 95% of the programmed feed In these measurement repeatability and feature mea
rate, the programmed feed rate shall be reduced, in rea- surement accuracy tests, the requirement in the definition
sonable increments, and the test repeated until a match of repeatability to sense the same quantity is satisfied by
(within 5%) between the measured feed rate and the measuring the center coordinates of the precision artifact
programmed feed rate occurs. The feed rate where the rigidly mounted in the spindle near the center of the work
measured and programmed feed rates agree, Vmax, shall zone. Ten determinations of the reference artifact’s center
be used to calculate the minimum block execution time, shall be made as rapidly as practical to determine mea
MBET. It is given by surement repeatability. For each axis, 4 times the stand-
MBET 5 INCR / Vmax
37
The tests described in para. 8.6 do not cover cases in which the
In no case shall the machine be run at an unsafe speed. machine is used as a comparator.
99
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.6.2-1 Approximate Location of Probed Points, Depending on Probe Configuration, When Measuring a
Machined Test Part
~25 mm ~5 mm ~25 mm ~5 mm
~25 mm ~25 mm
(a) (b)
ard uncertainty of the artifact’s center coordinates shall be should be a dimensionally stable metal capable of holding
reported as the measurement repeatability for that axis. an accurate surface finish. A thermometer conforming to
Machine measurement repeatability shall be reported on the requirements of section 9 shall be appropriately ther-
a per-axis basis. To determine the feature measurement mally contacted with the test part in a position that does
accuracy, the same data shall be used; however, these data not interfere with probing, and a second thermometer
shall be evaluated by the software to determine the size placed in a position designated by the Supplier as being
of the artifact being measured. If a data point(s) obtained representative of the mean scale temperature. The two
during this test appears to be an outlier (see section 4, diameters of the test part shall be measured 10 times each
Definitions), this point may not be simply discarded when using at least 10 points along each profile of the test part.39
either defining the standard uncertainty or the dimensions In the case of machines capable of measuring past the spin-
of the artifact. Rather, the complete test shall be repeated dle centerline, the diameters of the test part shall be meas-
and the data from a complete test evaluated. ured 10 times each using at least 5 points along each profile
For machines that have the option of operating in a of the test part. The step height of the test part, indicated
radius mode or a diameter mode, all tests shall be per- in the figure, shall be measured 10 times using at least
formed and reported in the radius mode. For machines 5 points on each face. Contact points for each set shall be as
that operate only in a diameter mode, all results computed widely spaced as possible. From these data, two average
as diameters shall be divided by 2 and reported as radii.38 measured radii, Rp1 and Rp2, corrected for temperature, and
The User is cautioned that it is extremely important the average step height, Zp0, corrected for temperature, shall
that the measuring stylus be on center in the Y direction be computed. The equations are as follows:
for the measurement of diameters or radii. The error
made when the stylus is off center while measuring a Rp1 5 RM1[1 2 as(Ts 2 20) 1 a(T 2 20)]
diameter is given by
Rp2 5 RM2[1 2 as(Ts 2 20) 1 a(T 2 20)]
2(offset)
error 5 and
DIA 2
Zp0 5 ZM0[(1 2 as(Ts 2 20) 1 a(T 2 20)]
where
DIA 5 the part diameter where
offset 5 the distance above or below center RMi 5 the measured radii
T 5 the average temperature of the point selected as
8.6.2 Measurement Accuracy Where Software Allows representative of the mean scale temperature
for Only 1D Measurements. For this test, a test part shall Ts 5 the average temperature of the test part dur-
be machined in the spindle. The part is User-selectable, ing measurement
with two diameters not greater than 80% and 40%, respec- ZM0 5 the measured step height
tively, of the maximum swing. The default size for the part a 5 the nominal thermal expansion coefficient of
is given in Fig. 8.6.2-1. The material is not specified but the machine scales
as 5 the thermal expansion coefficient of the test part
38Diametrical measurements are preferred. Radial measurements
are susceptible to thermal drift of the spindle centerline with 39This test part will be measured in a metrology laboratory and
respect to the probe location. thus serves as the calibration gage for checking machine accuracy.
100
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. 8.6.3-1 Approximate Location of Probed Points, Depending on Probe Configuration, When Measuring
a Test Sphere
or
The mean values and their standard uncertainties are Measurement repeatability shall be reported as
computed following standard procedures (see section 4). • measurement repeatability, MR(X): 4 times the
Measurement repeatability shall be computed as standard uncertainty of the mean X coordinate
• X measurement repeatability, MR(X): 4 times the • measurement repeatability, MR(Z): 4 times the
largest standard uncertainty of either radius standard uncertainty of the Z mean coordinate
• Z measurement repeatability, MR(Z): 4 times the • measurement repeatability, MR(R): 4 times the
standard uncertainty of the step height standard uncertainty of the mean radius
The test part shall be measured using dimensional- Note that these repeatabilities are defined as the uncer-
measuring equipment at 20°C (68°F) in a metrology lab. tainties obtained from the calculated values for 10 sets of
The measuring equipment should be suitable for the readings.
machine accuracy specification. The feature measure- The spindle shall be rotated approximately 180 deg
ment accuracy shall be computed as follows: with the reference sphere remaining rigidly attached.
(a) The feature measurement accuracy in the X direc- Ten more sets of at least 10 readings shall be made on the
tion, FM(X), shall be reported as the largest of the dif- opposite side of the reference sphere in a similar manner.
ferences between either of the average radii measured The X and Z coordinates of the center of the ball and the
on the machine, corrected for temperature, and the radii radius of the ball shall be computed for each set of read-
measured in the metrology lab. ings. From these computed results, the average measured
(b) The feature measurement accuracy in the Z direc- radius, corrected for temperature, Rp180, and the average
tion, FM(Z), shall be reported as the difference between X and Z coordinates, Xp180 and Zp180, and their standard
the average step measured on the machine, corrected uncertainties shall be computed.
for temperature, and the step height measured in the The feature measurement accuracy, FMA, in both direc-
metrology lab. tions shall be computed as
There is no test for probe lobing for a machine of this
configuration. FMA(X) 5 max.(|Rp0 2 Rsphere|, |Rp180 2 Rsphere|)
1 |Xp0 – Xp180|
8.6.3 Measurement Accuracy Where Software Allows
for 2D or 3D Measurements. A 25-mm (approximately FMA(Z) 5 max.(|Rp0 2 Rsphere|, |Rp180 2 Rsphere|)
1-in.) calibrated reference sphere, conforming to the where
requirements of section 9, shall be mounted in the main Rsphere5 calibrated radius of the gage at 20°C (68°F)
spindle such that it is readily accessible for machine For each reading in each of the 10 sets of data, a radius
probing. A thermometer conforming to the require- is calculated using the average computed center loca-
ments of section 9 shall be appropriately thermally tion. For each set of data, the minimum point radius is
contacted with the test sphere in a position that does subtracted from the maximum point radius. The largest
not interfere with probing, and a second thermometer value among these is the specification zone for circular
placed in a position designated by the Supplier as being profile measurement accuracy, CPMA.40
representative of the mean scale temperature. Ten sets
of at least 10 readings shall be made on the reference 8.6.4 Linear Measurement Accuracy. The proce-
sphere. Contact points for each set shall be as widely dure described in this paragraph represents a mini-
spaced as possible, as shown in Fig. 8.6.3-1. X and Z mum requirement to ensure conformance to linear
coordinates of the center of the ball and the radius of measurement accuracy specifications. Linear measure-
the ball shall be computed for each set of readings, ment accuracy can be considered a combination of the
using the software supplied with the machine. From
these computed results, an average measured radius,
40A number of error sources contribute to circular profile
corrected for temperature, Rp0, and the average X and
measurement accuracy, such as probe lobing, thermal errors,
Z center coordinates, Xp0 and Zp0, and their standard geometric errors, and the CNC’s ability to repeatably latch the
uncertainties shall be computed. probe’s interrupt signal.
101
ASME B5.57-2012
positioning accuracy of the machine, the ability of the 8.7.3 Production Parts. Where the machine is to
measurement system to repeat a measurement, and be used in producing a single part or a family of parts,
any offsets introduced by probe performance. Since the the best machine test to determine machine capability
bidirectional systematic deviation of positioning of an would be a run of production parts that are as close to
axis (para. 7.2.7.1) and the feature measurement accu- the production part as possible. In this case, the machine
racy (para. 8.6.2 or 8.6.3) have been previously meas- shall be started and allowed 1 h for warm-up. The first
ured, the values obtained for these measurements shall part shall be cut and checked and any corrections to the
be used in the computation of the linear measurement tooling or programming made at that time. An addi-
accuracy. tional 6 to 10 parts shall also be cut over a 2-day period,
The linear measurement accuracy for each linear allowing the machine to settle into thermal stability.
axis, LMA(X) and LMA(Z), shall be reported. It is the The machine shall be kept running between the various
sum of the measurement repeatability, MR, for an axis test cuts, in a dry cycle, to increase thermal stability of
(para. 8.6.2 or 8.6.3); the feature measurement accuracy, the machine, without requiring an excessive amount of
FMA, for that axis (para. 8.6.2 and 8.6.3); the spindle material to be cut and inspected. Further tests shall be
thermal stability, Dx or Dz (para. 7.7.2); and the bidirec- negotiated between the User and the Supplier and be
tional systematic deviation of positioning of an axis, E part of the original machine specification.
(para. 7.2.7.1), minus the bidirectional systematic devia-
tion of positioning of an axis multiplied by the radius of 8.8 Parametric Tests
the artifact, RA, used in the feature measurement accu-
racy test and divided by the axis length, L, of the axis of To obtain more complete information regarding
interest.41 That is the machine, some Users may desire to perform com-
plete parametric testing, measuring angular error
LMA(X) 5 MR(X) 1 FMA(X) 1 Dx 1 E(X) 2 E(X) terms other than yaw (para. 7.4), and also measuring
3 (RA / LX) straightness errors. If these error measurements are
performed, the User should follow the instrumenta-
LMA(Z) 5 MR(Z) 1 FMA(Z) 1 Dz 1 E(Z) 2 E(Z) tion guidelines for these tests given in ANSI B5.54. The
3 (RA / LZ) measurement procedure and data analysis should,
however, follow the procedure given for positioning
accuracy and repeatability of linear axes as specified in
8.7 Machining Test Parts
para. 7.2. This includes lines of measurement, measur-
8.7.1 General. Machining test parts have an impor- ing intervals, and measurement procedures, including
tant role in the acceptance of machine tools. However, data analysis. The data should be reported with the
using such test parts alone to determine machine accuracy correct titles, as has been done for the measurement
and acceptance is not recommended. There are many of angular error motion (yaw) in para. 7.4. Note that
variables that can affect the test part in machining tests for straightness measurements, a straight line align-
that have no direct relation to the machine tool. Examples ment term must be removed before data analysis, as is
include material properties, tool wear, coolant flow and described in ANSI B5.54.
selection, temperature fluctuations in the workpiece,
programming errors, and fixture-induced distortions.
9 TEST EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
Thus, machine positioning accuracies and alignment are
best tested by the procedures outlined in this Standard. 9.1 General
Two types of tests are discussed in paras. 8.7.2 and 8.7.3,
The instruments specified in this Standard are for
respectively.
recommendation only. Other instruments with simi-
lar capabilities and accuracy are acceptable for use with
8.7.2 Standard Test Parts. A large number of stand- this Standard. It is recommended that the contributions
ard test parts have been generated as the result of dec- to measurement uncertainty of instruments and artifacts
ades of work by other standards committees. If a test being used be sufficiently small such that the resulting
part is required, an appropriate standard part should expanded (k 5 2) measurement uncertainty, U, is less
be chosen and made part of the original machine spec- than an appropriate fraction of the specified value for the
ification. This part should contain tests for contouring performance parameter being measured. Unless other-
accuracy, threading, and boring, as well as any other wise specified, one-eighth is the appropriate fraction for
machining operations that are of importance to the performance parameters that are derived from a range
machine user. or envelope of values (e.g., positioning accuracy and
repeatability, straightness, and circular deviations), and
one-fourth is the appropriate fraction for performance
41The number reported is highly approximate and is intended parameters specified as a maximum deviation from nomi-
only to give a worst-case estimate. nal (e.g., squareness and parallelism). In paras. 9.2 through
102
ASME B5.57-2012
9.11, simplified guidelines are given to approximate this accuracy test shall be calibrated for their diameter to
condition for individual cases. All instrument and arti- within one-fourth of the unidirectional repeatability, lin-
fact calibrations shall be traceable to a national metrology ear axes, of the machine.
institute such as the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST). Calibration frequency shall conform 9.4.4 Precision Disks. The precision disk(s) used
to standards related to the instrument or artifact used. for the contouring test shall be calibrated to an accuracy
of one-fourth of the unidirectional repeatability, linear
9.2 Temperature axes.
The time constant of thermometers shall be no more
9.4.5 Telescoping Ball Bars. The balls on the end of
than one-tenth of the cycle time of the highest frequency
the telescoping ball bar shall be spherical to within one-
component of the temperature variation of interest in a
fourth of the unidirectional repeatability, linear axes, of
test. The time constant is the time required for the ther-
the machine tool and equal in diameter to within one-
mometer to indicate 63.2% of its final change due to a
fourth of the unidirectional repeatability, linear axes,
step change in temperature (see ANSI B89.6.2 for fur-
of the machine. The length variation due to sag of the
ther clarification). The resolution of thermometers shall
telescoping ball bar in any position shall be less than
be no greater than one-tenth of the amplitude of the
the resolution of the machine being tested, and the
lowest-amplitude component of temperature variation
resolution of the ball bar indicator shall be equal to or
of interest in a test.
better than the machine resolution. Any ball bar system
Thermometers used for nominal differential expan-
conforming to the requirements of this Standard shall
sion correction or laser wavelength correction shall be
state, as part of the output data, the angular interval
calibrated by suitable means to an accuracy of 0.1°C
used for ball bar length measurement during circular
over the temperature range of use.
contouring. The ball bar shall be calibrated to an accu-
racy of one-fourth of the unidirectional repeatability,
9.3 Relative Vibration
linear axes.
Relative vibration shall be measured using a
high-resolution, undamped displacement indicator. 9.4.6 Displacement Indicators. Displacement indi-
Resolution of 0.1m (approximately 0.000004 in.) or bet- cators used for the ETVE test, machine thermal tests,
ter is recommended. Such indicators should also have a critical alignment, rotary axis alignments, tool-change
bandwidth of at least 1 kHz. repeatability, and repeatability in drift of tool-set-
ting systems, as specified in this Standard, shall be
9.4 Displacement calibrated to within one-fourth of the unidirectional
repeatability, linear axes, of the machine. Capacitance
9.4.1 Laser Interferometers. Laser interferometers
probes, laser interferometers, linear variable differ-
shall have a frequency stability of such that this long-
ential transformers (including air-bearing types43),
term stability represents an error less than one-fourth
fiber-optic proximity sensors, dial gages, or other
of the unidirectional repeatability, linear axes, of the
developed instrumentation that accurately measures
machine (in meters), divided by the length (in meters) of
displacement throughout the range of machine dis-
the longest machine axis. The resolution of such a sys-
placement variation are acceptable. The bandwidth of
tem shall be better than one-fourth of the unidirectional
the probe(s) to be used for these tests is unspecified,
repeatability, linear axes.42
as these tests are sufficiently slow that a bandwidth of
a few hertz is sufficient. Users are cautioned to ensure
9.4.2 Grid Encoders. Grid encoders used for con-
that the bandwidth of the indicator being used is suf-
touring performance testing shall be calibrated with an
ficient for the intended purpose.
error of less than one-fourth of the unidirectional repeat-
ability, linear axes, of the machine.
9.5 Angle
9.4.3 Precision Reference Ball(s). The precision 9.5.1 Autocollimators. Autocollimators used for
reference ball(s) in the tests for ETVE, tool-change and the positioning accuracy and repeatability, rotary axes,
turret repeatability, and machine performance as a meas- and the periodic angle positioning accuracy shall be
uring tool shall be spherical to within one-fourth of the calibrated to within one-fourth of the unidirectional
unidirectional repeatability, linear axes, of the machine repeatability, rotary axes, of the axis to be measured.
tool. Reference balls used for the feature measurement Calibration shall be performed on a regular basis or after
any suspected instrumental damage.
42Users concerned with the suitability and accuracy of a laser system
for their application should contact the Precision Engineering
Division, NIST, 100 Bureau Drive, M/S 8200, Gaithersburg, MD 43Air-bearing LVDTs are preferred for the part-trace tests on high-
20899-8200, http://www.nist.gov. precision machines.
103
ASME B5.57-2012
9.5.2 Polygons. Polygons used for the positioning 9.9 Spindle Error Measurement
accuracy and repeatability, rotary axes, shall be cali-
At the time of this writing, the only suitable indica-
brated to within one-fourth of the unidirectional repeat-
tors for spindle error measurement are high-bandwidth
ability, rotary axes, of the axis to be measured.
capacitance gages. Such gages shall be calibrated to within
one-fourth of the unidirectional repeatability, linear axes,
9.5.3 Indexing Tables. Indexing tables used for test- and shall have a bandwidth of at least 10 kHz. The User
ing shall be calibrated to within one-fourth of the unidi- shall specify for particular applications if a higher band-
rectional repeatability, rotary axes. Self-calibration is an width is required. Other indicators of equivalent band-
acceptable method for traceability. width may be substituted, with the warning that some
such indicators may be sensitive to parameters other than
9.5.4 Rotary Encoders. Rotary encoders shall be displacement, and this condition must be investigated.44
calibrated to within one-fourth of the unidirectional
repeatability, rotary axes. Self-calibration is an accept- 9.9.1 Commercial Instruments. Commercial instru-
able method for traceability. ments that measure spindle error motion shall have sen-
sors that conform to the requirements for spindle error
9.5.5 Angle-Measuring Interferometers. Several measurement given in para. 7.6. Furthermore, such
manufacturers offer differential interferometers for instruments shall provide documentation to ensure that
the measurement of small angles. For the use of these any internal algorithms conform to the measurement
interferometers, the instrument manufacturer’s recom- procedures as described in this Standard.
mendations and constants regarding the conversion of
differential displacement to angle shall be followed, with 9.10 Straightness Measurements
particular attention paid to the nonlinear corrections
required for large angles. Special attention should also be 9.10.1 Indicators. Displacement indicators for
paid to the alignment of the optical elements when such straightness measurements shall conform to the require-
alignment is performed by the User. ments of para. 9.4.6.
9.5.6 Differential Levels. Differential levels shall 9.10.2 Straightedges. Staightedges used for the
be calibrated to within one-fourth of the unidirectional straightness measurements shall be calibrated to within
repeatability, angular positioning. one-fourth of the straightness requirement of the axis to
be measured. Self-calibration (reversal) is an acceptable
9.6 Pressure method for traceability.
The accuracy and repeatability of the pressure sensor
9.11 Test Part Measurement
used for correction of the laser interferometer shall be at
least 1 mm Hg (approximately 0.019 psi). If a coordinate measuring machine is used for a test
part measurement, it shall conform to the requirements
9.7 Humidity of ASME B89.4.1 and have a working tolerance for volu-
Humidity measurement for correction of the laser metric performance less than one-fourth of the specifi-
interferometer wavelength shall be sufficiently accu- cation zone for the specific machining test(s). If other
rate that it contributes no more than one-fourth of the inspection methods are used, all instruments, gages, and
unidirectional repeatability, linear axes, to laser meas- procedures required for these measurements shall have
urement error. calibrations to ensure that individually the error compo-
nent that they introduce shall be at least one-tenth of the
specified measurement accuracy for the test part.
9.8 Utility Air
The utility air pressure shall be measured using the 44 In particular, inductive sensors are also sensitive to the
gages supplied with the machine, unless otherwise metallurgy of the mandrel or ball used as a reference artifact when
specified as part of the original machine specification. testing spindles.
104
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX A
GUIDE FOR USING THE DRAFT TURNING CENTER STANDARD
A-1 GENERAL • spindle error motions, fixed sensitive direction

(para. 7.6.3)
The primary purpose of this Standard is to aid in pur- • composite thermal error (para. 7.7.4)
chasing of machines to specification. When purchasing a Note that the composite thermal error test requires 4 h to
new machine, the User should clearly specify the desired perform. After this test, the machine must be allowed to
machine classification (Form 1 in section 1) and the come to equilibrium before other testing can proceed.
machine performance (Forms 4 and 5 in section 1). The
entries in Forms 4 and 5 shall be considered the speci- A-1.2 Recommended Tests: Day 2
fication zones for the purchased machine. If desired,
the User may also describe the proposed machine envi- The recommended Day 2 tests require the use of a
ronment on Form 2; however, it is the responsibility of laser interferometer.
the Supplier to provide these environmental guidelines • positioning accuracy and repeatability, X-axis
with the machine quote. When the machine is received, (para. 7.2)
it should be tested, and, subject to environmental derat- • angular error motion, X-axis (para. 7.4)
ing, the measured values for the tests described should • positioning accuracy and repeatability, Z-axis
be less than or equal to the specification zones in the (para. 7.2)
original machine specification. Note that the machine • angular error motion, Z-axis (para. 7.4)
should be tested in the environment in which it will be • thermal distortion caused by moving linear axes
used. Testing at the Supplier’s plant can be useful but is (para. 7.7.3)
not a substitute for testing after machine installation. Again, after completion of these tests, the machine will
The tests described in this Standard are in logical be in a warmed-up thermal state and needs to be allowed
sequence but not necessarily the most rapid sequence to come to equilibrium.
in machine testing. The most rapid sequence groups
tests in terms of similar instrumentation. The following A-1.3 Recommended Tests: Day 3
is a suggested procedure for testing that the Committee The recommended Day 3 tests require a calibrated tel-
currently believes would minimize the testing time. escoping ball bar, a test part, and tooling or appropriate
Only the testing of a simple two-axis lathe, with a sin- straightedges and indicators, and a power meter.
gle work spindle, is covered. Further, it is assumed that • contouring performance using circular tests
programs and all necessary fixtures have been prepared (para. 7.9)
in advance. • critical alignments (para. 7.8)
• spindle idle run loss test (para. 7.10.2)
A-1.1 Recommended Tests: Day 1 • multifunction cycle test (para. 7.11)
Tests should be performed in the order given below.
The recommended Day 1 tests use a displacement indi- A-1.4 Recommended Tests: Day 4
cator nest as shown in Fig. 6.2.1.4-2. The Day 4 tests require at least material and tooling. If
• relative vibration test (para. 6.3) other test parts are specified, a metrology laboratory for
• ETVE test (para. 6.2.1) part measurement is required.
• structural motion test (para. 7.6.2) • chatter limits test and full torque test (para. 7.10.3)
• spindle thermal stability test (para. 7.7.2) • other test parts, as specified
105
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX B
1-DAY TEST FOR MACHINE PERFORMANCE
B-1 PURPOSE described in para. 7.9.2, 7.9.3, or 7.9.4, whichever is

applicable. The data shall be analyzed as described in
When it is desired to estimate machine performance para. 7.9.5.
within 1 day, the following tests, taken from the body of the
Standard, are recommended. These tests are for a machine B-3.1 Critical Alignments
with only two linear axes and a single work spindle.
Machines with more than two axes require more testing. The squareness of the cross-slide (X-axis) with the
To perform these tests in 1 day requires advance prepara- work spindle axis (often a C-axis) shall be measured
tion of test equipment and machine programming. as described in para. 7.8.2. The parallelism of the lon-
gitudinal slide (Z-axis) with the work spindle (C-axis)
in the X–Z plane shall be measured as described in
B-2 POSITIONING ACCURACY AND REPEATABILITY,
para. 7.8.3.
LINEAR AXES; AND ANGULAR ERROR
MOTIONS, LINEAR AXES
B-3.2 Structural Motion
The positioning accuracy and repeatability and the The structural motion of the main spindle shall be
angular error motion of both machine axes should be measured in accordance with the procedures given in
measured following the procedures outlined in paras. 7.2 para. 7.6.2.
and 7.4. The data shall be analyzed as described in
paras. 7.2.7 and 7.4.1. B-3.3 Spindle Thermal Stability Test
The thermal stability of the main spindle shall be
B-3 CONTOURING PERFORMANCE USING
measured in accordance with the procedures given in
CIRCULAR TESTS
para. 7.7.2.
The machine’s contouring performance shall be mea
sured using a telescoping ball bar, using the procedure
106
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX C
THERMAL ENVIRONMENT VERIFICATION TESTS
C-1 PURPOSE continued about the machine as this constitutes part of

the User-supplied environment. With these constraints,
The performance of machine tools is strongly affected the tests specified in paras. C-2.1 through C-2.4 should
by the detailed characteristics of the thermal environ- be performed.
ment that surrounds them. Parameters of importance
include cooling medium (usually, but not always, air), C-2.1 Velocity
velocity of cooling medium, frequency and amplitude
of temperature variations of the cooling medium, mean Since air is the most widely used cooling medium in
temperature of that medium, and temperature gradi- dimensional metrology laboratories, the following tests
ents within that medium. The effects of these param- are structured for measuring air velocity. If some other
eters and others are discussed in detail in ANSI B89.6.2. medium is to be used for heat transfer, then methods
It is the thesis of ANSI B89.6.2 and of this Standard for testing its properties should be part of the machine
that currently it is not possible to specify a thermal specifications.
environment that will ensure a specific value for the For the measurement of velocity, several types of
expanded thermal uncertainty, UT(L), para. 6.2.2. For instruments are suitable. These instruments and a dis-
a thorough discussion of the technical situation, the cussion of the measurement problems are given in
reader is referred to ANSI B89.6.2. The purpose of this Tables B-1 and B-2 of ANSI B89.6.2. The instruments
Nonmandatory Appendix is, however, to specify pro- used should be properly calibrated, and the test per-
cedures and responsibilities for testing the thermal sonnel should be aware of both the limitations of their
environment in the event the ETVE, as measured in instruments and their operation.
para. 6.2.1, is excessive. That is, the expanded thermal Using appropriate instruments, the velocity of the
uncertainty exceeds that required for the machine, and cooling medium around the machine shall be measured.
the machine User contends that his environment meets Measurements shall be made at the corners of a cubic
the Supplier’s parameters. For the purpose of this volume that completely encompasses the machine, and
Standard, these parameters include cooling medium the velocity shall be computed as the average of these
velocity, nominal mean temperature, frequency and eight measurements.
amplitude range of temperature variation, and hori-
zontal and vertical temperature gradients. The follow- C-2.2 Mean Ambient Temperature
ing tests are designed to measure these parameters for The mean ambient temperature shall be measured
the purposes of assuring conformance to the Supplier’s using a thermometer with characteristics as specified
parameters.1 in section 9. The mean ambient temperature shall be
the time average temperature of five readings taken at
C-2 METHOD OF TEST the center of the machine work zone over a period of
time spanning the longest test. (The use of five read-
To ensure that the environment itself is tested rather ings, rather than two, for the measurement of the mean
than any characteristic of the machine tool supplied, ambient temperature is justified here for diagnostic
these tests should be conducted with the machine tool, purposes.)
support computers (if supplied), and any other auxil-
iary equipment related to the machine tool, turned off C-2.3 Frequency and Amplitude of Temperature
for a period of 24 h preceding the test, to allow ade- Variation
quate soak out of any thermal gradients induced by
the machine tool. Normal activity, however, should be The range of frequencies of temperature variation and
the amplitude of those variations shall be determined
1 This Nonmandatory Appendix discusses only measurements of by measuring and continuously recording the tempera-
air temperature, and the User is warned that sometimes thermal ture at the center of the work zone over a period of time
effects are caused by coupling of infrared and visible radiation to the that should, at a minimum, be representative of a daily
machine. If the environment appears to conform to the Supplier’s cycle (i.e., 24 h). The maximum peak-to-valley temper-
parameters after performing the tests in these appendices and the
ETVE of the machine is still not within specification, radiation ature variation shall be determined from the recorded
coupling should be seriously examined. data. The data shall be analyzed to determine the range
107
ASME B5.57-2012
of temperature variation for a daily cycle and an hourly between the measurement point of these extreme tem-
cycle, subject to the condition that isolated disturbances peratures. The horizontal gradient is defined as the
that are shorter in duration than the minimum period difference between the maximum and the minimum
(maximum frequency) specified by the Supplier shall temperatures along any horizontal line through the
be ignored. The daily variation shall be defined as the machine divided by the distance between the measure-
maximum range of temperature readings in 24 h, sub- ment points of these extreme temperatures. These read-
ject to the condition on transients mentioned above. The ings shall be taken over a period of at least as long as the
amplitude of the superimposed hourly cycle shall be longest acceptance test (or 24 h) and the greatest value of
defined as the maximum range of temperature variation the gradient reported.
in any 1-h interval, subject to the same condition.
C-3 ANALYSIS
C-2.4 Thermal Gradients If any of the parameters measured in section C-2
Thermal gradients shall be determined by measuring exceed the Supplier’s specified parameters, it shall be
the temperature at the extreme corners of the machine the responsibility of the User to correct the problem to
in a horizontal plane and also at the highest and lowest conform with those specified parameters, or else to be
locations of the machine. These temperatures shall be willing to accept the performance derating described
defined as the average value of no less than five readings in section 6 of this Standard. If the parameters so mea
over an interval of 10 min. The vertical gradient shall be sured meet the Supplier’s specified parameters, it shall
determined to be the difference between the maximum be the Supplier’s responsibility to correct the perform-
and the minimum temperatures anywhere along a ver- ance of the machine tool to meet the specified working
tical line through the machine divided by the distance tolerances.
108
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX D
SEISMIC VIBRATION VERIFICATION TESTS
D-1 SCOPE acceleration are more appropriate parameters for meas-

uring machine site vibration. Displacement may be suit-
The purpose of this Nonmandatory Appendix is to able for specific situations, but it is not recommended
recommend vibration measurement instrumentation and for general vibration measurements.
procedures for measuring vibration at machine instal-
lation sites. Vibration levels shall be measured at the D-3.1.2 Ordinate Units. The use of time or frequency
proposed machine site(s) to compare to allowable site for the ordinate depends on the acceptance criteria format
vibration limits established by the machine Supplier. This of the machine Supplier. Time-based criteria are referred
document also defines the instrumentation and measure- to as a “time history,” which provides measurement of
ment procedures to establish vibration on the machine for transient or very low-frequency vibratory events, such
additional analysis. This Nonmandatory Appendix does as beat signals. The frequency domain allows measure-
not address the determination of vibration sources or ment over a very short time range, which provides the
reduction of vibration levels. This task is usually involved ability to diagnose many dynamic events.
and requires the knowledge of vibration specialists.
D-3.2 Criteria Format
D-2 DEFINITIONS
As defined in para. 5.3, the Supplier shall provide, as
To the extent possible, this document is intended part of the machine specification, a statement of accept-
to be self-defining. It is written for individuals with able vibration. The criteria should be provided by the
an engineering background. Definitions for specific Supplier or listed as part of the machine specification
vibration terminology may be found in the Institute form (Form 2; see section 1), if used. At least two criteria
of Environmental Sciences and Technology Document format options are presented: frequency response func-
IEST-RP-CC024.1, “Measuring and Reporting Vibration tion and time history. The supplied acceptance criteria
in Microelectronics Facilities.” shall define the format to present the vibration data for
ease of comparison.
D-3 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
D-3.2.1 Frequency Response Function Criteria. Freq
The machine Supplier shall provide site vibration cri- uency response function criteria are specified as a vibration
teria of acceptability. Below these levels the machine can amplitude as a function at specific frequencies. The criteria
operate successfully, and above these levels problems are usually presented as allowable vibration amplitude ver-
may occur. Each machine Supplier has different formats sus frequency, in hertz. The frequency range may vary from
and levels of acceptance. The type of vibration measure- Supplier to Supplier. In general, seismic vibrations are appli-
ments to be taken depends on format and vibration units cable over a range of 0 Hz (DC) to 100 Hz. Vibration levels
specified by the machine Supplier. Based on the type of have a large dynamic range, and it is sometimes helpful to
criteria, the vibration specialist should determine the present amplitude data in logarithmic scale. If decibels are
necessary measurement units, frequency range, mea used, the standard reference values shall be used.
surement locations, and instrumentation.
D-3.2.2 Time History. Time history measurements
D-3.1 Criteria Units represent the vibration during the time period of inter-
Vibration is characterized by amplitude versus time est. The Supplier should specify a maximum peak-to-
or frequency. The amplitude can be defined in displace- peak acceptable vibration level and a time period over
ment, velocity, acceleration, or power spectral density. which it applies. The vibration amplitude is typically
Depending on the type of criteria, the amplitude ordi- specified in units of velocity or acceleration.
nate can be defined in either the time domain or fre-
quency domain. D-4 INSTRUMENTATION
D-3.1.1 Amplitude Units. Since the machine is a cut- This section describes various instruments required to
ting tool, units of displacement are most useful in rela- perform on-site vibration measurements. Various types
tion to machine performance. However, velocity and of sensors, signal conditioners, recorders, computer
109
ASME B5.57-2012
programs, and signal analyzers are available for acquiring readily available. Note that using a data recorder, as
these data. This section is not intended to single out any specified in para. D-4.3.2, requires the use of an FFT ana-
particular equipment manufacturer; its purpose is to rec- lyzer after the data are acquired. It is the User’s respon-
ommend types of equipment that meet the requirements of sibility to understand the instrument, its capabilities,
this Standard. and its limitations.
The following are guidelines for FFT analysis configu-
D-4.1 Transducers ration and specifications:
Many types of transducers exist for various types of (a) Noise Floor. 100 dB/√Hz.
vibration measurements. The measurements specified (b) A/D Resolution. The resolution of the analog-to-
in this Standard require a seismic accelerometer or a digital (A/D) converter should be at least 12 bits. The
specific type of velocity transducer. better analyzers have a 16-bit A/D resolution.
(c) Dynamic Range. The dynamic range should be at
D-4.1.1 Seismic Accelerometers. The two most least 70 dB. The better spectrum analyzers have higher
important requirements for the accelerometer are fre- dynamic range.
quency response and sensitivity. Site vibration mea (d) Frequency Resolution. This parameter, as it applies
surements generally require low frequency and high to the analyzer, is denoted in number of lines over which
sensitivity. The minimum frequency response linearity the analysis range is divided. Most analyzers have
should be less than 1 Hz, preferably 0.5 Hz. The fre- selectable resolution from 100 lines to 1 600 lines. The res-
quency response should be greater than 100 Hz. The olution, in hertz, is calculated by dividing the frequency
sensitivity of the accelerometer should be 10 V/g or range by the number of lines. For example, a frequency
greater, where g is equal to 9.8 m/s2 (386 in./sec2). range of 0 Hz to 100 Hz acquired with a 400-line analysis
has a 0.25-Hz (100/400) resolution. The frequency reso-
D-4.1.2 Velocity Transducers. These sensors are lution used must be compatible with the resolution of
also referred to as geophones. The sensitivity of the geo- the frequency response criteria. If the criteria are defined
phone should be 4 V/cm/s (approximately 10 V/in./ at every 1 Hz, the data must be acquired with a 1-Hz
sec) or greater. The frequency response linearity require- resolution. For example, 0 Hz to 100 Hz criteria defined
ment of the velocity transducer is the same as for the every 1/2 Hz would need to be acquired with 200 lines
accelerometer, 0.5 Hz to 100 Hz. of resolution. This Standard recommends that data from
0 Hz to 100 Hz be acquired with 400 lines of resolution,
D-4.2 Amplifiers and Signal Conditioners producing 0.25-Hz resolution data. The overall fre-
quency resolution is also dependent on the transducer
The transducers require amplifiers and signal condi- frequency response. The procedure above should be fol-
tioners. Most seismic accelerometers require an ampli- lowed, and modified only when the machine Supplier’s
fier, but some models may have built-in electronics that specification requests otherwise.
do not require signal conditioning. Velocity transdu (e) Antialiasing Filter. This filter prevents incorrect
cers may require amplification and signal condition- reporting of frequency components due to undersam-
ing, depending upon the sensitivity and signal-to-noise pling of higher-frequency signals. This filter is found
ratio. It is the responsibility of the vibration specialist to on most (if not all) FFT analyzers. It should always be
use the proper signal conditioners. used.
(f) Averaging. Most analyzers have an averaging fea-
D-4.3 Signal Recording and Analysis Instruments ture. It is used to reduce the effects of transient events
The type of instrumentation required for signal such as personnel or vehicular activity. Ten averages
recording and analysis depends on the type of criteria should be taken for all measurements. Some spectrum
and format that have been provided by the machine analyzers have various types of averaging functions,
Supplier. The frequency response criteria require a fast such as linear, root mean square, peak hold, or exponen-
fourier transform (FFT) dynamic signal analyzer or a tial. Linear or summation averaging should be used.
digital recorder. Time history data can be acquired with (g) Window Functions. This feature is used to force a
an oscilloscope, a digital recorder, or an FFT analyzer. generalized vibration signal into discrete time-domain
periods. When window functions are not used, the fre-
D-4.3.1 FFT Signal Analyzers. This type of analyzer quency response of the vibratory signal is incorrectly
is the most sophisticated means of measuring vibration distributed throughout the frequency range. There are
because it provides the greatest amount of information many types of window functions. The most popular are
about the vibration signal. In most cases, this additional Hanning, flat top, and uniform. Other windows pro-
information is necessary to understand the vibration vide excellent amplitude accuracy and poor frequency
environment. Many types of FFT analyzers exist, from accuracy, and vice versa. The Hanning should be used
many different manufacturers. One- and two-channel for all measurements specified in this Nonmandatory
units, handheld devices, and PC-based formats are Appendix.
110
ASME B5.57-2012
D-4.3.2 Data Recorders. For ease of gathering vibra- D-5.4 Acquiring and Recording Data
tion data in the field, the use of a multichannel data
Vibration measurements should be made during nor-
recorder is useful and convenient. Such an instrument
mal operations of the facility. Nearby equipment that
allows for three or more channels of data to be recorded
will be operating when the machine is expected to be
simultaneously, while providing a permanent record
used should be running during the vibration testing.
for archives and verbal data annotation during specific
A written test log or voice channel on a data recorder
events. Additionally, the recorder allows a record of the
should be maintained by the individual performing the
real-time response, which can be most useful. The data
test so that any abnormal events during the test can be
can then be processed at a later date using in-house data
recorded. A test should be repeated if abnormal events
reduction techniques such as the FFT analyzers speci-
occur. Normal vehicular traffic should not be excluded.
fied in para. D-4.3.1. The recorder format shall be dig-
When the environmental conditions are satisfactory, the
ital and shall use digital audio tape (DAT) because of
data should be recorded on tape, saved to memory, and
its excellent signal-to-noise ratio and dynamic range, as
printed or manually recorded.
compared to analog tape.
D-5.4.1 Time History. For time history criteria, the
D-4.3.3 Oscilloscopes. Most facilities have an measured peak-to-peak vibration levels should sim-
oscilloscope and personnel who can operate it, which
ply be compared to the permissible level. The machine
allows a User to take baseline time history readings.
Supplier may provide vertical and horizontal criteria.
The oscilloscope is also useful for viewing beat sig-
The User should take care to compare the acquired data
nals, transient events, and hourly and daily vibratory
to the criteria in the appropriate direction.
changes. The oscilloscope should be set to AC-coupled
and free-run triggering. The vibration amplitude is
D-5.4.2 Frequency Response Function. Comparison
determined by viewing the signal and determining
of frequency response function criteria to frequency
the peak-to-peak voltage amplitude, and using the
domain vibration data can be more effort than taking the
transducer sensitivity for converting to appropriate
data. If the criteria have the same level at all frequencies
amplitude units.
(straight line) or little changes in amplitude, it will be
easy enough to draw the criteria over the printed vibra-
D-5 TEST PROCEDURE tion levels. If the criteria are not constant or uniform, it
The procedures for making vibration measurements may be easier to use software to compare data and crite-
are fairly simple once the appropriate analysis equip- ria. This involves digitizing the criteria, which in some
ment is selected and configured as required. cases requires entering levels at 1-Hz increments. The
vibration data stored on the FFT analyzer must be down-
loaded onto a PC. This requires different steps, depend-
D-5.1 Calibration
ing on the analyzer manufacturer. Using a spreadsheet,
At a minimum, the vibration measurement equipment math, graphing, or special program, the vibration data
should have been calibrated by a qualified lab, traceable and criteria are combined into a single graph. Once the
to NIST, in the past 12 months. Site calibration of the data are in a software format, they can be manipulated,
transducers at the start of the testing is required. graphed, and analyzed in a usable format.
D-5.2 Transducer Mounting D-6 CRITERIA ASSESSMENT

For all measurements, the transducers should be
mounted directly and firmly to the floor or a common D-6.1 Measured Vibration Below Criteria
interface for measuring three mutually orthogonal axes. If the vibration levels measured by the procedure in
Such mounting arrangements are referred to as “triaxial.” section D-5 are within the Supplier’s criteria, no addi-
Some accelerometers incorporate three triaxial transdu tional work is required. It is the sole responsibility of the
cers in one device. When this mounting arrangement is Supplier to maintain the performance of the machine to
used, all three channels should be acquired simultane- meet specifications.
ously. Time-independent triaxial measurements should
not be performed. D-6.2 Measured Vibration Above Criteria
If the vibration levels exceed the Supplier’s specifi-
D-5.3 Measurement Location
cations, it is the responsibility of the User to isolate the
In general, the transducers should be mounted in vibration to conform to the specification, or else accept
the general area where the machine will rest. This area a performance derating as described in para. 6.3.
should encompass the outer envelope of the machine Again, this Nonmandatory Appendix does not pro-
plus 3 m (approximately 10 ft.) beyond this footprint. vide information on how to reduce excessive vibration
111
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. D-8-1 Diagram of Sensor Arrangement and Instrumentation Configuration
X in
Y in Digital FFT analysis Printer

recorder
Z in
X in
Y in FFT
Printer
analysis
Z in
Z-axis
Y-axis
Y amp
conditioned output
Y-axis
To option
X-axis A or B
X amp
conditioned output
X-axis
Z-axis
Z amp
conditioned output
levels, but vibration isolation will reduce the levels. (a) title
Before the vibration levels can be reduced, the source (b) dates (of data collection and of the report’s
of the vibration must be determined. It may be easy to issuance)
do this with the equipment described in section D-4. (c) calibration information
Shock and vibration isolator suppliers, who special- (d) description and diagram of test setup
ize in low-frequency vibration attenuation, should be (e) procedure
contacted if vibration isolation or a vibration survey (f) analysis
is required. (f) summary
Note that the report should serve to archive the baseline
D-7 REPORT vibration data for later review, if problems arise after
machine installation.
A report shall be issued by the vibration specialist
within approximately 3 weeks. The report shall include D-8 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
all backup information and analyzed data with a com-
parison to the machine specification. The report shall A diagram of the instrumentation is given in
include the following as a minimum: Fig. D-8-1.
112
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX E
ELECTRICAL POWER VERIFICATION TESTS
E-1 PURPOSE Frequency changes in the line are also normally

recorded by disturbance analyzers. Changes in fre-
The purpose of this Nonmandatory Appendix is quency are self-explanatory.
to specify test procedures for analyzing the electrical
power supplied to a machine tool and its support equip-
E-3 METHOD
ment in the event that the electrical power is suspected
of causing inadequate machine performance. To ensure proper monitoring, the power supply to the
machine should be monitored for a period that includes
E-2 TEST EQUIPMENT the normal cycle of machine tool operation. In the one-
shift plant, this should include a complete shift. In the
Although the parameters describing the electrical three-shift plant, complete 24-h monitoring is required.
power supplied to a machine can be measured by a vari- Additionally, care should be taken that the power-line
ety of instruments (voltmeters, oscilloscopes, etc.), it is monitoring occurs over a representative period that
the recommendation of this Standard that a power-line includes all normal or even intermittent electrical activ-
disturbance analyzer be used for these tests because of ity within the plant that could affect the machine. (As an
the excessive labor required when individual instru- obvious example, consider the case when arc welding is
ments are used. (The Dranetz-BMI series 2400 and the done only a few days a week at a location that uses the
Dranetz Model 626-PA-600X are examples of accept- same feeder as the machine tool. In this case, the power-
able power-line disturbance analyzers.) These units are line monitoring should include a typical arc-welding
designed to monitor a wide range of power-line dis- sequence.)
turbances and are capable of continuous, unattended For making these measurements, an approved, cali-
operation. Typical measured parameters include sags, brated power-line monitor of the type discussed in sec-
surges, impulses, and line frequency. tion E-2 should be used. Appropriate thresholds (sag,
Sags are sudden voltage drops, which are detected surge, and impulse) should be set at the values cor-
by comparing the root mean square of each cycle to the responding to those levels set by the Supplier in the
steady state voltage. When the cycle-to-cycle level devi- machine tool specification. Monitoring should continue
ates by more than the preselected threshold, a sag is for a sufficient period to ensure that all of the effects
detected. mentioned are included.
Surges are sudden voltage increases, which are nor-
mally detected using the same techniques as are used E-4 ANALYSIS
to detect sags. Again, a standard power-line monitor
will note and record both the values of the surge and the Typical power-line monitors provide printouts of
time at which it occurred. both the levels and times at which deviations from the
Impulses, in the technical language of power-line accepted thresholds occur. If the monitor is set with the
monitoring, refer to short-duration (approximately thresholds described in section E-3, any such devia-
1 μs to 1,000 μs) spikes superimposed upon the AC tions recorded shall constitute nonconformance with the
sine wave. Typically such impulses are measured as Supplier’s specifications, and it shall be the responsibility
the amplitude of the spike alone with respect to the of the User to correct such power-line defects. If no devia-
voltage level at the time the spike occurred, i.e., no tions from specifications occur, then it is the responsibility
subtraction or addition is made for the sinusoidal of the machine Supplier to correct the performance of the
component. machine tool so that machine specifications are met.
113
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX F
MACHINE FUNCTIONAL TESTS
F-1 GENERAL spindle shall be run with no load at five different speeds
equally spaced over its total speed range, and the number
The tests described in this Nonmandatory Appendix of revolutions per minute recorded using a strobe or other
are to verify machine functional specifications that are rpm indicator. (A spindle error analyzer can be used for
important but do not directly influence machine accu- this task; see para. 7.6.3.3). At each speed, a minimum of
racy. Tests are given for feed rate, spindle speed (revolu- 100 revolutions shall be used to obtain the average revo-
tions per minute), tool-change time, tool-setting-system lutions per minute. The percent differences between the
measuring time, pallet-changing time, and axis- and target revolutions per minute and the measured revolu-
turret-indexing time. tions per minute shall then be reported for each of the
five speeds. Differences as calculated using the following
F-2 FEED RATE MEASUREMENTS equation should be within the range specified in the origi-
nal machine specification:
This test is intended to verify whether the machine tool
axis moves at the commanded feed rate. Variations of  measured spindle 
actual feed rate from the commanded feed rate affect the  speed 2 target 
quality of parts produced. Velocity profiles, which give  spindle speed 
an indication of the time required for the axis to reach the spindle error speed (%) 5   3 100
 target spindle 
commanded feed rate (settling time), can be used to check  speed 
the acceleration–deceleration settings and are useful for  
servo tuning and troubleshooting. Also, reduced settling
time increases machine throughput. Dynamic measure- F-4 TOOL-CHANGE TIME
ments using a laser interferometer (used for measuring
linear displacement accuracy) shall be used to measure This test is intended to measure the time it takes the
the feed rate of machine tool motion. machine tool to perform a tool-change operation.
F-2.1 Measurement Procedure F-4.1 Test Procedure

The lines of measurement for feed rate measurement F-4.1.1 Equipment. A suitable timing device shall
should be the same as those for the positioning accuracy be used to measure the time it takes the machine tool to
and repeatability, linear axes (para. 7.2). The laser shall be perform tool-change operations.
aligned as specified in para. 7.2. Two sets of bidirectional
measurements shall be made for each axis, with the laser F-4.1.2 Test Location. The machine shall be posi-
interferometer in the velocity mode. If the machine has tioned at the center of the work zone with the spindle
ranges of feeds, measurements shall be taken at the center stopped.
of the feed range for all feed ranges of the machine tool
and at the specified rapid traverse rates. Otherwise, the F-4.1.3 Measurement Procedure
measurements shall be performed at five steps over the Step 1. The machine shall be commanded to perform a tool
total range of feed rates and at the specified rapid traverse change to pick up the nearest tool in the magazine and then
rates. At each rate, for each axis, the average feed rate in return to the center of the work zone with that tool.
the forward and reverse direction shall be recorded. The
differences between the nominal feed rates and the mea Step 2. This process shall be repeated 10 times.
sured feed rates, in both the forward and reverse direc-
Step 3. The average time period between the start of the
tions, shall be within acceptable tolerance, as specified
machine motion from the center of the work zone and
between the User and the Supplier.
the return of the machine (after picking up the nearest
tool) to the center of the work zone shall be reported as
F-3 SPINDLE RPM MEASUREMENT the minimum tool-change time.
This test is intended to verify that the spindle is running Step 4. A similar procedure shall be repeated 10 times,
at the commanded (targeted) revolutions per minute. The with the machine moving from the center of the work
114
ASME B5.57-2012
zone to pick up the farthest tool and then returning back tool-setting-system measurement time and the meas-
to the center of the work zone. ured tool-setting-system measurement time shall be
within the specification agreed upon between the User
Step 5. The average time period between the start of the
and the Supplier.
machine motion from the center of the work zone and
the return of the machine (after picking up the farthest
tool) to the center of the work zone shall be reported as F-6 PALLET-CHANGE TIME
the maximum tool-change time. The machine shall be positioned so that the tool is at
the center of the work zone. A program shall be written
F-4.2 Data Analysis to command the machine to perform a pallet change,
Step 1 .The minimum tool-change time error shall be loading the nearest pallet in the pallet-loading station
reported as the difference between the nominal mini- into the machine and then returning the tool to the
mum tool-change time and the measured minimum center of the work zone. This process shall be repeated
tool-change time. 10 times. The average time period between the start of
machine motion in the center of the work zone and the
Step 2. The maximum tool-change time error shall be end of machine motion in the center of the work zone
reported as the difference between the nominal maxi- shall be reported as the pallet-change time. The dif-
mum tool-change time and the measured maximum ference between the specified pallet-change time and
tool-change time. the measured pallet-change time shall be within the
specification agreed upon between the User and the
F-5 TOOL-SETTING-SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TIME Supplier.
This test is applicable for machine tools with tool F-7 TURRET-INDEXING TIME
probes that are used to measure tool position (tool off-
sets). The machine shall be positioned at the center of the This test is applicable only for machines that have
work zone. A program shall be written that will require indexing turrets. The turret shall be positioned to the
the machine to perform a tool change, pick up the near- first tool position. The turret shall then be commanded
est tool in the tool magazine, and then perform a tool off- to move to 10 additional, adjacent turret positions. The
set measurement using a tool-setting system and return average time period taken by the turret to move to the
back to the center of the work zone. This process shall 10 positions shall be reported as the turret-indexing time
be repeated 10 times. The average time period between (total time for 10 indexes divided by 10). The differences
the start of machine motion from the center of the work between the actual turret-indexing time and the speci-
zone and the end of machine motion at the center of the fied turret-indexing time shall be within the specifica-
work zone shall be reported as the tool-setting-system tion agreed upon between the User and the Supplier.
measurement time. The difference between the specified This test should be performed for all turrets.
115
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX G
MACHINE LEVELING AND ALIGNMENT
G-1 MACHINE LEVELING are generally mounted on a thick foundation block

with adjustable wedges at each point of support.
Most machine tools do not have to be leveled. Absolute These wedges normally have a hole in their center to
leveling is one method, and often a convenient method, accommodate a grouted-in hold-down bolt to hold the
for achieving straightness of travel. It is rarely a require- machine down to the block. These wedges and hold-
ment, however. Many methods are now available for down bolts are adjusted “push-pull” to achieve the cor-
measuring straightness, squareness, and parallelism rect machine geometry. In so doing, the forces between
that are faster and better. The use of electronic levels for the blocks and the machine may vary from point to
measuring the change in level, such as the pitch or roll, point. Optimizing machine geometry should always
is, on the other hand, an important technique in mod- be the goal. For machines of this type, the User should
ern machine tool metrology. Installation procedures that work closely with the machine Supplier to ensure the
require absolute leveling should be questioned. foundation is adequate for the machine. The Supplier’s
recommendations regarding machine alignment
G-2 DISTRIBUTION OF LOADING ON MULTIPOINT- should be followed. If such procedures are followed,
SUPPORTED MACHINES then the Supplier has sole responsibility for meeting
the functional specifications of the machine, derated as
Uniform distribution of loading on multipoint-sup- appropriate for thermal effects and excessive relative
ported machines is rarely a requirement. Such machines vibration (see section 6).
116
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX H
COMPLIANCE AND HYSTERESIS CHECKS
H-1 GENERAL H-2.2 Test Procedure

The compliance and hysteresis test is designed to esti- H-2.2.1 Equipment. The following equipment shall
mate machine compliance and hysteresis when a static be used:
load is applied between the tool and the workpiece. It (a) displacement indicator
provides a simplified indication of what more rigorous (b) force gage (load cell)
compliance testing would measure. Compliance values
vary as functions of the position of the machine tool H-2.2.2 Machine Warm-Up. No warm-up condition
axes. The linear compliance is measured near the center is required.
of the work zone at a point defined by the Supplier and
is measured for each linear positioning axis.1 In general, H-2.2.3 Test Location. The machine axes shall be
the Supplier should specify the maximum load and pro- positioned in the center of their respective ranges.
vide appropriate fixturing.2
If a load is not specified, suggested values are given H-2.2.4 Measurement Procedure3
in Table H-1-1. Step 1. Zero the indicator at the beginning of each test.
Two test procedures are included in this Non
mandatory Appendix for measurement of compliance Step 2. Move the machine axis under test in small incre-
and machine hysteresis. The first method (see section ments until the maximum force specified or a maximum
H-2, ) is the preferred method. The situations in which deflection4 of 250 µm (approximately 0.01 in.) has been
the alternate method (see section H-3) may be appropri- reached. Call this the positive direction.
ate are described in para. H-3.1. It must be emphasized Step 3. Record the command position, actual position,
that the alternate method should be considered only for and force.
machines with scale feedback.
WARNING: The suggested loads given in Table H-1-1 do not Step 4. Jog the axis in the opposite (negative) direction
apply to spindles with a maximum speed of more than 10 000 until the force drops to 1% of the maximum force (posi-
rpm. In the case where such spindles are supplied, the User shall tive preload).
negotiate appropriate compliance and machine hysteresis tests Step 5. Record the command position, actual position,
with the Supplier. and force.
Step 6. Continue jogging in the same (negative) direc-
H-2 MACHINE COMPLIANCE AND HYSTERESIS TEST tion until the force (or deflection) reaches its maximum
value.
H-2.1 Test Setup
A typical setup for horizontal-lathe Z direction is shown Step 7. Record the command position, actual position,
in Fig. H-2.1-1. A displacement sensor such as an elec- and force.
tronic indicator, dial gage, or laser interferometer is set to Step 8. Jog the axis back in the plus direction until the
read the relative motion between the tool holder and the force drops to 1% of the maximum force (negative
table along the linear axis. A load cell is aligned with the preload).
machine axis to be tested and rigidly fixtured between the
machine table and the spindle. The setup should be such Step 9. Record the command position, actual position,
that the load cell will function under tension and com- and force.
pression. If the machine has backlash compensation, this Step 10. Recording at additional points is recommended
test is conducted with the backlash compensation on. but not required.
1 Users desiring to measure compliance and hysteresis for rotary

positioning axes are referred to ANSI B5.54. 3 Performing the test in this fashion removes any effects due to
2 Since the loads applied are large, appropriately tested and clearance in the test fixtures or deflections of the load cell.
Supplier-approved fixturing is essential for the safety of personnel 4 The deflection is defined as the difference between the actual
and the machine. position and the command position.
117
ASME B5.57-2012
Table H-1-1 Suggested Maximum Loads for the Compliance and Machine Hysteresis Test
Spindle Torque, N·m Force, N
20 1 100 (approximately 250 lb)

50 2 200 (approximately 500 lb)
100 4 500 (approximately 1,000 lb)
250 (and greater, at 600 rpm) 8 900 (approximately 2,000 lb)
Fig. H-2.1-1 Setup for Measuring the Compliance and Machine Hysteresis in the Z Direction
Indicator
Turret
Cross-slide (X)
Headstock Load
cell
Z-axis
Bed
Z
Main spindle
H-2.3 Data Analysis machine axes with rotary encoder feedback, the com-
pliance and hysteresis values computed will probably
To evaluate machine compliance and hysteresis, the
be less. Thus, the machine performance will be overes-
deflection (actual position minus command position) at
timated using the alternate method. For machine axes
each of the measurement points is computed. The com-
with scale feedback, the alternate test procedure will
pliance in the direction of the axis is computed as the
likely produce similar results compared with the pri-
total range of the deflections divided by the total range of
mary method for both compliance and hysteresis. In
force (expressed as newton millimeters or inch-pounds).
this case, the alternate method may be preferred as it
The machine hysteresis for the axis is computed as the
generally requires less range on the displacement indi-
range of deflection between the positive preload and
cator. Therefore, it allows the use of a higher-resolution
negative preload points (expressed as millimeters or
displacement indicator. In addition, the resolution of
inches). The values to be used for these computations
the machine display does not affect the resolution of the
are indicated in Fig. H-2.3-1.
measurement.
H-3 ALTERNATE MACHINE COMPLIANCE AND

HYSTERESIS TEST: LINEAR AXES H-3.2 Test Procedure
H-3.2.1 Equipment. The following equipment shall
H-3.1 Scope be used:
The alternate compliance and machine hysteresis test (a) displacement indicator
procedure may produce different results compared to (b) force gage (load cell)
those obtained following the primary procedure. For (c) linear actuator (e.g., differential screw, hydraulic jack)
118
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. H-2.3-1 Typical Plot Showing Results of a Compliance and Axis Hysteresis Test
150
125
100
75
+ Preload
50
250-�m
Deflection, �m
25 deflection
0
–25
Hysteresis
–50
–75 – Preload
–100
–125
–150
–5 000 –Fmax –2 500 0 2500 Fmax 5 000
Force, N
H-3.2.2 Machine Warm-Up. No warm-up condition Step 7. Operate the actuator in the opposite direction
is required. until the force drops to 1% of the maximum force (posi-
tive preload).
H-3.2.3 Test Location. The machine axes shall be
Step 8. Record the force and displacement.
positioned in the center of their respective ranges for this
test. Step 9. Continue operating the actuator in the same (neg-
ative) direction until the force (or deflection) reaches its
H-3.2.4 Measurement Procedure maximum value.
Step 1. Connect the linear actuator and the force gage in Step 10. Record the force and displacement.
series between the spindle and the worktable.
Step 11. Operate the actuator in the opposite (positive)
Step 2. Set up the displacement indicator to record direction until the force drops to 1% of the maximum
relative displacement between the spindle and the force (negative preload).
worktable.
Step 12. Record the force and displacement.
CAUTION: Place the displacement indicator as near as possi-
ble to the point of force to minimize the effects of tilt errors. Step 13. Repeat the measurement procedure for each axis
direction.
Step 3. Create a zero-force condition with the linear
actuator. H-3.3 Data Analysis
Step 4. Set zero on the displacement indicator. The compliance for each axis shall be reported as the total
Step 5. Operate the actuator to achieve the maximum range of recorded displacements divided by the total range
test load [or a maximum deflection of 250 µm (approxi- of recorded forces. The machine hysteresis for each axis
mately 0.01 in.)]. Call this the positive direction. shall be computed as the range of measured displacements
between the positive preload and negative preload points
Step 6. Record the force and displacement. [expressed as micrometers (μm) or micro inches (μin.)].
119
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX I
LASER AND SCALE CORRECTIONS
I-1 LASER AND SCALE CORRECTIONS where

CLR 5 corrected laser reading
If the laser interferometer used has environmental LDR 5 laser display reading
compensation features, the instrument manufacturer’s Ps 5 air pressure, kPa
recommendations regarding the use of these accesso- RH 5 relative humidity of air, %
ries shall be followed, with the material sensor placed Ts 5 mean air temperature, °C
on the appropriate machine scale or at some other
NOTE: The partial pressure of water vapor can be calculated from
position known to yield a measurement of the average
the relative humidity by multiplying the saturated vapor pressure
scale temperature. Here the scale can be a lead screw,
at a particular temperature by the relative humidity expressed as a
a ball screw, a linear scale, or an inductive scale. It is a
fraction. The saturated vapor pressure at 20°C (68°F) is 17.6 mm Hg
requirement of this Standard that independent calibra-
(approximately 0.34 psi). Thus, for example, 50% relative humidity
tion of the temperature and pressure sensors of such
at 20°C would yield a partial pressure of 0.5 3 17.6 5 8.8 mm Hg
compensation devices be performed on a regular basis
(approximately 0.17 psi).
(see section 9).
If the corrections are to be performed manually, they To compare the corrected laser reading to the machine
shall be computed according to the following equation readings, the machine readings must also be corrected for
for an uncorrected laser display reading:1 temperature. The corrected machine readings are given by
CMR 5 MDR[1 1 a(T 2 20)]
CLR 5 LDR {11 [7.86 3 1024
Ps/(Ts 1 273)] where
2 1.5 3 10211 RH (Ts2 1 160)} CMR 5 corrected machine reading
MDR 5 machine display reading
T 5 scale temperature, °C, during measure-
1 This form of equation also assumes atmospheric air with the normal ments, in the case where the machine was
mixture of gases. Atmospheres that deviate significantly, particularly set up at 20°C (68°F)
in regard to carbon dioxide and aromatic hydrocarbon concentration,
have been observed and can lead to measurable errors. If this situation a 5 effective thermal expansion coefficient of
is suspected, appropriate corrections should be applied. machine scales
120
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX J
DRIFT CHECKS FOR SENSORS, INCLUDING LASERS
J-1 GENERAL check, the two retroreflectors are rigidly mounted to the
remote interferometer as shown in Fig. J-1.2-1. The laser
Many tests in this Standard involve the use of displace- is then aligned with this interferometer and adjusted for
ment sensors over long periods of time. These include maximum signal strength. The laser is zeroed and the
the ETVE test (para. 6.2.1), the spindle thermal stability drift of the system recorded over periods of time similar
test (para. 7.7.2), thermal distortion caused by moving to those used for the ETVE test (para. 6.2.1). If the drift is
linear axes (para. 7.7.3), and the composite thermal error excessive for the application, then the laser interferometer
test (para. 7.7.4). Three of these tests require the use of Supplier should be contacted and the situation rectified.
short-range indicators, and one of these tests (thermal
distortion caused by moving linear axes) requires the J-1.3 Drift Check for Laser Interferometer Systems
use of a laser interferometer. For the results of these tests
to be most meaningful, the User should perform a sta- When used for displacement measurement, a laser
bility test on the sensor before using it for the measure- interferometer can have several sources of drift: first,
ment. Such stability tests have traditionally been called drift in the laser frequency; second, thermal drifts in the
“cap” tests. Two such tests are described in paras. J-1.1 interferometer optics and mounting; and finally, drifts
and J-1.2. caused by incorrect calibration of the laser system tem-
perature and pressure sensors. In this Nonmandatory
J-1.1 Drift Check for Short-Range Electronic or Short- Appendix, two simple tests are proposed to check the
Range Displacement Indicators drift of most system components. In the first test, the
laser is set up to read with a remote interferometer, as
Aside from the usual calibration checks, short-range shown in Fig. J-1.3-1. The spacer between the interfer-
displacement indicators should be checked for possible ometer and the retroreflector is made of steel, and the
sensitivity to a thermal environment in which the test is laser system temperature and pressure sensors placed
to be performed. A drift check should be conducted by as close as possible to the steel path. The steel spacer
blocking the transducer and recording the output for at should contain holes to allow the free flow of ambient
least the same period of time as the test to be performed air and be at least 200 mm (approximately 8 in.) long.
using the indicator. “Blocking” a transducer is used to The temperature and pressure compensation of the
make it effectively indicate on its own frame base or laser is set, the part temperature sensor attached to the
cartridge. Figure J-1.1-1 shows a cartridge-type linear steel spacer, and the laser interferometer preset to the
variable differential transformer (LVDT) blocked by nominal length of the spacer. The appropriate expansion
means of a cap or capture device that holds the indica- coefficient for the spacer shall be entered into the laser
tor armature in a fixed position relative to the cartridge. interferometer system.1 The drift of the system is then
The figure also shows a similar clamp on a finger-type measured over a period of time corresponding to the
electronic indicator and on a capacitance gage. time of the proposed test (4 h for the thermal distortion
During the electronics drift check, the entire displace- caused by the moving linear axes test). The drift of the
ment recording system should be located as close as system should be less than one-fourth of the repeatabil-
possible to where it will be used during machine testing. ity for unidirectional positioning, linear axes. If the drift
Electronic drift tests have been useful in proving that in is larger, then the laser system or its supporting sensors,
many cases where electronic indicators have been a sus- or both, should be repaired.
pected source of drift, the real cause was thermal drift. The second test is to be used for those laser systems
where the interferometer is an inseparable part of the
J-1.2 Drift Check for Laser Interferometer Optics laser head. In these cases, the laser and the retroreflector
Some optical systems have excessive drift apparently or sensor assembly are set up on, and rigidly attached
caused by thermal instabilities in the optic mounts and to, a steel plate. The steel plate should be at least 25-mm
mismatched glass paths. The exact cause of these effects
is not known, but experiments have shown that, for preci- 1 The Supplier of the steel spacer shall provide an accurate
sion applications, the drifts inherent in the laser interfer- measurement of its nominal length and its thermal expansion
ometer optics should be measured. To perform this drift coefficient.
121
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. J-1.1-1 Capture Devices for Several Types of Displacement Indicators
Clamping
screws
Cartridge- Finger-type Capacitance

type LVDT indicator gage
Fig. J-1.2-1 Proposed Setup for Measuring the Drift of the Laser Interferometer Optics
Retroreflector
Retroreflector
Laser
Remote
interferometer
Table
(approximately 1-in.) thick and mounted at three points. as described in the preceding paragraph. The drift of the
The face of the laser should be at least 200 mm (approxi- system should be less than one-fourth of the repeatabil-
mately 8 in.) from the retroreflector or sensor assembly. ity for unidirectional positioning, linear axes. If the drift
The environmental sensors should be placed as close as is larger, then the laser system or its supporting sensors,
is possible to the laser beam path and the test conducted or both, should be repaired.
122
ASME B5.57-2012
Fig. J-1.3-1 Proposed Setup for Measuring the Stability of the Laser Measurement System
Weather station
Retroreflector (temperature and pressure sensors)
Steel spacer Retroreflector
Interferometer
Steel base plate Part temperature

sensor
123
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX K
THE PART-TRACE TEST
K-1 GENERAL is a simple method for separating the errors introduced

by machine geometry from those introduced by proc-
The part-trace test procedure consists of cutting a part ess variables such as tool wear, tool roundness and size
and then replacing the tool with an appropriate displace- errors, cutting-force deflection, hard spots in the mate-
ment transducer1 and repeating the original tool path, rial, thermal errors such as spindle growth, angular ther-
but with the spindle off. Readings from the transducer mal drift of the C-axis average line, expansion of the tool
are recorded as the part is “traced.” The part-trace test holder toward the work, expansion of the work toward
the tool, runout of the workpiece caused by radiation
1LVDTs are preferred over optical and capacitance indicators for from the room lights when the spindle is stopped, and
part-trace test purposes because LVDT transducers are not affected
by coolant. They work equally well wet or dry. Air-bearing LVDTs are
control system dynamic errors. If two-axis contour cuts
preferred over plain bearing LVDTs because their low stylus forces are to be measured, it is necessary to use a round stylus
and absence of sliding friction avoid scratching of the work surface. having the same radius as the tool.
124
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX L
DISCUSSION OF THE UNDE AND THERMAL UNCERTAINTY
L-1 GENERAL gradients and their effect on the machine geometry and
scales. For the purposes of this Nonmandatory Appendix,
When calibration or measurement is performed at this second component is represented as a rectangular
temperatures other than 20°C (68°F), nominal differ- distribution with bounds ±(ETVE/2)/(La) for machine
ential expansion (NDE) corrections must be made if calibration, or ±(ETVE/2)/(Lsas) when the machine is
the object to be calibrated or measured and the stand- used as the measurement standard. Therefore, for calibra-
ard have different coefficients of thermal expansion. As tion of a machine axis
defined in section 4, Definitions 2
2  ETVE/2  2
NDE 5 aL(T 2 20) 2 asLs(Ts 2 20) (L‑1) u (T )eff 5   1 u (T )
 La 3 
The variables are defined in section 3. The first term and
applies to the object being calibrated or measured. The u2(Ts)eff 5 u2(Ts)
second term applies to the standard. For laser calibration For use of the machine as the measurement standard
of a machine axis, the first term applies to the machine
scale, while the second term applies to the laser. For on- u2(T)eff 5 u2(T)
machine part measurement using a probe, the first term and
applies to the part and the machine scale is the standard. 2
 ETVE/2 
To estimate the uncertainty in making NDE correction, u2 (Ts )eff 5  2
 1 u (Ts )
the ISO/IEC Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in L a
 s s 3 
Measurement (1995) is used. The uncertainty depends on
In either case, the combined standard thermal uncer-
the uncertainty in each of the variables of eq. (L-1). It also
tainty is written as
depends on the sensitivity of the NDE result to variation
in each variable. For the purposes of this Nonmandatory u2cT(L) 5 L2(T 2 20)2u2(a) 1 Ls2(Ts 2 20)2u2(as)
Appendix, it is assumed that no correlation exists between 1 L2a2u2(T) 1 Ls2as2u2(Ts) 1 u2ETVE
variations in individual variables. Therefore, four terms
where u2ETVE 5 ETVE2/12 arises from either eq. (L-2) or
come directly from the uncertainty analysis.
(L-3).
Lau(T)eff 5 length uncertainty due to uncertainty The combined standard thermal uncertainty is used
in temperature of the object being to derate performance specifications (section 6) or to
calibrated or measured calculate a thermal error index (TEI) for any situation
where NDE correction applies. The examples in sections
Lsasu(Ts)eff 5 length uncertainty due to uncertainty L-2 and L-3 demonstrate the calculation procedure.
in temperature of the standard
Ls(Ts 2 20)u(as) 5 uncertainty of nominal expansion L-2 CALCULATION OF EXPANDED THERMAL

of the standard (L-2) UNCERTAINTY FOR PURPOSES OF DERATING
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
L(T 2 20)u(a) 5 uncertainty of nominal expansion
The following calculations are meant to be representa-
of the object being calibrated or
tive of a measurement of positioning accuracy and repeat-
measured (L-3)
ability, linear axes (para. 7.2). The specification zone is for
The subscript “eff” is used to indicate that this term con- the bidirectional accuracy of positioning, A.
tains not only the uncertainty in temperature measure- Performance parameter: bidirectional accuracy of
ment but also the range of temperatures that probably positioning
occurred during a test or measurement. One component Specified accuracy: 33 μm/m (FIR)
of this uncertainty is related to the accuracy of tempera- Axis length: 1 016 mm
ture measurement. This is the length uncertainty due to Measurement devices:
temperature measurement (see section 4, Definitions). The laser interferometer (displacement)
second component is related to the effective scale temper- thermocouples (temperature of air and material)
ature due to time and positioning-varying temperature Mean temperature: 26°C
125
ASME B5.57-2012
ETVE: 33 μm 5 47.1 μm2 1 0.30 μm2

Coefficient of thermal expansion of the machine
5 47.4 μm2
scale, a:
Combined standard thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2.1)
11.7 3 1026/°C
u2cT(L) 5 u2ETVE 1 (UNE)2 1 (UNEs)2 1 LUTM2
Coefficient of thermal expansion of the laser, as:
5 90.8 μm2 1 16.9 μm2 1 0.00 1 47.4 µm2
0.93 3 1026/°C 5 155 μm2
Specification zone ucT(L) 5 12.5 µm
SZ 5 33 μm/m (1.016 m) Expanded thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2)

5 33.5 μm
UT(L) 5 2ucT(L)
Standard uncertainty due to ETVE (para. 6.2.1) 5 24.9 µm
u2ETVE 5 ETVE2/12 Derating of specified parameter (para. 6.2.2)

5 90.75 μm2
UT(L)/SZ 5 24.9 µm/33.5 µm > 0.25
Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the machine
scale [para. 6.2.2.2, method (c)] Because this ratio is greater than 0.25, a new accept-
able limit must be specified.
u(a) 5 0.1 a 1 / 3
SZ* 5 UT(L)/0.25
5 6.75 3 1027/°C
5 100 µm (FIR)
u2(a) 5 4.56 3 10213/°C2 5 100 µm/1.016 m
5 98 µm/m
(UNE)2 5 L2(T 2 20)2u2(a)
5 (1 016 mm)2(26°C 2 20°C)2 L-3 EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS WHEN A MACHINE
(4.56 3 10213/°C2)(103μm/mm)2 IS BEING USED FOR PART MEASUREMENT
Two examples that apply to the use of a machine
Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the standard tool for measurement of parts are given in this section.
(para. 6.2.2.2; i.e., laser) The first is in metric units, and the second is in U.S.
Customary units, for those who prefer that system.
u(as) 5 0
While many other errors may affect the measurement
results, the TEI is calculated to estimate the expected
(UNE)2s 5 Ls2(Ts 2 20)2u2(as) 5 0
measurement error due to thermal effects alone. In both
these cases, a part tolerance, TOL, is substituted for the
Length uncertainty due to temperature measurement
specification zone, SZ.
(para. 6.2.2.3)
u2(T) 5 [1 2 (21)]2/12°C2 L-3.1 Example Calculation With NDE Correction

5 °C2 In this example, an aluminum part is measured on a
machine with steel scales. The measurement conditions
u2(Ts) 5 [1 2 (21)]2/12°C2 are summarized in Table L-3.1-1.
5 °C2 Standard uncertainty due to ETVE (para. 6.2.1)
LUTM2 5 L2a2u2(T) 1 Ls2as2u2(Ts) u2ETVE 5 ETVE2/12

5 (1 016 mm)2(11.7 3 1026/°C)2 5 (3.8 3 1025 m)2/12
°C2(103μm/mm)2 5 1.20 3 10210 m2
1 (1 016 mm)2(0.93 3 1026/°C)2 Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the part
°C2(103μm/mm)2 [para. 6.2.2.2, method (b)]
126
ASME B5.57-2012
Table L-3.1-1 Calculation of TEI for the Case When NDE Correction Is Made
Dimension 5 4.0 m NDE Correction [Note (1)] Tmin 5 21.1°C
TOL 5 0.25 mm Material: aluminum 6061-T6 Tmax 5 23.3°C
a 5 24.3 μm/m °C [Note (2)] Temperature measurement accuracy 5 0.5°C Tm 5 22°C
as 5 11.7 μm/m °C [Note (2)] ETVE 5 38 μm
NOTES:
(1) Standard and part temperatures are both measured as 22°C.
(2) These values are obtained from published data and may be in error by 5%.
Table L-3.2-1 Calculation of TEI for the Case When NDE Correction Is Not Made
Dimension 5 20 in. No NDE correction Tmin 5 70°F (measured)
Tolerance 5 0.002 in. Material: Ti 6-4 Tmax 5 78°F (measured)
a 5 4.8 μin./in. °F [Note (1)] Temperature measurement accuracy 5 1°F Tm 5 74°F (measured)
as 5 6.5 μin./in. °F [Note (1)] ETVE 5 0.0003 in.
NOTE:
(1) These values are obtained from published data and may be in error by 5%.
u(a) 5 0.05 a 1 / 3 LUTM2 5 L2a2u2(T) 1 Ls2as2u2(Ts)

5 (4 m)2(24.3 3 1026/°C)2 °C2
u2(a) 5 (0.05)2(24.3 3 1026)/°C)2 ( ) 1 (4 m)2(11.7 3 1026/°C)2 1/3°C2
(UNE)2 5 L2(T– 20)2u2(a) 5 3.87 3 1029 m2
5 (4 m)2(22°C – 20°C)2(0.05)2 Combined standard thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2.1)
(24.3 3 1026/°C)2 ( ) 2 2
ucT (L) 5 uETVE 1 (UNE)2 1 (UNE)2s 1 LUTM 2
5 3.15 3 10211 m2 u (L) 5 uETVE 1 (UNE)2 1 2(UNE
2
cT
2
)2s 1 LUTM 2
1.20 3 10 10 m 2 + 3.15310211 m 2 + 7.30 310212 m 2
ucT1(.L20
)53 10210 m 2 + 3.1259310 211
m 2 + 7.30 310212 m 2
Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the standard ucT (L) 5 + 3.87 3 10 m 2
[para. 6.2.2.2, method (b); i.e., machine] + 3.87 3 1029 m 2
5 0.063 mm
5 0.063 mm
u(as) 5 0.05 as 1 / 3
Expanded thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2)
u2(a s) 5 (0.05)2(11.7 3 1026/°C)2 ( ) UT(L) 5 2ucT(L)
(UNEs)2 5 Ls2(Ts 2 20)2u2(as) 5 0.127 mm
5 (4 m)2(22°C 2 20°C)2(0.05)2 For the purposes of calculating the TEI, NDE is taken as
zero when NDE corrections are made. There is no contri-
(11.7 3 1026/°C)2 ( )
bution to the estimated thermal error.
5 7.30 3 10212 m2
NDE 5 0.00
Note that the mean air temperature is used for both T and Thermal error index
Ts in the equations used to calculate uncertainty of nomi-
nal expansion of part and of machine scale, respectively. TEI 5 {[|NDE| 1 UT(L)]/TOL}(100%)
Length uncertainty due to temperature measurement 5 (0.00 1 0.127 mm/0.25 mm)(100%)
(para. 6.2.2.3)
5 51%
u2(T) 5 [1 2 (21)]2/12°C2 L-3.2 Example Calculation Without NDE Correction
5 °C2 The second example of part measurement deals with
measurement of a titanium part on a machine with
u2(Ts) 5 [1 2 (21)]2/12°C2 steel scales, where the nominal differential expansion
5 °C2 correction is not made. Measurement conditions are
127
ASME B5.57-2012
summarized in Table L-3.2-1. U.S. Customary units are probability distributions with bounds ≥ (Tmax 2 Tmin
used throughout. 1 2a). Variables are defined as
Standard uncertainty due to ETVE (para. 6.2.1) a 5 accuracy of air-temperature measurement
Tmax 5 maximum air temperature measured over
u2ETVE 5 ETVE2/12
specified period of time
5 (0.0003 in)2/12 Tmin 5 minimum air temperature measured over
5 7.50 3 1029 in.2 specified period of time
The variations in temperatures, T and Ts, are
Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the part expected to be correlated under these assumptions,
[para. 6.2.2.2, method (b)] leading to the equation for LUTM, which includes
the difference between scale and part expansion
u(a) 5 0.05 a 1 / 3 coefficients.
LUTM2 5 (1/12)(Tmax 2 Tmin 1 2a)2(L)2(as2a)2

u2(a) 5 (0.05)2(4.8 3 1026 in./in.°F)2( )
5 (1/12)(78 2 70 1 2)2(°F)2(20 in.)2(4.8
(UNE)2 5 L2(T 2 68)2 u2(a)
2 6.5)2(μin./in.°F)2
5 (20 in.)2(75°F 2 68°F)2(0.05)2
5 9.63 3 1029 in.2
(4.8 3 1026 in./in.°F)2 ( )
Combined standard thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2.1)
5 2.76 3 10210 in.2
u2cT(L) 5 u2ETVE 1 (UNE)2 1 (UNE)s2 1 LUTM2
Uncertainty of nominal expansion of the standard
[para. 6.2.2.2, method (b); i.e., machine] 7.50 3 1029 in.2 1 2.76 3 10210 in.2 1 5.07 3 10210 in.2
ucT (L) 5
1 9.63 3 1029 in.2
u(as) 5 0.05 as 1 / 3
5 0.00013 in.
u2(a s) 5 (0.05)2(6.5 3 1026 in./in.°F)2( )
Expanded thermal uncertainty (para. 6.2.2)
(UNE)s2 5 Ls2(Ts– 68)2u2(as)
UT(L) 5 2ucT(L)
5 (20 in.)2(74°F – 68°F)2(0.05)2
5 2(0.00013 in.)
(6.5 3 10–6 in./in.°F)2( )
5 0.00026 in.
5 5.07 3 10210 in.2
Nominal differential expansion
Length uncertainty due to temperature measurement NDE 5 |4.8 3 1026 in./in.°F 2 6.5 3 1026 in./in.°F|
(para. 6.2.2.3)
(20 in.) |74 – 68|°F
LUTM cannot be calculated directly (see below).
When NDE correction is not made, the uncertainty 5 0.00020 in.
related to temperature in eq. (L-1) depends on varia- Thermal error index
tions in the air temperature. Temperature measurement
accuracies of part and machine are not relevant because TEI 5 {[|NDE| 1 UT(L)]/TOL}(100%)
these measurements are not made. The uncertainty of 5 (0.00020 in. 1 0.00026 in./0.002 in.)(100%)
environmental temperature is introduced.
5 23.5%
u(Te) 5 ½(Tmax 2 Tmin 1 2a) 1 / 3

L-3.3 Summary
where it is assumed that the machine and part tempera- The different cases that can occur for temperature
tures at any time can be expected to have rectangular measurement are summarized in Table L-3.3-1
128
ASME B5.57-2012
Table L-3.3-1 Summary of Equations for Thermal Uncertainty Calculations

Symbol Definition Equation
TEI Thermal error index {[NDE 1 UT(L)]/TOL}100%

NDE Nominal differential expansion
The standard and the object are the same material 0
NDE correction 0
No NDE correction (NE) 2 (NEs)
NE Nominal expansion of the object La(Tm 2 20)
L Length of dimension
a Coefficient of thermal expansion of the object Specified
Tm Mean environmental temperature Measured
(NEs) Nominal expansion of the standard Las(Tm 2 20)
as Coefficient of thermal expansion of the standard Specified
UT(L) Expanded thermal uncertainty 2ucT(L)
ucT(L) Combined standard thermal uncertainty
(UNE)2 1 (UNEs )2 1 (LUTM )2 1 uETVE
2
UNE Uncertainty nominal expansion of the object u(a)L(Tm 2 20)

u(a) Uncertainty of object thermal expansion coefficient
For method of para. 6.2.2.2(c) 1 / 3 (0.1)a
(UNEs) Uncertainty nominal expansion of the standard u(as)L(Tm 2 20)
u(as) Uncertainty of standard thermal expansion coefficient
For method of para. 6.2.2.2(c) 1 / 3 (0.01)as
LUTM Length uncertainty due to temperature measurement a 2 L2 u(T )2 1 a s2 L2s u(Ts )2 .
For NDE correction
For no NDE correction u(Te)L(a – as)
u(T) Uncertainty of object temperature measurement [(a1 2 a2)/ 2]( 1 / 3 )
u(Ts) Uncertainty of standard temperature measurement [(a1 2 a2)/ 2]( 1 / 3 )
u(Te) Uncertainty of environment temperature ( )(Tmax 2 Tmin12a) 1 / 3
a Accuracy of temperature measurement (±a) Specified
Tmax Maximum air temperature Measured over specified time
Tmin Minimum air temperature Measured over specified time
uETVE Standard uncertainty due to the environmental temperature variation error ( ) ETVE 1 / 3
ETVE Environmental temperature variation error Measured over specified time
SZ Specification zone (the zone specified for a parameter in a machine accept- Specified
ance test)
TOL Tolerance (used for specification zone, SZ, when measuring parts) For 0.1 mm, TOL 5 0.1 mm
GENERAL NOTE: “Object” refers to the object being calibrated or measured; “standard” refers to the calibrator or measuring device.
129
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX M
CALCULATION OF UNCERTAINTIES
M-1 GENERAL (b) The test was already in the process of standardi-
zation, or standardized, by the International Standards
In many of the tests in this Standard, uncertainties have
Organization (ISO) and uncertainties were not com-
been assigned to the results of a measurement follow-
puted there.
ing widely accepted procedures [ISO/IEC Guide to the
(c) The test duration was such that making enough
Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement, 1995(E)]. In
repeated measurements to have statistical significance
a subtle deviation from these procedures, the uncertain-
was impractical.
ties are being assigned to the machine tool, rather than the
(d) The tests were such that there existed a significant
measurement system. That is, it is assumed that the meas-
historical precedent that the test results should be treated
urand (for example, linear positioning) is uncertain when
as tolerances rather than measurements with associated
measured with a “perfect” measurement system because
uncertainties.
of “inherent” lack of repeatability in the machine itself.
It is the purpose of this Nonmandatory Appendix
Since machine tools, at the current level of accuracy, obey
to explain the reasoning behind the decisions and, for
the laws of classical physics, this assumption is probably
Users who so desire, provide the methodology for the
incorrect. Machine tools are, in fact, much more repeatable
assessment of uncertainties in cases where it is practical
than is commonly believed, as has been demonstrated on
to do so. Again, we emphasize that these uncertainties
numerous occasions. In the case of machine tool measure-
should be assigned to the machine tool system (includ-
ments, the major uncertainties arise from a combination of
ing the testing environment) and not to the measurement
(a) incomplete definition of the measurand
instrument. This can be correct only if the measurement
(b) imperfect realization of the definition of the
instrument conforms to the requirements of section 9.
measurand
(c) nonrepresentative sampling — the sample meas-
ured may not represent the defined measurand M-2 UNCERTAINTY CALCULATIONS CURRENTLY IN
(d) inadequate knowledge of the effects of environ- ASME B5.57
mental conditions on the measurement or imperfect
In this Standard, there are many tests where the
measurement of environmental conditions1
uncertainties are calculated. Some of these tests, in fact,
The fact is that the model normally used for the machine
are designed primarily to estimate the uncertainties
tool does not include all of the variables that are present
caused by various factors. In general, these types of tests
when testing a machine. Thus, the observed dispersion of
are called “repeatability tests.” The repeatability tests
the measurement results is nearly universally of Type B.
include the ETVE test (para. 6.2.1), the relative vibration
Because of the current accuracy level of the instrumentation
test (para. 6.3), the structural motion test (para. 7.6.2),
(see section 9), this dispersion is correctly assigned to the
the subsystems repeatability tests (para. 8.3), and the
machine tool rather than the instrument system. (Note that
repeatability of tool-setting systems test (para. 8.4.1).
this is not the case for temperature-controlled, high-accuracy
Besides these general tests for repeatability, other
machines such as diamond turning machines, where errors
tests where the uncertainty is estimated according to
in the measurement system begin to become the dominant
the standard methodology are positioning accuracy and
sources of uncertainty. Users desiring to use this Standard
repeatability, linear axes (para. 7.2); angular error (yaw)
on such machines should be prepared to address these
motions, linear axes (para. 7.4); positioning accuracy
issues as, though the procedures may appear to be identical,
and repeatability, rotary axes (para. 7.5); original loca-
the assignment of lack of repeatability to the machine, rather
tion of the tool-setting-system (para. 8.4.2); combination
than to the measurement system, may be erroneous.)
tests for tool-setting-system drift (para. 8.4.3); machine
In the body of this Standard, uncertainties have not
performance as a measuring tool (para. 8.7); and para-
been computed for a number of tests due to one of the
metric tests (para. 8.8). These are not discussed further
following four reasons:
in this Nonmandatory Appendix.
(a) The test may be considered a functional test, and
thus an assignment of uncertainty is not called for.
M-3 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
1ISO Guide to the Expression of Uncertainty in Measurement, After careful discussion, it was the opinion of the
1993(E). Committee that the following tests should be considered
130
ASME B5.57-2012
functional tests where it is not appropriate to assign an quantities should then be calculated according to the
uncertainty. These are setup hysteresis (para. 7.1.4.2), following equation:
periodic linear and angular positioning (paras. 7.2.8 and
7.5.8), cutting performance (para. 7.10), multifunction 1 n
cycle test (para. 7.11), mechanical tail stock alignment

uq = u(q) 5
n21
∑ (q
j51
j 2 q )2
(para. 8.2.5.1), CNC performance test (para. 8.5), and

where
machining test parts (para. 8.7). Uncertainties could, of
q 5 the mean obtained from the 10 repeated
course, be assigned to the final functional test, machin-
trials
ing test parts, by machining a large number of parts
qj 5 the outputs of the measurement procedure
and applying the procedures of statistical process con-
for each complete test (average or asynchro-
trol. Users desiring to do this should follow appropriate
nous error motion)
standardized methods.
In the opinion of the authors of this Nonmandatory
Appendix, following the above procedure would
M-4 UNCERTAINTY COMPUTATIONS NOT constitute unwarranted expense, as the information
PRESENTLY IN ASME B5.57 gained would not be particularly relevant to machine
performance.
Several of the tests presented in this Standard do not
provide the User with the methodology for computing
an appropriate uncertainty. These tests are M-4.2 Machine Thermal Tests
(a) spindle axes of rotation (para. 7.6) All of the machine thermal tests, the spindle thermal
(b) machine thermal test (para. 7.7) stability test (para. 7.7.2), thermal distortion caused by
(c) critical alignment (para. 7.8) moving linear axes (para. 7.7.3), and composite thermal
(d) contouring performance using circular tests error (para. 7.7.4), require a measurement to be performed
(para. 7.9) over a period of 4 h or until “the maximum change in any
(e) coaxiality of axes of rotation (para. 8.2) sensor reading over any 30-min period, at all the sensor
These are discussed, in turn, in paras. M-4.1 through locations, has reduced to 15% of the maximum of that
M-4.5. In all cases, following previously established sensor change over the first 30 min of the test.” These
procedures, the repeatability for a given test should be tests are clearly of long duration. If the User decides that
reported as 4 times the standard uncertainty. it is necessary to obtain an uncertainty, then the tests
should be performed many times (say, a minimum of
M-4.1 Uncertainty Calculation, Spindle Axes of five times) and standard uncertainties in the reported
Rotation parameters computed as described in para. M-4.1. It is
the recommendation of this Nonmandatory Appendix
For spindle error motions, the Standard calls for per-
that this would constitute unwarranted expense.
forming the measurements at three spindle speeds.
At each speed, the error motions are measured for a
minimum of 20 revolutions and averaged to obtain M-4.3 Critical Alignments
the average error motion value. The maximum range All measurements for critical alignments in this
of deviations from the average error motion value is Standard require measuring two straightnesses (using
reported as the asynchronous error motion, and not as either an artifact standard, a straightness interferometer,
an uncertainty in the error motion. This is because it has or a test part) and taking the difference in slopes between
been demonstrated that asynchronous error motion, two lines fit to the respective two sets of straightness
although it may appear to be random, is actually highly data. To compute the uncertainty to be assigned to this
systematic, at least for the case of ball bearing and roller final alignment value (call it W; see para. 7.8.2.1), the fol-
bearing spindles, which constitute a very large percent- lowing approximate procedure should be followed.
age of the spindles on turning centers. The systematic Each straightness measurement should be performed
nature of the asynchronous motion is less well docu- five times. Data should be acquired at the same posi-
mented for aerostatic and hydrostatic spindles. Because tions used for the positioning accuracy and repeatabil-
of the very large number of revolutions required for ity, linear axes (para. 7.2), or more densely, if desired,
assessing uncertainty on ball and roller bearing spin- in both the forward and reverse directions. Note that if
dles, no procedure is recommended here. a straightness interferometer is used, each data point
If the User desires to obtain an uncertainty from should be obtained from an average of many laser
these measurements on aerostatic and hydrostatic readings, as described in para. 7.3.1.4. The straightness
spindles, the complete test (20 revolutions) for each deviations should now be averaged and a standard
error motion should be repeated 10 times. For each uncertainty computed at each measurement position.
of these repetitions, an average error motion and an The procedure is conceptually similar to that used for
asynchronous error motion should be computed. linear positioning, except that no distinction is made
The estimate of the standard uncertainty for these between forward and reverse readings. That is, at each of
131
ASME B5.57-2012
the ith measurement positions, compute a mean straight- beginning and the end of the 10 measurements and the
ness deviation and the standard uncertainty. The stand- mean value of the temperature recorded. In the follow-
ard uncertainty is given by ing discussion, it is assumed that data are acquired at
n intervals over the measured arc. After least-squares
1 n
si 5
n21
∑ (y
j51
ij 2 y i )2 fitting to remove residual eccentricity, the data should
be analyzed as follows. At each interval, i, compute the
where standard uncertainty in the circular deviation following
n 5 10 the normal procedure. That is
si 5 the estimate of the standard uncertainty of the 1 n
straightness deviation at position i si ↑ 5

n21
∑ (d ij 2 di↑)2
yi 5 the mean straightness deviation at position i j51
yij 5 the jth straightness deviation at position i 1 n
Next, for each of the two lines the mean straightness si ↓ 5

n21
∑ (d
j51
ij 2 di↓)2
deviations, which are functions of the axis positions
where the straightness deviations are measured, xi (or where
zi), should be linear least-squares fit to a straight line di 5 the mean circular deviation at the ith angular
using a least-squares fit weighted with the standard position
uncertainties of the straightness deviations.2 dij 5 the jth circular deviation at the ith angular
The standard uncertainties for the slopes of each line position
may be combined in quadrature to yield the square of the n 5 10
standard uncertainty for the alignment angle. That is si 5 the estimate of the standard uncertainty of the
uw2 5 uB12 1 uB22 circular deviations; ↑ and ↓ denote clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation, respectively
where
uB1 5 the standard uncertainty for the slope of the
first line M-4.4.1 Circular Hysteresis. To compute the uncer-
uB2 5 the standard uncertainty for the slope of the tainty in the circular hysteresis, determine the angular
second line position where the maximum radial difference between
the mean circular deviation curves occurs. This differ-
ence is reported as the circular hysteresis. The square of
M-4.4 Contouring Performance Using Circular Tests
the uncertainty in this value is given by
For the contouring performance, the circular
uH2 5 s↑k2 1 s↓k2
hysteresis,3 H; the circular deviations for clockwise, G↑,
and counterclockwise, G↓, contouring; and the radial where
deviations, Fmax and Fmin, for clockwise (↑) and coun- k 5 the angular position where the maximum
terclockwise (↓) contouring, corrected to 20°C, shall radial difference between the mean circular
be reported, as well as the measured feed rates in the deviations occurred
clockwise and counterclockwise directions. The circular
hysteresis is the maximum radial difference between M-4.4.2 Circular Deviation. For determining the
the two actual tool paths in the clockwise and counter- uncertainty in circular deviation, both the clockwise and
clockwise directions at any given angle. The circular counterclockwise data are treated the same. Only the
deviation is the minimum radial separation of two con- clockwise case is given below. The procedure is to note the
centric circles that will envelope the actual path. Finally, angles at which the maximum and minimum deviations in
the radial deviations are the maximum and minimum the mean circular deviation plot occurred for the appropri-
deviations from the circle radius, corrected to 20°C. To ate rotation direction. Then the uncertainty is given by
compute the standard uncertainties of these quantities, uG↑2 5 s↑k2 1 s↑m2
the circular test should be conducted 10 times in both
the clockwise and counterclockwise directions. For each where
set of 10 measurements, the artifact (ball bar, disk, or k 5 the position where the maximum deviation
grid encoder) temperature should be measured at the occurred
m 5 the position where the minimum deviation
2 The procedures for performing such fits are available in almost occurred
any elementary statistics textbook. The weighting is necessary
because, in general, the standard uncertainty of the straightness M-4.4.3 Radial Deviation. As with the circular devi-
deviations will be a function of the axis position.
ation, the clockwise and counterclockwise data analy-
3 When performing this test, care should be taken that the machine
sis is the same. Only the clockwise case is given below.
is moving at the correct feed rate. If the feed rate is different in the
counterclockwise and clockwise directions, the circular hysteresis The procedure is to locate the angular position where
will be measured erroneously. the maximum radial deviation between the calibrated
132
ASME B5.57-2012
radius and the mean measured radius occurred. This where the subscripts indicate the quantity whose uncer-
comparison is performed after the ball bar length has tainty is estimated. The notation is defined in para. 8.2.1.
been corrected to 20°C, using its mean temperature
measured as described in para. M-4.4. The square of the M-4.5.2 Reverse Indicator Method. The standard
uncertainty is then computed as follows (where ↑ or ↓ uncertainties of the vertical and horizontal angles and
has been eliminated for simplicity): offsets should be estimated as
uF2 5 sk2 1 L2s (Ts 2 20)2 u2 (a s ) 1 L2 (T 2 20)2 u2 (a ) 2

(u2SR 0 1 u2SR 6 1 u2SRs )
uVO 5
1 L2s a s2 u2 (Ts ) 1 L2 a 2 u2 (T ) 4
2 2
2
(u SR 0 1u SR 6 1 u2SRs 1 u2 MR 0 1 u2 MR 6 1 u2 MRs )
where uVA 5
4Dg2
k 5 the angular position where the maximum
radial deviation occurred (u2SR 3 1 u2SR 9 )
2
L 5 the effective machine scale length, which is uHO 5
4
equal to the ball bar length
2
Ls 5 the calibrated ball bar length 2
(u SR 3 1 u2SR 9 1 u2 MR 3 1 u2 MR 9 )
uHA 5
T 5 the temperature of the machine scales, which 4Dg2
should be assumed to be equal to Ts
Ts 5 the mean temperature of the ball bar Again, the subscripts indicate a quantity whose uncer-
u(q) 5 the standard uncertainty in the quantity, q tainty is estimated. The notation is defined in para. 8.2.2.
uF 5 the standard uncertainty of the radial
deviation
M-4.5.3 Optical Tail Stock Alignment. If opti-
a 5 the thermal expansion coefficient of the
cal systems are used for tail stock alignment, the
machine scales
instrument manufacturer ’s recommendations for
as 5 the thermal expansion coefficient of the
uncertainty calculations should be followed. The
ball bar
instruments currently on the market function differ-
Although it is not a requirement of this Standard, a better
ently from one another, so no specific equations can
estimate of the uncertainty could be obtained if the temper-
be provided.
atures of the relevant machine scales were measured dur-
ing this test and the actual measured values then used for
M-4.5.4 Two-Sphere Axis Alignment. The standard
the computation. In that case, the average of the two scale
uncertainties of the vertical and horizontal angles and
temperatures should be used in the computation above.
offsets are given by
M-4.5 Coaxiality of Axes of Rotation 2
uHO 2
5 uHO 2
5 uCX
1 1
For computing the uncertainty in the coaxiality of axes of 2 2
uHO 5 uCX
rotation (para. 8.2), the procedures outlined in this Standard 2 2
should be followed, except that the measurements should 2 2 2

2
uSR
be performed 10 times rather than 3. The uncertainties for uVO 5 uVO 5 uCY 1 1
1 1
4
directly measured quantities should be computed using 2
the general equation given in para. M-4.1. 2
u SR2
uVO 5 uC2 Y2 1
2
4
M-4.5.1 Rim-and-Face Method. The standard uncer- 2
(u 2
HO2 + uHO
2
)
tainties of the vertical and horizontal angles and offsets uHA 5 1
Dg2
should be estimated as
2 2 2
2
(uVO + uVO
2
)
2
(uRR 0 1 uRR 6 1 uSRs )
2
uVA 5 2 1
u VO 5 Dg2
4
2 2 2
2
(uFR 6 1 uFR 0 1 uFRs ) The notation is defined in para. 8.2.4.
uVA 
DIA 2
2
2
(uRR 2
3 1 uRR 9 )
M-4.5.5 Parallelism of the Z-Axis With Other Linear
uHO 5 Axes and the C-Axis. Paragraphs 8.2.5 and 8.2.6
4
2 2
describe Z-axis alignment measurements. The uncer-
2
(u FR 9 1 uFR 3) tainties in these alignments should be computed follow-
uHA 
DIA 2 ing the procedures of para. M-4.3.
133
ASME B5.57-2012
NONMANDATORY APPENDIX N
SIGN CONVENTIONS FOR ERROR VALUES
N-1 GENERAL measurements are made with respect to the nominal tool
position. In this case, a positive axial error motion of the
This Standard does not require that the User to use spe- spindle indicates movement of the spindle axis and the
cific signs for the error values. However, it is customary workpiece in the positive Z direction. For the positioning
to define errors as the actual response of the machine tool, accuracy test of an axis that moves the turret, measure-
minus the nominal or anticipated response. Errors are ments are made relative to a nominal workpiece. In this
reported using the machine coordinate system. Positive case, a positive error indicates a positive error in the posi-
values of displacement errors (e.g., positioning and tion of the tool relative to the workpiece.
straightness errors) indicate error motion in the positive
direction of a coordinate axis. Thus, a positive positioning N-3 CRITICAL ALIGNMENTS
error of an axis indicates that the carriage moved farther
along that axis than commanded. Positive angular errors For critical alignments, the following sign convention
(e.g., angular positioning, roll, pitch, and yaw) indicate should be used. The squareness error between two axes
positive angular motions about a coordinate axis. These should be reported as positive if the angle between the
are customarily defined to be positive counterclockwise respective positive coordinate axes exceeds 90 deg. The
for rotation about an axis, using the right-hand rule. parallelism error of axis X2 to axis X1 should be reported
as positive if the actual angle of axis X2 relative to axis
X1 exceeds the respective nominal angle. A positive
N-2 RELATIVE MEASUREMENTS
angle corresponds to positive angular motion around the
The sign of an error is affected by the reference relative machine coordinate axis, orthogonal to the plane of the
to which the error motion is defined and measured. If a parallelism measurement. The offset of axis X2 to axis X1
single axis is tested whose function is to carry the work- should be reported as positive if axis X2 is displaced in a
piece, measurements are made with respect to a nominal positive coordinate direction relative to axis X1.
tool position. In all other cases, measurements are made NOTE: The sign convention used in the compensation tables of the
with respect to a nominal workpiece. For example, the machine tool controller does not necessarily comply with the con-
main spindle carries the workpiece. Therefore, the spindle vention outlined in this Nonmandatory Appendix.
134
ASME B5.57-2012
M16812

Asme B5.57-2012 (2022)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme B5.57-2012 (2022)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Asme B5.57-2012 (2022)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASME B5.

AN AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD

Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA

ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

TECHNICAL COMMITTEE 52 — MACHINE TOOL PERFORMANCE

METHODS FOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

1 SCOPE maximum metal-removal capability. Additionally, the

FORM 1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION

Rotary Machining Axes

Rotary Positioning Axes

Principal Spindle Parameters (for Each Spindle)

Rotation Speed, rpm Spindle Power Continuous Duty

FORM 1 MACHINE DESCRIPTION (CONT’D)

Workpiece or tool spindle: headstock tool

Tool holder type: __________________

Machine Tool Probes (for Each Probe)

List of Compensation Tables in the Controller

Accessible by User, Information Attached,

FORM 2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS GUIDELINES

Thermal Information (para. 5.2)

Daily (24-h) temperature cycling amplitude, �

Maximum temperature gradients

Additional guidelines on machine component placement and special flow parameters,

Nominal Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Linear Machine Feedback Device

Seismic Vibration Allowances (para. 5.3)

Option 1 Response function data

Option 2 Broadband data [time history (para. D-3.2.2)]

FORM 2 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS GUIDELINES (CONT’D)

Electrical (para. 5.4)

Nominal RMS voltage: _______ V Frequency:______ Hz Amperage: _____ A

______ Single-phase _____ Three-phase ______ Delta _____Wye

Allowable short-duration RMS voltage variations (instantaneous)

Voltage sag (8.3 ms to 500 ms): _________ % of nominal

Voltage swell (8.3 ms to 500 ms):_________ % of nominal

Allowable long-duration RMS variations

Overvoltages (> 1 min): % of nominal

Undervoltages (> 1 min): % of nominal

Allowable transient voltage (0.5 �s to 800 �s): % of nominal

Utility Air, If Applicable (para. 5.5)

Particulate removal requirements

Other Services, If Applicable (para. 5.6)

Construction drawings: □ Yes □ No

Supplier shall provide a technical description of the coolant system.

Coolant through spindle: □ Yes □ No

FORM 3 ENVIRONMENTAL TESTS (SECTION 6)

Environmental Temperature Variation Error (para. 6.2)

Location for ETVE Test

Reported Range Drift

Relative Vibration Test (para. 6.3)

FORM 4 MACHINE PERFORMANCE (SECTION 7)

Machine Compliance and Hysteresis (Nonmandatory Appendix H)

Location for Tests (Machine Coordinates)

FORM 4 MACHINE PERFORMANCE (SECTION 7) (CONT’D)

Positioning Accuracy and Repeatability (para. 7.2)

Maximum Unidirectional Bidirectional Systematic Bidirectional

Nominal RMS voltage: _ V Frequency: Hz Amperage: _ A

____ Single-phase _ Three-phase Delta _Wye

MRN 5 mean M gage reading at N 5 0, 3, 6, 9, SMTC 5 significant mean temperature change